JP6843082B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine.

Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") by a player and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

By the way, if the advantageous state for the player is not performed for a long period of time, the disadvantage to the player becomes significantly large. Therefore, there is known a gaming machine having a relief function for forcibly shifting to an advantageous state when the advantageous state is not performed for a long period of time.

Some ingenuity has been made so far regarding the relief function. For example, in Patent Document 1, when a game is won in a transition lottery performed when the state of playing a game is in the ART non-winning, the game machine that shifts the state from the ART non-winning to the ART winning is won in the above transition lottery. When determining the winning probability that indicates the probability of winning, the reciprocal of the remaining number of times that the value indicated by the RT game number counter that counts the number of unit games from the non-winning of ART to the transition to the winning of ART is subtracted from the predetermined number of times. Is proposed to be determined as the winning probability.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-13195

However, the conventional device for the relief function is relief by shifting the state of the game from the normal state to the advantageous state when the normal state, which is not the advantageous state, continues for a long time. Therefore, it is required to provide a new remedy and to have a variation in the treatment for preventing the player from suffering a great disadvantage.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and provides a new remedy means, and provides a game machine having a variation in a remedy function for preventing a player from suffering a great disadvantage. The purpose is.

The gaming machine according to the present invention
The states in which the game is performed include a first gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state (non-ART)), a second gaming state (for example, a first normal ART), and a third gaming state (for example, a second normal ART). It is a game machine that has
A plurality of symbol display units capable of variable display and stop display of a plurality of symbols (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R, reel display window 4),
An internal winning combination determining means capable of determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations (for example, main control circuit 91),
A symbol changing means for displaying the symbol in a variable manner (for example, a main control circuit 91, a stepping motor),
A plurality of stop operation means corresponding to the plurality of symbol display units and receiving a stop operation for stopping the variable display of the symbol (for example, stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R).
A stop control means for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol to be variablely displayed on the symbol display unit according to the operation of the internal winning combination and the stop operation means determined by the internal winning combination determining means (for example, the main control circuit 91). , Stepping motor),
A privilege giving means for giving a privilege according to a display mode of a symbol to be stopped and displayed by the stop control means (for example, a main control circuit 91).
In the first gaming state, refer to the first transition determining means for determining whether to shift from the first gaming state to the second gaming state (for example, the ART lottery number determination table and the ART lottery table according to the modification). The main control circuit 91), which draws the winning or non-winning of ART.
In the second gaming state, a second transition determining means for determining whether to transition from the second gaming state to the third gaming state (for example, from the first normal ART to the second normal ART by winning a cherry). Main control circuit to shift 91),
With
In the second gaming state, the predetermined unit game (for example, the notification pattern A) is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 1000 times), and subsequently, the privilege is granted as compared with the predetermined unit game. It is a state in which a notification game (for example, notification pattern B) having a high probability of notifying the operation order or operation timing of a plurality of stop operation means is performed.
The third gaming state, performs the predetermined unit game the predetermined number of times less specific number than (e.g., 32 times), followed by Ri state der to perform the notification game,
In the second gaming state, the second transition determining means can determine whether to shift from the second gaming state to the third gaming state when the remaining number of times of the predetermined unit game is larger than the specific number of times. Is,
It shall be the features a.

According to such a gaming machine, in the first gaming state, the first transition determining means determines whether to transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state.

Then, in the second gaming state, the second transition determining means determines whether to transition from the second gaming state to the third gaming state. Then, when the transition from the second gaming state to the third gaming state is performed, the number of predetermined unit games is reduced from the predetermined number of times to a smaller specific number of times, and if the predetermined unit game is performed a specific number of times, the predetermined unit game is performed. Compared to the above, it becomes possible to execute a notification game having a high probability of notifying the operation order of a plurality of stop operation means for receiving the privilege. As a result, when it is determined to shift to the third gaming state in the second gaming state, it is possible to reduce the number of games of the predetermined unit game and execute the unit game having a larger privilege.

On the other hand, it may not be determined to shift from the second gaming state to the third gaming state until the number of predetermined unit games reaches the predetermined number of times. Even in such a case, if the number of predetermined unit games reaches a predetermined number, the above-mentioned notification game is subsequently executed. As a result, when the notification game is not executed for a long period of time, the player can be given a feeling as if it is a relief function for forcibly executing the notification game.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
The states in which the game is performed include a first gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state (non-ART)), a second gaming state (for example, a first normal ART), and a third gaming state (for example, a second normal ART). It is a game machine that has
A plurality of symbol display units capable of variable display and stop display of a plurality of symbols (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R, reel display window 4),
An internal winning combination determining means capable of determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations (for example, main control circuit 91),
A symbol changing means for displaying the symbol in a variable manner (for example, main control circuit 91, stepping motor),
A plurality of stop operation means corresponding to the plurality of symbol display units and receiving a stop operation for stopping the variable display of the symbol (for example, stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R).
A stop control means for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol to be variablely displayed on the symbol display unit according to the operation of the internal winning combination and the stop operation means determined by the internal winning combination determining means (for example, the main control circuit 91). , Stepping motor),
A privilege giving means for giving a privilege according to a display mode of a symbol to be stopped and displayed by the stop control means (for example, a main control circuit 91).
In the first gaming state, refer to the first transition determining means for determining whether to shift from the first gaming state to the second gaming state (for example, the ART lottery number determination table and the ART lottery table according to the modification). The main control circuit 91), which draws the winning or non-winning of ART.
In the second gaming state, a second transition determining means for determining whether to transition from the second gaming state to the third gaming state (for example, from the first normal ART to the second normal ART by winning a cherry). Main control circuit to shift 91),
With
In the second gaming state, the predetermined unit game (for example, the notification pattern A) is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 1000 times), and subsequently, the privilege is granted as compared with the predetermined unit game. It is a state in which a notification game (for example, notification pattern B) having a high probability of notifying the operation order or operation timing of a plurality of stop operation means is performed.
The third gaming state is a state in which the predetermined unit game is performed a specific number of times (for example, 32 times) less than the predetermined number of times, and then the notification game is performed.
The first transition determining means determines whether to transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state for each unit game in the first gaming state, regardless of the type of the internal winning combination.
The second transition determining means determines whether to shift from the second gaming state to the third gaming state when the internal winning combination is a predetermined internal winning combination (for example, cherry).
It is characterized by that.

According to such a gaming machine, in the first gaming state, the first transition determining means is from the first gaming state to the second gaming state for each unit game in the first gaming state, regardless of the type of internal winning combination. Decide whether to move to. As a result, the transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state can be executed with a relatively small number of unit games.

Then, in the second gaming state, the second transition determining means determines whether to shift from the second gaming state to the third gaming state when the internal winning combination is a predetermined internal winning combination. Since the second transition determining means draws a lot when the internal winning combination is a predetermined internal winning combination, it is relatively rare that the second transition determining means determines to shift to the third gaming state. Then, when the transition from the second gaming state to the third gaming state is performed, the number of predetermined unit games is reduced from the predetermined number of times to a smaller specific number of times, and if the predetermined unit game is performed a specific number of times, the predetermined unit game is performed. Compared to the above, it becomes possible to execute a notification game having a high probability of notifying the operation order of a plurality of stop operation means for receiving the privilege. As a result, when it is determined to shift to the third gaming state in the second gaming state, it is possible to reduce the number of games of the predetermined unit game and execute the unit game having a larger privilege.

On the other hand, since it is relatively rare that the second transition decision is determined to shift from the second gaming state to the third gaming state, the second gaming state is until the number of predetermined unit games reaches the predetermined number of times. It may not be decided to shift to the third gaming state. Even in such a case, if the number of predetermined unit games reaches a predetermined number, the above-mentioned notification game is subsequently executed. As a result, when the notification game is not executed for a long period of time, the player can be given a feeling as if it is a relief function for forcibly executing the notification game.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a new remedy means and provide a game machine having a variation in a remedy function for preventing a player from suffering a great disadvantage.

It is a figure which shows the functional flow of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the appearance structure of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the information display of the said pachislot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the whole structure of the circuit provided in the said pachislot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the main control circuit of the said pachislot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the sub-control circuit of the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the ratio display of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the gaming state of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement table stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which is stopped and displayed. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the game state regarding the presence / absence of notification of the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flag determination table for lottery stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the table mode in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the table mode transition lottery number determination table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the table mode transition lottery table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in the normal game state in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the CZ lottery number determination table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the normal medium CZ lottery table which is stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery number determination table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the precursor game number lottery table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the CZ promotion lottery table in the CZ omen stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the ART precursor middle addition zone lottery table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in CZ in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery number determination table in CZ stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery table in CZ stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the battle game number lottery table stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the special CZ middle addition zone lottery table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in a normal ART in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the addition lottery number determination table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the addition zone lottery table in a normal ART which is stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the number determination table for lottery of the number of additional games in ART stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the addition game number lottery table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the release mode transition lottery table which is stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the release lottery table which is stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in the addition zone 1 and 2 in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in the addition zone 1 and 2 in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the addition zone level lottery table which is stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the event mass lottery table stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the number determination table for the addition game number lottery in addition zones 1 and 2 stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the addition zone promotion lottery table at the time of a bonus winning, the addition zone 2 end lottery table, and the resurrection stock lottery table at the end of an addition zone 1 stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in the addition zone 3 in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the continuation rate lottery table, the guarantee stock lottery table, 1 set game number lottery table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the addition game number lottery table in the addition zone 3 stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the back mode in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the back mode addition value lottery table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery table at the time of a bonus winning stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in the bonus state in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery table in BB stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the special BB middle addition game number lottery table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the notification content of the main side in the pachislot machine, and the correspondence relationship between the notification of a main side and the notification of a sub side. It is a figure which shows an example of the production in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the menu screen in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the character customization screen in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the outline of the touch operation mode in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the outline of the button operation mode in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table of the customizable combination in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the game history screen in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the back mode absorption effect lottery table which is stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the back mode absorption effect lottery table which is stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the back mode suggestion effect lottery table which is stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the management method of the back mode on the sub side in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in the addition zone 1 and 2 on the sub side in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the display example in a normal BB in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the display example in the special BB in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the display example at the time of normal BB start in the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the main control processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the control process according to the start state of the pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the table mode transition processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process at the start of the pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the CZ precursor process at the start of the pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the processing in CZ at the start of the pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the normal CZ processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the special CZ processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the ART precursor process at the start of the pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process during ART at the start of the pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the normal ART processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the addition zone 1 and 2 processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the event mass control processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the event mass control processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the addition zone 3 processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the bonus at the start of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the reel stop initial setting process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the reel stop control processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus end check process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus operation check process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the RT operation check process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the control process according to the state at the end of the pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the processing in addition zone 1, 2 at the end of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the processing in addition zone 1, 2 at the end of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the processing in addition zone 3 at the end of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the interrupt process by the control of the main CPU of the pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the main board communication task of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the insurance processing at the time of a navigation error of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the insurance processing at the time of a navigation error of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the outline of the transition lottery to the CZ or ART game state in the pachislot machine of the first modification. It is a figure which shows the game lock lottery table stored in the pachislot machine of the 2nd modification. It is a figure which shows the effect lottery table at the time of lock stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the main control processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart following FIG. 106. It is a flowchart which shows the game lock lottery processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the game start lock processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the reel effect processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the production by the game lock in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows another example of the production by the game lock in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the schematic structure of the sound data transmission channel provided in the sub-RAM 103 of the sub-RAM 103 in the pachislot machine of the 3rd modification. It is the schematic schematic diagram of the game information providing system in the 3rd modification. It is a flowchart which shows the uni-memo management task of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the uni-memo menu display request of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the main board communication task of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the periodic interrupt processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the sound data set processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart following FIG. 119. It is a figure which shows the production group lottery table which is stored in the pachislot machine of the 4th modification. It is a figure which shows the battle production lottery table which is stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the medal acceptance / start check process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the main board communication task of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of receiving the start command of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the processing at the time of receiving a reel stop command of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of receiving the medal insertion command of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in the normal state in the pachislot machine of the 5th modification. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in the ART game state in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery number determination table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the stop information notification flag lottery table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process at the start of the pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process during ART at the start of the pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st normal ART update process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd normal ART update processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the hold medal production lottery table which is stored in the pachislot machine of the 6th modification. It is a figure which shows the medal hold effect information storage area provided in the sub-control circuit of the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the character lottery table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the main board communication task of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of receiving the medal insertion command of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of receiving the start command of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the medal hold effect in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the game lock time lottery table for a normal game state / chance zone stored in the pachislot machine of the 7th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the main control processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart following FIG. 106. It is a flowchart which shows the weight processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the lock process at the start of a game of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the information display processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the next game game lock time lottery processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the addition lottery number determination table which is stored in the pachislot machine of the 8th modification. It is a figure which shows the number determination table for lottery of the number of additional games in ART stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the addition game number notification determination table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the initial display in the said pachislot machine and the expectation of the number of additional games. It is a flowchart which shows the main board communication task of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of receiving the start command of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect in the addition zone in the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the initialization process at the time of power-on of the pachislot machine of the 9th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the medal acceptance / start check process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the specific operation detection processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the main board communication task of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of receiving the specific operation command of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in the addition zone 3 in the pachislot machine of the tenth modification. It is a flowchart which shows the addition zone 3 processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the RT operation check process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the main board communication task of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of receiving the start command of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the processing (sub) in ART of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the addition zone 1 and 2 processing (sub) of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the addition zone 3 processing (sub) of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the processing at the time of receiving the unit game end command of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the number determination table for the limiter operation exclusive table mode transition lottery stored in the pachislot machine of the eleventh modification. It is a flowchart which shows the table mode transition processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the winning determination medal payout processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the control process according to the end state in the said pachislot machine.

Hereinafter, a pachi-slot machine will be taken as an example of a gaming machine showing an embodiment of the present invention, and its configuration and operation will be described with reference to the drawings.

[Function flow]
First, the functional flow of the pachislot machine will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachislot machine of the present embodiment, a medal is used as a game medium for playing a game. In addition to medals, coins, game balls, point data for games, tokens, and the like can also be applied as the game medium. In addition, it is not limited to game machines that pay out game media, but is applied to enclosed game machines that enclose game media such as game balls and give benefits as electronic data such as points earned when predetermined grant conditions are met. It is also possible to do.

When a medal is inserted into the pachislot machine by the player and the start lever is operated, one value (hereinafter referred to as a random number value) is extracted from a random number in a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535).

The internal winning combination determining means draws a lot based on the extracted random value and determines the internal winning combination. This internal winning combination determining means is one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit described later. By determining the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols that are allowed to be displayed along the effective line described later is determined. As for the types of symbol combinations, benefits are given to the player, such as a small winning combination in which medals are paid out, a replay in which a replay is activated, and a bonus winning combination in which a bonus is activated. Those related to "winning" and those related to other so-called "losses" are provided.

Further, when the start lever is operated, a plurality of reels are rotated. After that, when the stop button corresponding to the predetermined reel is pressed by the player, the reel stop control means controls to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing when the stop button is pressed. Do. This reel stop control means is one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit described later.

In the pachislot machine, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel within a specified time (190 msec or 75 msec) from the time when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within this specified time is referred to as the "number of sliding pieces". In the present embodiment, when the specified period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces (maximum number of sliding pieces) is set for four symbols, and when the specified period is 75 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces is set. The number is set for one symbol.

When the internal winning combination that allows the combination display of the symbols related to the winning is determined, the reel stop control means usually sets the combination of the symbols to the effective line within the specified time of 190 msec (for 4 symbols). Stop the rotation of the reel so that it is displayed as much as possible along the line. Further, the reel stop control means is, for example, 1 when the challenge bonus (hereinafter referred to as “CB”) and the “MB” (middle bonus) that continuously operate the “CB”, which are the second type special accessories, are operated. For one or more reels, the rotation of the reels is stopped so that the combination of the symbols is displayed as much as possible along the effective line within the specified time of 75 msec (for one symbol). Further, the reel stop control means uses various specified times corresponding to the gaming state to stop the rotation of the reel so that the combination of symbols whose display is not permitted by the internal winning combination is not displayed along the effective line. Let me.

In the present embodiment, the reel stop operation (operation of the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R) that is first performed when all the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotating is the first stop operation and the first stop operation. The stop operation performed after the stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the stop operation performed after the second stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation.

In this way, when all the rotations of the plurality of reels are stopped, the winning determination means determines whether or not the combination of symbols displayed along the effective line is related to winning. This winning determination means is also one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit described later. Then, when it is determined by the winning determination means that the combination of the displayed symbols is related to the winning, a privilege such as a medal payout is given to the player. In the pachislot machine, the above-mentioned series of flows is performed as one game (unit game).

Further, in the pachislot machine, in the flow of the above-mentioned series of game operations, the image display performed by a display device such as a liquid crystal display device, the light output performed by various lamps, the sound output performed by a speaker, or a combination thereof. Various productions are performed using.

Specifically, when the start lever is operated, a random value for production (hereinafter referred to as a random value for production) is extracted in addition to the random value used for determining the internal winning combination described above. When the effect random value is extracted, the effect content determining means determines the effect to be executed this time from a plurality of types of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination by lottery. This effect content determining means is one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the sub-control circuit described later.

Next, when the effect content is determined by the effect content determining means, the effect execution means responds in conjunction with each opportunity such as when the reel starts rotating, when each reel stops rotating, and when it is determined whether or not there is a prize. To execute. In this way, in the pachislot machine, for example, by executing the production content associated with the internal winning combination, there is an opportunity to know or predict the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols to be aimed at). It is provided to the player and can improve the interest of the player.

[Structure of pachislot machine]
Next, the structure of the pachislot machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

<Appearance structure>
FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the external structure of the pachislot machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 2, the pachislot machine 1 includes an exterior body 2. The exterior body 2 has a cabinet that houses a reel, a circuit board, and the like, and a front door that can be opened and closed with respect to the cabinet.

Inside the cabinet, three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are provided side by side. Hereinafter, each reel 3L, 3C, 3R will also be referred to as a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R, respectively. Each reel 3L, 3C, 3R has a reel body formed in a cylindrical shape and a translucent sheet material mounted on the peripheral surface of the reel body. On the surface of the sheet material, a plurality of (for example, 20) patterns are drawn at predetermined intervals along the circumferential direction.

An upper panel unit 10 and a liquid crystal display device 11 are provided above the center of the front door. The upper panel unit 10 is provided in the upper end region of the front door, and the liquid crystal display device 11 is arranged below the upper panel unit 10. The upper panel unit 10 has a light source, and performs an effect by the light emitted from the light source. In addition, the liquid crystal display device 11 executes an effect by displaying an image. Further, a spherical accessory 12 is provided at a substantially central portion of the upper panel unit 10. The spherical accessory 12 has a light source, and performs an effect by the light emitted from the light source.

Further, a touch sensor 111 is provided on the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 11, and the display can be switched according to the operation of the player received via the touch sensor 111. The touch sensor 111 operates according to a predetermined operating principle such as a capacitance method, and when it receives a player's touch operation, it outputs a signal corresponding to the operation as touch input information. The liquid crystal display device 11 is controlled by the sub-control board 72 (see FIG. 4) based on the touch input information output from the touch sensor 111. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the touch sensor 111 is provided so as to cover the entire display surface of the liquid crystal display device 11, the entire surface of the liquid crystal display device 11 functions as a touch panel.

A pedestal portion 13 is provided at the center of the front door 2b. The pedestal portion 13 is provided with a frame member 5 and various devices to be operated by the player.

The frame member 5 has a symbol display area 4 and a stop button mounting portion 15. As shown in FIG. 2, the symbol display area 4 is provided in the opening of the frame member 5, and the stop button mounting portion 15 is provided in the lower part of the opening of the frame member 5.

The symbol display area 4 is an area that overlaps the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R when viewed from the front (player side), and is arranged on the front side (player side) of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R. Reel. The symbol display area 4 functions as a display window, and has a configuration in which three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R arranged behind the display window (cabinet side) can be seen through. Therefore, in the following, the symbol display area 4 is referred to as a reel display window 4.

The reel display window 4 is arranged continuously among a plurality of symbols provided on the peripheral surface of each reel when the rotation of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R provided behind the reel display window 4 is stopped. It is configured so that one symbol is displayed in the frame. The reel display window 4 displays a cross-up line diagonally to the upper right, a top line in the upper row, a center line in the middle row, a bottom line in the lower row, and a cross-down line diagonally downward to the right.

In the reel display window 4, one symbol (three in total) is displayed in each of the upper, middle, and lower areas for each reel in the frame of the reel display window 4. Therefore, the reel display window 4 displays a 3 × 3 symbol. The five lines from the cross-up line to the cross-down line displayed on the reel display window 4 are lines that linearly connect the 3 × 3 symbols displayed on the reel display window 4.

In the present embodiment, the cross-up line out of these five lines is an effective line, and the winning determination is made based on the combination of the symbols displayed along the cross-up line. On the other hand, the four lines other than the cross-up line are pseudo lines that are not used for determining the winning.

The effective line (cross-up line) is activated by operating the MAX bet button 21, which will be described later, or by inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 20. Here, operating the MAX bet button 21 is synonymous with inserting a medal. Therefore, for example, the term "number of inserted medals" includes both the number of BETs inserted by operating the MAX bet button 21 and the number of inserted medals actually inserted into the medal insertion slot 20.

The reel display window 4 is covered with a transparent window cover 16. The window cover 16 is arranged on the inner surface side of the frame member 5, and has a structure that cannot be removed from the front side of the front door.

Further, the frame member 5 has a sheet mounting portion 17. Then, a seat member (information sheet) in which information about the game is described is arranged between the seat mounting portion 17 and the window cover 16. Therefore, the information sheet is covered with a window cover 16 having a smooth surface without irregularities or gaps, and the window cover 16 serves as a mounting portion for the information sheet.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the window cover 16 is not removable from the front side of the front door and has a smooth surface without unevenness or gaps. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts of accessing the inside of the pachislot machine 1 via the above.

The stop button mounting portion 15 is composed of a flat plate member having a substantially trapezoidal surface shape. The stop button mounting portion 15 is provided below the reel display window 4 and is provided so that a substantially trapezoidal surface faces the front (player side). On the substantially trapezoidal surface of the stop button mounting portion 15, three through holes through which the three stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R each pass are provided side by side.

The three stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R are provided corresponding to each of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and each stop button is provided to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel. These stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R are one of various devices to be operated by the player. In the following, the stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R are also referred to as a left stop button 19L, a middle stop button 19C, and a right stop button 19R, respectively.

In addition to the stop button, the pedestal portion 13 is provided with a medal insertion slot 20, a MAX bet button 21, and a start lever 23 as various devices to be operated by the player.

The medal slot 20 is provided to receive medals dropped on the pachislot machine 1 from the outside by the player. The medals received from the medal slot 20 are used for one game up to a preset number of medals (for example, 3), and the amount exceeding the preset number of medals is deposited inside the pachislot machine 1. be able to. That is, the pachislot machine 1 has a so-called credit function.

The MAX bet button 21 is provided to determine the number of medals to be used for one game from the medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1. Further, the start lever 23 is provided to start the rotation of all the reels (3L, 3C, 3R).

Further, when viewed from the front, an information display 14 composed of a 7-segment LED (Light Emitting Diode) and an operation button 22 are provided on the left side of the reel display window 4 of the front door. The information display 14 is connected to the main control board 71, which will be described later, and has the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter referred to as the number of medals to be paid out) and the number of medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as the number of medals to be paid out). Information such as the number of credits) is displayed digitally. The operation button 22 is a button pressed by the player and is connected to the sub-control board 72 described later. The sub-control board 72 controls the detection of pressing the operation button 22 and the selection operation based on the detection. The operation button 22 includes a cross key and a decision button. When the player operates the cross key, the operation button 22 moves in the direction in which the selection cursor described later is operated, and when the player operates the decision button, the selection cursor points to the operation button 22. The item is selected (determined).

Side panel units 26L and 26R are provided on both sides of the pedestal portion 13 of the front door, respectively. Each side panel unit has a light source, and performs an effect by the light emitted from the light source. A settlement button 27 is provided below the left side panel unit 26L. The settlement button 27 is provided to pull out (discharge) the medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1.

A lumbar panel unit 31 is provided below the pedestal portion 13 of the front door. The lumbar panel unit 31 has a decorative panel on which an arbitrary image is drawn, and a light source that emits light for illuminating the decorative panel from the back side.

Below the lumbar panel unit 31, a medal payout outlet 32, speaker holes 33L and 33R, and a medal tray unit 34 are provided. The medal payout outlet 32 guides the medal discharged by driving the hopper device 51 (medal payout device) described later to the outside. The medal tray unit 34 stores medals discharged from the medal payout outlet 32. Inside the front door, speakers 65L and 65R are arranged at positions facing the speaker holes 33L and 33R. Sound effects and sounds such as music corresponding to the production contents output from the speakers 65L and 65R are output to the player side through the speaker holes 33L and 33R.

<Information display>
Next, the configuration of the information display 14 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 3, the information display 14 includes an insert lamp 141, a start lamp 142, a replay lamp 143, a bet number lamp 144, a credit lamp 145, a payout number lamp 146, an instruction monitor 147, and the like. It is configured to include a limit lamp 148.

The insert lamp 141 lights (or blinks (hereinafter omitted)) to notify the player that a medal can be inserted, and the start lamp 142 lights to play a game as the start lever 6 is operated. The replay lamp 143 notifies the player that the medal can be automatically inserted by the operation of the re-game by turning on the replay lamp 143. Further, the bet number lamp 144 informs the player of the number of medals bet by turning on the lamp, and the credit lamp 145 lights up to inform the player of the number of medals stored inside the pachislot machine 1 (number of credits). Is reported to the player, and the payout number lamp 146 is turned on to notify the player of the number of medals (payout number) paid out as a result of the game.

Further, the instruction monitor 147 includes a notification lamp 147a and a status indicator 147b (AT lamp). The notification lamp 147a is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and lights up in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the information of the stop operation to be notified, so that the information of the necessary stop operation is notified to the player. Further, the state indicator 147b is turned on to indicate that the current gaming state is a gaming state (for example, an ART gaming state (see FIG. 18)) that notifies the player of an advantageous stop operation mode. Inform against.

Here, as will be described later, in the present embodiment, a “pushing order combination” is provided, which is a combination in which the combinations of symbols displayed are different according to the order (pushing order) of the stop operation. The mode that uniquely corresponds to the information of the stop operation notified by the notification lamp 147a is, for example, that "1" is displayed when the pressing order "left, middle, right" is notified, and the pressing order "left, right," It means that "2" is displayed when "medium" is notified. The details of the notification of the stop operation information on the notification lamp 147a will be described later in FIG. 58.

As shown in FIG. 4 described later, the information display 14 is controlled by the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal plate 68. Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, in addition to the notification lamp 147a controlled by the main control board 71, other means controlled by the sub control board 72 may be used to notify the information of the stop operation, for example. The liquid crystal display device 11 described above may notify the information of the stop operation.

In this case, the mode of notification in the notification lamp 147a and the mode of notification in other means may be different. That is, the notification lamp 147a may be notified in a manner uniquely corresponding to the information of the stop operation to be notified, and it is not always necessary to directly notify the information of the stop operation (for example, in the notification lamp 147a, "1". Even if it is displayed, it may not be possible to specify the content of the notification depending on the player, so it cannot be said that it is a direct notification). On the other hand, in the notification by other means, the information of the stop operation may be directly notified. For example, when the pressing order "left, middle, right" is notified, the notification lamp 147a displays "1" uniquely corresponding to the pressing order to be notified, while the other means (liquid crystal display device 11) displays the "1". To directly notify that the first stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L, the second stop operation is performed on the middle reel 3C, and the third stop operation is performed on the right reel 3R. May be good.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to notify the information of the necessary stop operation according to the internal winning combination not only by the control of the sub control board 72 but also by the control of the main control board 71. Of course, the notification of the stop operation information may be controlled according to the gaming state. More specifically, the stop operation information may be notified in the ART gaming state (see FIG. 18) described later without notifying the stop operation information in the normal gaming state (non-ART) described later.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the notification lamp 147a is provided separately from the credit lamp 145 and the payout number lamp 146, but either the credit lamp 145 or the payout number lamp 146 is provided without providing the notification lamp 147a. May be used to notify the information of the stop operation.

The insert lamps 141 to the status indicator 147b are turned on, blinked, and turned off by an LED (not shown) provided on the back surface. In the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 controls the lighting, blinking, and extinguishing of the LED to notify the player of various information related to the game.

<Control system of pachislot machine>
Next, the control system included in the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a circuit block diagram showing the configuration of the control system of the pachislot machine 1.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a main control board 71 and a sub control board 72. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a reel relay terminal board 74, a setting key type switch 56, a ratio indicator 58, a cabinet-side relay board 44, and a power supply device 53 connected to the main control board 71. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has an external centralized terminal board 47, a hopper device 51, and a medal auxiliary storage switch 75 connected to the main control board 71 via a cabinet-side relay board 44.

The reel relay terminal plate 74 is arranged inside the reel main body of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel relay terminal plate 74 is electrically connected to a stepping motor (not shown) of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, and relays a signal output from the main control board 71 to the stepping motor.

The setting key type switch 56 is set when setting one of a plurality of setting values provided for setting the magnitude of the profit given to the player, or in the pachi-slot machine 1. It is used to confirm the set value that has been set.

The ratio display 58 is connected to the main control board 71 and displays various ratios such as a specific section ratio and an accessory ratio based on a signal output from the main control board 71. The configuration of the ratio display 58 and the details of the various ratios displayed on the ratio display 58 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The cabinet-side relay board 44 is a relay board for electrically connecting the main control board 71, the external centralized terminal board 47, the hopper device 51, and the medal auxiliary storage switch 75. The external centralized terminal plate 47 is provided to output signals such as a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, and a security signal to the outside of the pachislot machine 1.

The hopper device 51 has a structure capable of accommodating a large number of medals and ejecting them one by one. The hopper device 51 pays out medals when the number of stored medals exceeds, for example, 50, or when the settlement button 27 is pressed to settle the medals. The medals paid out by the hopper device 51 are discharged from the medal payout outlet 32 (see FIG. 2).

The medal auxiliary storage switch 441 detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage (not shown) is full of medals. The medal auxiliary storage stores the medals overflowing from the hopper device 51.

The power supply device 53 includes a power supply board 53b connected to the main control board 71 and a power supply switch 53a connected to the power supply board 53b. The power switch 53a is pressed when supplying the necessary power to the pachislot machine 1, and when the power switch 53a is pressed, the power supply device 53 converts the power of the AC voltage 100V into the power of the DC voltage required in each part. Then, the converted electric power is supplied to each part.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a selector 66, a door open / close monitoring switch 67, a BET switch 77, and a checkout switch 78 connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal plate 68 and the door relay terminal plate 68. , A start switch 79, a stop switch board 80, a game operation display board 81, and a sub-relay board 61.

The selector 66 is a device for selecting whether or not the material and shape of the medal are appropriate, and guides the appropriate medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 20 to the hopper device 51. Although not shown, a medal sensor (insertion operation detecting means) for detecting that an appropriate medal has passed is provided on the path through which the medal passes in the selector 66.

The door open / close monitoring switch 67 outputs a security signal for notifying the open / close of the front door to the outside of the pachislot machine 1. The BET switch 77 detects that the MAX bet button 21 has been pressed by the player. The settlement switch 78 detects that the settlement button 27 has been pressed by the player. The start switch 79 (start operation detecting means) detects that the start lever 23 has been operated by the player (start operation).

The stop switch board 80 (stop operation detecting means) includes a circuit for stopping a rotating reel and a circuit for displaying a stoptable reel by an LED or the like. Further, the stop switch board 80 is provided with a stop switch. The stop switch detects that each of the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R is pressed by the player (stop operation).

The game operation display board 81 is connected to the information display 14, and the inserted medals are received when the insertion of medals is accepted, when the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotatable, and when the replay is performed. This is a substrate for displaying the number of medals on the information display 14. Further, various LEDs are connected to the game operation display board 81. Based on the signal input from the game operation display board 81, these LEDs, for example, turn on a mark for displaying the start of the game, a mark for replaying the game, and the like provided on the information display 14.

The sub-control board 72 is connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal board 68 and the sub-relay board 61. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a sound I / O board 83, an LED board 84, a touch sensor 111, and an operation button 203 connected to the sub-control board 72 via the sub-relay board 61. Since the touch sensor 111 and the operation button 203 have been described above, their description will be omitted here.

The sound I / O board 83 outputs sound to a speaker group including speakers 65L and 65R and various speakers (not shown). The LED board 84 causes various LED groups 85 controlled by the sub-control board 72 to emit light, and turns on, blinks, and turns off these various LED groups 85 in a pattern according to the effect.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a ROM cartridge board 86 and a liquid crystal relay board 87 connected to the sub-control board 72. The ROM cartridge board 86 and the liquid crystal relay board 87 are housed in the sub-control board case 57 together with the sub-control board 72.

The ROM cartridge board 86 is a board for managing image (video), audio, optical, and communication data for production. The liquid crystal relay board 87 is a board that relays the connection wiring between the sub-control board 72 and the liquid crystal display device 11.

<Main control circuit>
Next, the configuration of the main control circuit 91 mounted on the main control board 71 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the main control circuit 91 of the pachislot machine 1.

The main control circuit 91 is mainly composed of a microcomputer 92 mounted on the main control board 71. The microcomputer 92 is composed of a main CPU 93, a main ROM 94, and a main RAM 95.

The main ROM 94 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 93, a data table, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control circuit 101, and the like. Further, the main ROM 94 stores a plurality of minimum game times related to the unit game.

The main RAM 95 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by executing a control program.

A clock pulse generation circuit 96, a frequency divider 97, a random number generator 98, and a sampling circuit 99 are connected to the main CPU 93. The clock pulse generation circuit 96 and the frequency divider 97 generate a clock pulse. The main CPU 93 executes a control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 98 generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). The sampling circuit 99 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

The main CPU 93 counts the number of times a pulse is output to the stepping motor of each reel after detecting the reel index. As a result, the main CPU 93 manages the rotation angle of each reel (mainly, how many symbols the reel has rotated). The reel index is information indicating that the reel has made one revolution. This reel index includes, for example, an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and a detection piece provided at a predetermined position on each reel and interposed between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit due to the rotation of each reel. It is detected by the reel position detection unit (not shown).

Here, the management of the rotation angle of each reel will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 95. Then, each time the output of a predetermined number of pulses required for the rotation of one symbol is counted by the pulse counter, the symbol counter provided in the main RAM 95 is added one by one. The symbol counter is provided according to each reel. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when the reel index is detected by the reel position detection unit (not shown).

That is, in the present embodiment, by managing the symbol counter, it is possible to manage how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol on each reel is detected with reference to the position where the reel index is detected.

<Secondary control circuit>
Next, the configuration of the sub-control circuit 101 mounted on the sub-control board 72 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the sub-control circuit 101 of the pachi-slot machine 1.

The sub-control circuit 101 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 91, and performs processing such as determination and execution of the effect content based on the command transmitted from the main control circuit 91. The sub-control circuit 101 basically includes a sub CPU 102, a sub RAM 103, a rendering processor 104, a drawing RAM 105, and a driver 106.

The sub CPU 102 controls the output of video, sound, and light according to the control program stored in the ROM cartridge board 86 in response to the command transmitted from the main control circuit 91. The ROM cartridge board 86 is basically composed of a program storage area and a data storage area.

The control program executed by the sub CPU 102 is stored in the program storage area. For example, the control program includes a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 91, and an effect registration task for extracting an effect random value and determining and registering the effect content (effect data). Contains various programs to execute. Further, the control program includes a drawing control task for controlling the display of an image by the liquid crystal display device 11 based on the determined effect content, a lamp control task for controlling the output of light from a light source such as the LED group 85, and speakers 65L and 65R. It also includes various programs for executing voice control tasks and the like that control the output of sound from LEDs.

The data storage area includes a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting each effect content, and a storage area for storing animation data related to video creation. The data storage area also includes a storage area for storing sound data related to BGM and sound effects, a storage area for storing lamp data related to a pattern of turning on and off light, and the like.

The sub-RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for registering the determined effect content and effect data, and a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 91.

The sub CPU 102, the rendering processor 104, the drawing RAM (including the frame buffer) 105, and the driver 106 create an image according to the animation data specified by the effect content, and display the created image on the liquid crystal display device 11.

Further, the sub CPU 102 causes the speaker group such as the speakers 65L and 65R to output the sound such as BGM according to the sound data specified by the effect content. Further, the sub CPU 102 controls the lighting and extinguishing of the LED group 85 according to the lamp data specified by the effect content.

<Ratio indicator>
Next, the configuration of the ratio indicator 58 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. As described above in FIG. 7, the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a ratio display 58 for displaying various ratios. FIG. 7A shows an example of mounting the ratio display 58, and FIG. 7B shows the contents displayed on the ratio display 58.

(Composition of ratio display)
As shown in FIG. 7, the ratio indicator 58 is composed of a 4-digit 7-segment LED, and as will be described later in FIG. 7B, the upper 2 digits indicate the type of the ratio to be displayed, and the lower 2 digits. Indicates the value of the ratio. The ratio display 58 is provided inside the pachi-slot machine 1 because the administrator (such as a clerk at a game store) uses the pachi-slot machine 1 to check whether the pachi-slot machine 1 is tampered with. At this time, in order to prevent fraud on the ratio indicator 58 itself, it is preferable that the ratio indicator 58 is provided inside the main control board case that covers the main control board 71.

As a specific mounting example, as shown in FIG. 7 (A-1), the ratio indicator 58 may be mounted on the main control board 71, and is also shown in FIG. 7 (A-2). As described above, it may be mounted on another board (ratio display board) connected to the main control board 71, and as shown in FIG. 7 (A-3), 7 segments as the ratio display 58. The LED unit may be attached by connecting it to the main control board. In any case, as shown in FIG. 7A, it is preferable that the main control board 71 is provided inside the main control board case together with the main control board 71. Here, normally, a recording paper or a sealing sticker is attached to the main control board case, but when the ratio indicator 58 is provided in the main control board case, the visibility of the proportion indicator 58 is provided by the sealing sticker or the like. It is preferable to attach a sealing sticker or the like so that the seal is not damaged. The sealing seal is intended to leave a trace of opening the main control board case, and is a seal specially processed so that a trace remains when the main control board case is peeled off. The recording paper is a paper for recording when the main control board case is attached / detached or opened by a regular procedure, and the identification number of the main control board 71 is printed on the recording paper. There is an entry field for entering the date and time of opening and the person in charge at that time. Here, the formal procedure includes manufacturing of a game machine (at the time of mounting and fixing) and on-site inspection after installation in a game store.

(Display contents of the ratio display)
Subsequently, a display example of the ratio display 58 will be described. As shown in FIG. 7B, the ratio display 58 shows the cumulative specific section ratio, the continuous character ratio and the character ratio between the latest 6000 games, and the cumulative continuous character ratio and the character ratio. , Is displayed. When displaying the cumulative specific section ratio on the ratio display 58, "AU" is displayed in the upper two digits of the 4-digit 7-segment LED, and the ratio of continuous characters between the last 6000 games is displayed. , "= R" is displayed in the upper two digits, and when displaying the character ratio between the last 6000 games, "= b" is displayed in the upper two digits, and the cumulative continuous character ratio is displayed. When this is done, "Ar" is displayed in the upper two digits, and "Ab" is displayed in the upper two digits when the cumulative percentage of the bonus is displayed. Further, the corresponding ratio is displayed as a percentage in the lower two digits of the four-digit 7-segment LED.

Here, the "specific section ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of games played in a game state that is advantageous to the player to the number of games played (that is, the total number of games played) in all the game states. In this case, the gaming state that is advantageous to the player is the notification state (so-called AT (the ART gaming state of the present embodiment)) that notifies the information that is advantageous to the player, and the degree of expectation of transition to this notification state. CZ with a high value may also be included. Further, the bonus state that starts during the notification state may also be included in the advantageous gaming state in this case.

The main control board 71 counts the total number of games, which indicates the number of games in all the game states, and the specific number of games, which indicates the number of games in the game state which is advantageous to the player, at a predetermined counter provided in the main RAM 33. Then, the specific section ratio is calculated by the formula shown below.
Specific section ratio = specific number of games / total number of games x 100

In addition, the "continuous bonus ratio" is related to the first-class special bonus or the first-class special bonus with respect to the total number of medals paid out in all the gaming states (that is, the total number of medals paid out). The ratio of the total number of medals paid out while the accessory continuous operation device is operating.

The main control board 71 has a total number of medals paid out indicating the total number of medals paid out in all game states at a predetermined counter provided in the main RAM 33, and a first-class special bonus or a first-class special bonus. The number of medals paid out during the first specific game, which indicates the total number of medals paid out while the continuous bonus actuating device according to the above is being operated, is counted, and the ratio of continuous bonuses is calculated by the following formula.
Consecutive character ratio = number of payouts during the first specific game / total number of payouts x 100

The "feature ratio" is the total number of medals paid out while any of the bonuses is in operation with respect to the total number of medals paid out in all game states (that is, the total number of medals paid out). The percentage that occupies. In addition, any of the characters is a type 1 special character, a character continuous operation device related to the type 1 special character, a type 2 special character, and a character continuous operation related to the type 2 special character. A device or an ordinary accessory. Further, since the player is in an advantageous state during the ART gaming state and the CZ, it may be included in the state in which any of the accessories is operating.

The main control board 71 has a total number of medals paid out indicating the total number of medals paid out in all gaming states at a predetermined counter provided in the main RAM 33, and medals paid out while any of the accessories is operating. The number of medals paid out during the second specific game, which indicates the total number of medals, is counted, and the bonus ratio is calculated by the following formula.
Consecutive character ratio = number of payouts during the second specified game / total number of payouts x 100

Further, "cumulative" means the entire period from the installation of the pachislot machine 1 to the present, and "between the latest 6000 games" means the period from the game before 6000 games to the present. When calculating the ratio of "cumulative", the main control board 71 may calculate the ratio using the counting result counted in the entire period, and when calculating the ratio of "between the latest 6000 games", The main control board 71 may calculate the ratio using the counting result that has been counted in the period from the game before 6000 games to the present.

The predetermined counter provided in the main RAM 33 is provided in an area that is not cleared (initialized) even when the power is turned on / off or the setting is changed. That is, the data related to the ratio display 58 stored in the main RAM 33 is configured so as not to be erased even when the power is turned on / off or the setting is changed.
Further, a predetermined counter provided in the main RAM 33 counts data related to the ratio display 58 with 400 games as one set. For example, when calculating the ratio between 6000 games, the ratio is calculated using the cumulative counting results of 15 sets.

(Display contents of ratio display (switching display))
The ratio display 58 switches and displays various ratios calculated by the main control board 71. The method of switching the content to be displayed on the ratio display 58 is arbitrary. For example, various ratios may be automatically switched at predetermined intervals, and various types may be manually switched according to the operation of a dedicated switch. The ratio may be switched, or various ratios may be switched by combining automatic switching and manual switching.

(Modification example of ratio display)
By the way, since the existing pachislot machine does not have the ratio display 58, it is necessary to make a major modification to the existing pachislot machine in the installation example of the ratio display 58 shown in FIG. 7 (A). Therefore, the display provided in the existing pachislot machine may be used as the ratio display 58 for displaying various ratios. Specifically, in the existing pachislot machine, a display (information display 14) that displays the number of medals stored (number of credits) and the number of medals paid out in this game (number of payouts). Is provided. Therefore, when a special operation is performed on the pachislot machine, the display unit (credit lamp 145) that displays the number of credits displays the type of ratio to be displayed, and the display unit that displays the number of payouts (payout number lamp). The display of the display may be switchable so that the ratio of the type is displayed in 146).

Although the special operation is optional, it is preferable that the operation uses a switch provided inside the pachislot machine. This makes it possible to prevent the player from accidentally performing a special operation.

[Transition flow of game state of pachislot machine]
Next, the gaming state controlled by the main control board 71 (main CPU 93) of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment and the transition flow thereof will be described with reference to FIG.

In the present embodiment, the main control board 71 manages the gaming state based on the presence / absence of winning / operating of the bonus, the type of the internal winning combination related to the replay, and the winning probability thereof. As shown in FIG. 8, the main control board 71 distinguishes between the bonus non-winning state, the inter-flag state, and the bonus state based on the presence / absence of winning / operating of the bonus (F_BB1 to 3). Specifically, the bonus non-winning state is a state in which the bonus is not winning and the bonus is not operating, and the inter-flag state is a state in which the bonus is winning and the bonus is not operating, and the bonus state. Is the state in which the bonus is activated.

Whether or not the bonus is won is managed based on the data stored in the internal winning combination storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 33, and whether or not the bonus is activated is determined by the game state flag provided in the main RAM 33. It is managed based on the data stored in the storage area (not shown). Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the winning combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination, the winning combination related to the bonus is carried over as the internal winning combination until the bonus is activated. The inter-flag state is a state in which the winning combination related to the bonus is carried over as an internal winning combination.

Further, the main control board 71 is provided with four types of RT0 to RT3 gaming states in which the types of internal winning combinations related to the replay and the winning probabilities thereof are different from each other. The RT0 gaming state is a gaming state in which the player stays in an initial state such as after the end of the bonus state. Further, the RT1 gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability that the winning combination related to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination is low, and the RT2 gaming state is the gaming state in which the probability that the winning combination related to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination is high. It is a game state that becomes. Further, the RT3 gaming state is a gaming state in which the winning combination related to the bonus stays when it is determined as the internal winning combination (that is, between the flags).

These RT0 to RT3 gaming states are managed based on the data stored in the gaming state flag storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 33. Specifically, the pachi-slot machine 1 has three flags, an RT1 game state flag to an RT3 game state flag, and manages the RT game state by managing the on / off of these flags in the main RAM 33. More specifically, the main control board 71 specifies the RT gaming state corresponding to the ON RT gaming state flag as the current RT gaming state. When all the RT game state flags are off, the main control board 71 identifies that the current RT game state is the RT0 game state.

As shown in FIG. 8, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT0 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state when (1) a bell spill is displayed in the RT0 gaming state. Further, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT1 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state when the RT2 transition lip is displayed in the RT1 gaming state, and (3) the bell spill or the RT1 in the RT2 gaming state. When the transition lip is displayed, the gaming state is shifted from the RT2 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state.

Here, when the push order bells (F_push order bell 1_1st to F_push order bell 2_3rd), which will be described later, are determined as the internal winning combination, the bell spills are not in the push order determined for each type of push order bell. It is a combination of symbols displayed when the answer is correct. Further, the RT2 transition lip is when the RT1 medium lip (F_RT1 medium lip_123 to F_RT1 medium lip_321), which will be described later, is determined as the internal winning combination, and the correct answer is in the pressing order determined for each type of RT1 medium lip. It is a combination of displayed symbols. Further, the RT1 transition lip is when the RT2 medium lip (F_RT2 medium lip_1st to F_RT2 medium lip_3rd), which will be described later, is determined as an internal winning combination, and the answer is incorrect in the pressing order determined for each type of RT2 medium lip. It is a combination of symbols displayed in.

Further, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT0 to RT2 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state (between the flags) when (4) the winning combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination in the RT0 to RT2 gaming state. .. Further, the main control board 71 is changed from the RT3 gaming state (between the flags) to the bonus state when the winning combination related to the bonus determined as the internal winning combination in the (5) RT3 gaming state is won and the bonus state starts. To migrate. Further, when the end condition of the bonus state is satisfied during the (6) bonus state, the main control board 71 ends the bonus state and shifts the game state to the RT0 game state.

Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the end condition of the bonus state is that the number of medals paid out during the bonus state exceeds 232 (233 or more). Further, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, during the bonus state, the winning combination (F_RB role, F_7 fanning role, F_7 matching role 1, F_7 matching role 2) is always determined as the internal winning combination. , These roles will definitely win. As a result, 8 medals will always be paid out for each game during the bonus state, and the bonus state will always end with 30 games, so the number of medals paid out during the bonus state. The end condition that the number of medals exceeds 232 can be rephrased as the number of games played in the bonus state reaches 30 times.

[Various data tables on the main control side 1]
Subsequently, the configurations of various data tables necessary for explaining the transition of the gaming state described with reference to FIG. 8 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 17. These various data tables are stored in the main ROM 94.

<Design arrangement table>
The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 9 represents the arrangement of symbols arranged on the surfaces of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R by data. The symbol arrangement table defines the correspondence between the 20 symbol positions "0" to "19" and the symbols corresponding to each of these symbol positions.

The symbol positions "0" to "19" indicate the positions of the symbols arranged along the rotation direction in each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The symbol corresponding to the symbol positions "0" to "19" can be specified by referring to the symbol arrangement table using the value of the symbol counter.

The types of patterns are "Red 7", "Blue 7", "BAR", "Replay", "Bell", "Watermelon", "Cherry", "Blank 1", "Blank 2" and "Blank 3". Includes.

In the symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 9, when the reel index is detected, the symbol located in the middle of the reel display window 4 (the symbol passing through the middle of the reel display window 4) is assigned to the symbol position "0", and the symbol is assigned to the symbol position "0". Correspondence relationships are defined in which symbol positions "0" to "19" are assigned to each of the 20 symbols in the order of movement of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R in the rotation direction. In this way, by using the middle stage of the reel display window 4 as a reference, the type of the symbol located in the middle stage of the reel display window 4 can be specified for each of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

<Design code table>
Further, as shown in FIG. 9, each symbol arranged on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is specified by a symbol code table and is distinguished by 1 byte (8 bits) of data. The symbol code table shown in FIG. 9 represents a code for identifying the symbols arranged on the surfaces of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

The symbols used in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment are "red 7", "blue 7", "BAR", "replay", "bell", "watermelon", "cherry", "blank 1", and "blank". There are 10 types of "2" and "blank 3". In the symbol code table, "00000001" is assigned as data to the "red 7" symbol (symbol code 1), and "00000010" is assigned as data to the "blue 7" symbol (symbol code 2). Has been done. Similarly, "00000011" to "000001010" are assigned as data to each symbol (symbol code 3 to 10) of "BAR" to "blank 3".

<Design combination table>
Next, the symbol combination table will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 12. The symbol combination table is used when a combination of symbols predetermined according to the type of privilege, data stored in the main RAM 95 when the combination of the symbols is displayed, and the combination of the symbols are displayed. The correspondence with the benefits (number of medals paid out) is stipulated.

In the present embodiment, when the combination of symbols displayed along the effective line matches the combination of symbols specified in the symbol combination table, it is determined that the prize is won. Then, when it is determined that the prize is won, the player is given benefits such as paying out medals, operating the replay, and operating the bonus game (continuous operation device for the character). If the combination of symbols displayed along the effective line does not match any of the combinations of symbols specified in the symbol combination table, it is a so-called "missing". That is, in the present embodiment, the combination of the "missing" symbols is specified by not specifying the combination of the symbols corresponding to the "missing" in the symbol combination table. The present invention is not limited to this, and the item of "off" may be provided in the symbol combination table to directly specify "off".

The data column in the symbol combination table defines information for identifying the symbol combination displayed along the valid line. Specifically, in the data column, a "storage area" in which data of a combination of corresponding symbols is stored and "data (bits corresponding to the combination of symbols in 1-byte data)" stored in the storage area. Data for specifying) ”is specified.

The combination specified in the symbol combination table means the symbol combination of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R displayed along the effective line when each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped. For each combination, the role of the combination and the combination name according to the type of the symbol constituting the combination are defined.

In addition, the number of medals to be paid out specified in the symbol combination table specifies the number of medals to be paid out when the corresponding combination of symbols is displayed. For example, referring to FIG. 12, when a combination of symbols of combination names "C_MDF1" to "C_MDSP_02" is displayed in a 3BET game, eight medals are paid out.

In addition, the content column in the symbol combination table indicates the role of each symbol combination and the characteristics of each symbol combination. With reference to FIG. 10, for example, the combination names “C_transition 1_01” to “C_transition 2_04” are combinations of bell-spilled symbols, and when displayed along the valid line, the game state is RT1. It shifts to the game state (see FIG. 8).

Further, the combination names "C_BB_A" to "C_BB_C3" are a combination of symbols related to the continuous operation device (BB) of the first-class special accessory, and when displayed along the effective line, the game state becomes a bonus state. Transition (see FIG. 8).

Further, the combination name "C_reach eye lip" is a combination of symbols related to the reach eye lip, and when displayed along the effective line, the replay operation is performed. It should be noted that the combination of symbols related to the reach eye lip is not displayed along the effective line during the general game state even if it is won, but is displayed along the effective line only between the flags.

Further, the combination names "C_RT2_T lip_01" to "C_RT2_C lip" are combinations of symbols related to the RT2 transition lip. When the RT2 transition lip is displayed along the valid line, the re-game operation is performed and the gaming state shifts to the RT2 gaming state (see FIG. 8).

Further, the combination names "C_B rip" to "C_CD rip_04" are combinations of symbols related to the replay, and when they are displayed along the effective line, the replay operation is performed. Further, the combination names "C_RT1_CU lip" to "C_RT lip_04" are combinations of symbols related to the RT1 transition lip. When the RT1 transition lip is displayed along the valid line, the re-game operation is performed and the gaming state shifts to the RT1 gaming state (see FIG. 8).

Further, the combination names "C_WMLN1_01" to "C_WMLN3" are a combination of symbols related to watermelon spilled eyes, and when displayed along the effective line, one medal is paid out. Further, the combination names "C_CHA_A" to "C_CHA_B4" are combinations of symbols related to chances, and when displayed along the valid line, one medal is paid out.

Further, the combination names "C_control B01_01" to "C_control B10_04" are a combination of symbols related to the first appearance, and when displayed along the valid line, one medal is paid out. Further, the combination name "C_CHE" is a combination of symbols related to weak cherries, and when displayed along the effective line, one medal is paid out.

Further, the combination names "C_control B01_01" to "C_control B10_04" are a combination of symbols related to the first appearance, and when displayed along the valid line, one medal is paid out. Further, the combination names "C_SCHE01" to "C_SCHE03" are combinations of symbols related to strong cherries, and when displayed along the effective line, one medal is paid out.

Further, the combination names "C_CDWMLN1_01" to "C_CUWMLN" are a combination of symbols related to watermelon, and when displayed along the valid line, five medals are paid out. Further, the combination names "C_PCHA1" to "C_PCHA6_04" are a combination of symbols related to the confirmed cherry, and when displayed along the valid line, eight medals are paid out. Further, the combination names "C_CENB_01" to "C_CUB" are a combination of symbols related to the bell, and when displayed along the valid line, eight medals are paid out.

In addition, the combination name "C_MCF1" is a combination of symbols related to 7 medals in BB, and when displayed along the valid line, 8 medals are paid out. Further, the combination names "C_MD1" to "C_MDSP_02" are a combination of symbols related to 7 sets in the BB, and when displayed along the valid line, 8 medals are paid out.

<Internal lottery table>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 13, the internal lottery table referred to when determining the internal winning combination will be described. The internal lottery table is provided for each game state, and defines the lottery value information corresponding to each combination. In the example shown in FIG. 13, the lottery value itself for each combination is omitted, and only whether or not each combination can be won is shown for each game state.
The RT0 to RT2 game states differ only in the lottery value information corresponding to the winning combination related to the replay, and the lottery value information corresponding to the winning combination related to the small winning combination or the bonus is the same. In addition, the RT3 game state is a state in which the role related to the bonus is carried over, and the role related to the bonus is not won (lottery value is 0), but other than that, it is the same as the RT0 to RT2 game state. In addition, only the lottery value information corresponding to the winning combination related to the replay is different, and the lottery value information corresponding to the small winning combination is the same. At this time, during the RT3 game state, the lottery value when the bonuses such as No3 to No7 and the small winning combination are won at the same time decreases, so that the lottery value corresponding to the small winning combination seems to decrease. As the lottery value corresponding to that amount increases, the lottery value of the corresponding small winning combination in No. 35 to No. 39 and the like increases, so that the lottery value corresponding to the small winning combination becomes the same regardless of the RT gaming state.

In the present embodiment, the lottery random values extracted from the predetermined numerical range "0 to 65535" are sequentially subtracted by the lottery values (not shown) according to each combination, and the result of the subtraction is negative. An internal lottery is performed by determining whether or not it has become (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred).

Therefore, the larger the numerical value defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the winning combination to which this is assigned is determined as the internal winning combination. That is, the winning probability of each number can be expressed by "the lottery value corresponding to each number / the number of all random number values that may be extracted (65536)".

With reference to FIG. 13, it can be seen that in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, “missing” is not determined as a result of the lottery during the bonus state. That is, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, any of the roles "F_RB role", "F_7 fanning role", "F_7 matching role 1", and "F_7 matching role 2" is always determined as the internal winning combination during the bonus state. The result of the lottery will not be "missing".

<Correspondence table of internal winning combination and symbol combination>
14 to 16 are comparison tables showing the correspondence with the combination of symbols that can be displayed on the effective line in each internal winning combination when each combination is determined as the internal winning combination. The circles in each correspondence table indicate the combinations of symbols that can be displayed on the effective line in the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination.

In the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 has different stop controls depending on the internal winning combination and the gaming state, and when a predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the correspondence relationships shown in FIGS. 14 to 16 are shown. The rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is stopped so that the combination of symbols can be displayed. Here, in the correspondence table shown in FIGS. 14 to 16, all combinations of symbols that may be displayed when the combination is determined as the internal winning combination are listed, but the circles corresponding to the combinations are listed. Even a combination of marked symbols may not be displayed.

That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the stop control (for example, the symbol to be preferentially pulled in) is made different according to the combination of symbols that can be stopped and displayed and the current gaming state. Even a combination of marked symbols may not be displayed. Therefore, FIG. 17 shows the correspondence between the type of combination and the combination of the symbols that are actually stopped and displayed.

<Correspondence between the winning combination and the combination of symbols in states other than the bonus state>
Correspondence 1 of FIG. 17 shows the correspondence between the winning combination and the combination of symbols in a state other than the bonus state (some combinations are omitted). In the pachi-slot machine 1, as a plurality of combinations, a "push order combination" is provided, which is a combination in which the combinations of symbols displayed according to the order of stop operations (push order) are different. The combination of symbols associated with the "correct answer in the push order" in FIG. 17 is a combination of symbols that is advantageous for the player among the combinations of symbols displayed according to the push order, and corresponds to the "incorrect answer in the push order". The attached symbol combination is a combination of symbols that is disadvantageous to the player among the combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order. When notifying the stop operation which is advantageous for the player, the pushing order which is the correct answer is notified, and as a result, the combination of the symbols associated with the "pushing order correct answer" is displayed.

Here, in the present embodiment, the end of the name of the push order combination indicates the push order that is the correct answer. Specifically, the end "1st" of the name of the combination means that the correct push order is that the first stop operation is for the reel 3L on the left, and the end "2nd" of the name of the combination is The correct push order means that the first stop operation is for the reel 3C in the middle, and the last "3rd" in the name of the combination means that the correct push order is the reel whose first stop operation is on the right. It means that it is for 3R. In addition, the end "123" of the role name means that the correct push order is "left, middle, right", and the end "132" of the role name means that the correct push order is "left". , Right, middle ", and the ending" 213 "of the role name means that the correct push order is" middle, left, right ", and the ending" 231 "of the role name. Means that the correct push order is "left, right, middle".

As shown in FIG. 17, the combinations "F_RT1 medium lip_123" to "F_RT1 medium lip_321" have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and when the pressing order is correct, RT2 If any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 14 to 16 of the symbol combinations related to the transition lip (see FIG. 10) is displayed along the valid line and the pressing order is not correct, Of the combinations of symbols related to the replay (see FIG. 10), any of the combinations of displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 14 to 16 is displayed along the effective line.

In addition, the combinations "F_RT2 medium lip_1st" to "F_RT2 medium lip_3rd" have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and when the pressing order is correct, the combination of symbols related to the replay. If any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 14 to 16 (see FIG. 10) is displayed along the valid line and the pressing order is not correct, the symbol related to the RT1 transition lip is displayed. Of the combinations (see FIG. 10), any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 14 to 16 is displayed along the effective line.

Further, the combinations "F_pushing order bell 1_1st" to "F_pushing order bell 2_3rd" are combinations in which the combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order are different. In the general game state, the combinations "F_pushing order bell 1_1st" to "F_pushing order bell 2_3rd" are shown in FIGS. 14 to 14 of the combinations of symbols related to the bells (see FIG. 12) when the pushing order is correct. If any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIG. 16 is displayed along the valid line and the pressing order is not correct, the symbol combination related to the bell spill or the first appearance (FIG. 10 or FIG. 11), any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 14 to 16 is displayed along the effective line.

Of the combinations "F_push order bell 1_1st" to "F_push order bell 2_3rd", the combination "push order bell 1 ("F_push order bell 1_1st "" F_push order bell 1-2nd "" F_push order bell 1_3rd "" ) ”Is a combination in which the stop control does not change between the general game state and between the flags, and the combination“ push order bell 2 (“ F_push order bell 2_1st”, “F_push order bell 2_2nd”, “F_push order” "Bell 2_3rd") "is a role in which the stop control changes between the general game state and the flag. That is, the combination "pushing order bell 2" is any of the combinations of bell symbols shown in FIGS. 14 to 16 among the combinations of bell symbols (see FIG. 12) regardless of the pressing order during the flag. Is displayed along the valid line.

<Correspondence between winning combination and symbol combination in bonus state>
Correspondence 2 of FIG. 17 shows the correspondence between the winning combination and the combination of symbols in the bonus state. For the combination "F_RB combination", any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 14 to 16 among the bell symbol combinations (see FIG. 12) is displayed along the valid line regardless of the pressing order. ..

Further, as for the combination "F_7 fanning combination", any of the combinations of the symbols of the 7 fannings in the BB or the symbols of the bell (see FIG. 12), which are the combinations of the displayable symbols shown in FIGS. Is displayed. Further, the combinations "F_7 matching combination 1" and "F_7 matching combination 2" are combinations of the displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 14 to 16 among the combinations of the 7 matching or bell symbols in the BB (see FIG. 12). One is displayed along the valid line. It should be noted that the combinations "F_7 fanning combination" to "F_7 matching combination 2" may have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and common symbol combinations are displayed regardless of the pressing order. It may be a role.

As shown in the internal lottery table of FIG. 13, during the bonus state, the result of the internal lottery does not become "missing", and any of the combinations "F_RB combination" to "F_7 matching combination 2" is always the internal winning combination. Is determined as. Then, as shown in Correspondence 2 of FIG. 17, all of the combinations "F_RB combination" to "F_7 matching combination 2" are a combination of symbols (bell, 7 in BB) in which 8 medals are paid out by being displayed. A fan or 7 out of BB) is displayed. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, eight medals for each game are paid out during the bonus state.

<Transition flow of game state regarding presence / absence of notification>
The pachislot machine 1 manages the game state based on the presence / absence of a bonus win / operation, the type of the internal winning combination related to the replay, and the winning probability, and at the same time, whether or not to notify the player of an advantageous stop operation. The game status is managed based on the above. Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 18, the transition flow of the gaming state regarding the presence / absence of notification will be described.

As shown in FIG. 18, the main control board 71 of the pachislot machine 1 distinguishes between the normal gaming state and the CZ (chance zone) and the ART gaming state based on the presence or absence of notification. The normal game state and the CZ are basically game states (non-ART) that do not notify the content of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player, and the ART game state is a game state that notifies the stop operation that is advantageous to the player. Is. In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player plays the game so as to shift from the normal game state (with a bonus state depending on the situation) to the ART game state which is advantageous to the player. ..

The normal gaming state is the most disadvantageous gaming state in the pachislot machine 1, and as shown in FIG. 18, there is a possibility that the normal gaming state shifts to the CZ and ART gaming states. Specifically, the transition lottery to the CZ is performed in the normal gaming state, and (A) When the transition lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the normal gaming state to the CZ. Further, in the normal gaming state, a lottery for shifting to ART is performed. (B) When the lottery for shifting to ART is won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the normal gaming state to the ART gaming state.

The CZ is a gaming state (chance zone) with a high degree of expectation for shifting to the ART gaming state, and as shown in FIG. 18, there is a possibility that the CZ will shift to the normal gaming state or the ART gaming state. Specifically, the CZ performs a transition lottery to ART, and (C) when the transition lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the CZ to the ART gaming state, and (D) this transition. When the CZ is completed without winning the lottery, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the CZ to the normal gaming state.

Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the ART gaming state is basically the gaming state in which the ART is winning among the RT2 gaming states, and starts when the RT gaming state shifts to the RT2 gaming state after the ART winning. As shown in FIG. 8, since the RT2 gaming state shifts from the RT0 and RT1 gaming states, the ART gaming state does not start immediately even after winning the ART. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the period until the transition to the RT2 gaming state after the winning of the ART (more specifically, after the sign of the ART) is set as the ART preparation, and it is necessary to shift to the RT2 gaming state during the ART preparation. Notify the stop operation.

Subsequently, the ART gaming state is basically the gaming state in which the ART is winning among the RT2 gaming states. As shown in FIG. 18, the ART gaming state is usually composed of an ART and an additional zone. The normal ART and the additional zone are in a gaming state in which the playability is different from each other, and the normal ART displays a combination of symbols having a large number of medals to be paid out, which is advantageous for the player during a predetermined number of games. It is a gaming state that notifies the stop operation for the purpose and the stop operation required to maintain the RT2 gaming state), and the additional zone notifies the stop operation that is advantageous to the player and adds the duration of the normal ART. It is a gaming state that functions as an additional chance zone. In addition, during the addition zone, the game is usually performed without digesting the duration of ART.

As shown in FIG. 18, there is a possibility of shifting from the normal ART to the additional zone or the normal gaming state. Specifically, in the normal ART, the transition lottery to the addition zone is performed, and (E) When the transition lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the normal ART to the addition zone. Further, the duration of the normal ART is managed. (G) When the duration ends, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the normal ART to the normal gaming state. Normally, the method of managing the duration of ART is arbitrary, but in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the duration is managed according to the number of games. Of course, the duration may be managed not by the number of games but by the number of medals paid out during normal ART and the difference number, and the number of notifications that affect the payout of medals during normal ART (navigation). The duration may be managed by the number of times).

As shown in FIG. 18, there is a possibility of shifting from the additional zone to the normal ART. Specifically, the end lottery is performed in the addition zone, and (F) the addition zone ends when the end lottery is won, and the main control board 71 shifts the game state from the addition zone to the normal ART. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 18, there is a possibility of shifting from the normal gaming state, the CZ and ART gaming states (normal ART or the additional zone) to the bonus state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 18, when the winning combination related to the bonus is won in the (H) normal gaming state, CZ and ART gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state to the bonus state.

Here, the bonus state includes a normal BB, an episode BB, and a special BB. In the pachislot machine 1, the type of bonus state is determined based on the timing when the winning combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination and the timing when the winning combination related to the bonus is won. Specifically, the main control board 71 determines the special BB as the bonus state to start when the combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination in the addition zone 2 which is a part of the addition zone.

The playability in the bonus state is different between the normal BB and the episode BB and the special BB. Specifically, the main control board 71 performs a lottery to grant the right of the normal ART and the additional zone based on the internal winning combination during the normal BB and the episode BB, and based on the internal winning combination during the special BB. Usually, an additional lottery is performed for the duration of ART. That is, during the normal BB and the episode BB, the right of the normal ART and the additional zone is given, and during the special BB, the number of additional games to add the duration of the normal ART is given. It should be noted that the normal BB and the episode BB differ only in the effect (display) in the bonus state, and the playability in the bonus state is the same. In other words, although the effect control by the sub side (sub control board 72) is different between the normal BB and the episode BB, the game control by the main side (main control board 71) is not different.

As shown in FIG. 18, in the bonus state, the lottery for shifting to the ART gaming state is performed, and at the end of the bonus state, (I) if the right of the ART gaming state is not granted, the main control board 71 Shift the game state from the bonus state to the normal game state. Further, when the right of the (J) ART gaming state is granted at the end of the bonus state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the bonus state to the ART gaming state. In addition, the fact that the right of ART game state is granted at the end of the bonus state means that the right of ART game state is granted due to the lottery performed during the bonus state, and the right of ART game state is granted before the bonus state. Is also included when is given.

[Various data tables on the main control side 2]
Next, the configurations of various data tables necessary for explaining the transition of the gaming state described with reference to FIG. 18 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 58. These various data tables are stored in the main ROM 94.

(Flag determination table for lottery)
FIG. 19 is a lottery flag determination table for determining a lottery flag from the internal winning combination. Generally, in a pachislot machine, various lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination, but when a large number of combinations (44 types when referring to FIG. 19) can be determined as the internal winning combination, the lottery is performed for each combination. If the results are provided, the amount of data required for one lottery will be enormous. From the viewpoint of playability, it is preferable to perform various lottery, but since the capacity of the main ROM 94 is limited due to the specifications, if the amount of data required for one lottery becomes enormous, the types of lottery will be reduced. It has to be, and the playability becomes monotonous as a whole.

Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a large number of combinations are grouped, and various lottery is performed based on the grouped information (lottery flag). As a result, the amount of data required for each lottery can be suppressed. Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by grouping a large number of roles in various modes, each lottery is characterized (for example, in one lottery, the roles in different groups are different from each other. In the lottery, each lottery is characterized by being in the same group).

The lottery flag determination table shown in FIG. 19 is used to group a large number of combinations in various ways, and defines the information of the lottery flag for each combination determined as the internal winning combination. For example, the combination "F_watermelon" is defined as "3" as the lottery flag A, "3" as the lottery flag B, "3" as the lottery flag C, and "1" as the lottery flag D.

<Overview of table mode>
Subsequently, the outline of the table mode will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 20, the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment has three modes, "low accuracy", "high accuracy short", and "high accuracy long", as table modes. This table mode is used, for example, for a CZ lottery performed during a normal game state or an additional lottery performed during an ART game state. Basically, the table mode "low probability" has a low probability of winning in these lottery. In addition, the table modes "high probability short" and "high probability long" are states in which the probability of winning in these lottery is high.

When the gaming state is either the normal gaming state, the preparation for ART, or the normal ART, the main control board 71 shifts to the table mode based on the lottery flag B, and also shifts to the table mode at the end of the bonus state. Make the transition. Specifically, the main control board 71 shifts to the table mode using the data tables shown in FIGS. 21 and 22.

(Table mode transition lottery number determination table)
FIG. 21 is a table mode transition lottery number determination table for determining a table mode transition lottery number from the lottery flag B. The table mode transition lottery number determination table defines the table mode transition lottery number in association with the lottery flag B and the current table mode. The table mode transition lottery number is information used for the table mode transition lottery. For example, when the current table mode is "low accuracy", the lottery flag B "3" is determined to be "2" as the table mode transition lottery number, and the current table mode is "high accuracy short". If, "3" is determined as the table mode transition lottery number, and if the current table mode is "high accuracy long", "4" is determined as the table mode transition lottery number. ..

(Table mode transition lottery table)
FIG. 22 is a table mode transition lottery table for drawing the transition destination of the table mode, and FIG. 22 (A) is performed when the gaming state is either the normal gaming state, ART preparation, or normal ART. It is a table used for the transition lottery, and FIG. 22B is a table used for the transition lottery performed at the end of the bonus state.

As shown in FIG. 22 (A), the table mode transition lottery table 1 defines the lottery value information for the transition destination table mode for each table mode transition lottery number. For example, when the table mode transition lottery number is "3", "high accuracy short" is always drawn as the transition destination table mode.

Further, as shown in FIG. 22B, the table mode transition lottery table 2 defines information on the lottery value for the transition destination table mode for each table mode at the end of the bonus state. For example, when the table mode at the end of the bonus state is "low accuracy", "low accuracy" or "high accuracy short" is drawn as the transfer destination table mode.

<Flow of the game during the normal game state>
Subsequently, the game in the normal game state will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 to 30. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing the flow of the game during the normal game state, and FIGS. 24 to 30 are diagrams showing various data tables used during the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 23, during the normal gaming state, the main control board 71 performs a CZ lottery for shifting to the CZ and an ART lottery for shifting to the ART gaming state. During the normal game state, the main control board 71 performs a CZ lottery based on the lottery flag B and the table mode, and when the CZ lottery is won, the game state is then shifted to the CZ (via a precursor). , In the case of non-winning, the gaming state is maintained as the normal gaming state. Further, during the normal game state, the main control board 71 performs an ART lottery based on the lottery flag A, and when the ART lottery is won, the game state is then changed to the ART game state (via a precursor). However, in the case of non-winning, the gaming state is maintained as the normal gaming state.

(CZ lottery number determination table)
FIG. 24 is a CZ lottery number determination table for determining a CZ lottery number from the lottery flag B. The CZ lottery number determination table defines the CZ lottery number in association with the lottery flag B and the current table mode. The CZ lottery number is information used for the CZ lottery. With reference to the CZ lottery number determination table, the lottery flags "0 (off)" to "3 (push order bell)" are determined as "0" as the CZ lottery number regardless of the current table mode. .. Since the CZ lottery number "0" is a number that does not win the CZ lottery, the lottery flags "0 (off)" to "3 (push order bell)" are used for the CZ lottery. There is no winning.

(Normal medium CZ lottery table)
FIG. 25 is a normal medium CZ lottery table used for the CZ lottery performed during the normal game state based on the CZ lottery number. Normally, the CZ lottery table defines lottery value information regarding the lottery result of the CZ lottery for each CZ lottery number. As will be described later, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has CZ1, CZ2, CZ3, CZ4 and a special CZ as CZs. CZ1 to CZ4 are chance zones with different expectations for winning the ART lottery performed during CZ. Basically, CZ1 is the most difficult to win, CZ2 is the next hardest to win, and CZ3 is the next hard to win. , CZ4 is the easiest to win. In addition, the special CZ is a chance zone in which the transition to the ART gaming state is confirmed at the stage of transition.

In the CZ lottery using the normal medium CZ lottery table, there is a possibility that the transition to CZ1 to CZ4 among CZ1, CZ2, CZ3, CZ4 and the special CZ may be won, and the transition to the special CZ is not won. The special CZ may be transferred by winning the promotion lottery performed during the CZ precursor after winning the transition to CZ1 to CZ4 (see FIG. 29).

(ART lottery number determination table)
FIG. 26 is an ART lottery number determination table for determining an ART lottery number from the lottery flag A. The ART lottery number determination table defines the ART lottery number in association with the lottery flag A and the current gaming state. The ART lottery number is information used for the ART lottery. In addition, referring to the ART lottery number determination table of FIG. 26, in the states other than the normal game state and the state waiting for the end of ART, the ART lottery according to the state is performed separately, so that the bonus is won (lottery). "0 (non-winning for ART lottery)" is determined as the ART lottery number except for the flags A "7" and "8").

(ART lottery table)
FIG. 27 is an ART lottery table used for ART lottery performed based on the ART lottery number. The ART lottery table defines lottery value information regarding the lottery result of the ART lottery for each ART lottery number. The pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment has an additional zone 1, an additional zone 2, and an additional zone 3 as additional zones. The addition zones 1 to 3 are common in that the duration of ART is usually added, but the method of addition and the frequency of addition are different from each other. Details of these additional zones 1 to 3 will be described later.

Further, in the figure, "ART stock +1" means that one normal ART right is granted, and "ART, additional zone 1 stock +1" means that the normal ART right and the additional zone 1 right are combined. One is given to each, and "ART, additional zone 2 stock +1" means that one right to normal ART and one right to additional zone 2 are given, respectively, and "ART, additional zone 3". "Stock +1" means that one right of ART and one right of additional zone 3 are usually granted.

(Lottery table for the number of precursor games)
Subsequently, FIG. 28 is a precursor game number lottery table for determining the precursor game number before shifting to the CZ or ART gaming state when the CZ lottery or ART lottery performed during the normal game state is won. The precursor game number lottery table defines information on the lottery value for the precursor game number for each type of lottery won. When the main control board 71 wins a CZ lottery or an ART lottery during a normal game state, the main control board 71 draws out the number of precursor games, and after the number of precursor games elapses, shifts the game state from the normal game state to the CZ or ART game state. To do.

(CZ promotion lottery table in CZ omen)
Subsequently, FIG. 29 is a CZ promotion lottery table during the CZ omen used for the CZ promotion lottery performed during the CZ omen. The CZ promotion lottery table in the CZ omen defines the lottery value information regarding the lottery result of the promotion lottery for each lottery flag B.

(ART sign middle addition zone lottery table)
Subsequently, FIG. 30 is an ART precursor middle addition zone lottery table used for the stock lottery of the additional zone 1 performed during the ART precursor. The ART precursor middle addition zone lottery table defines the lottery value information regarding the lottery result of the stock lottery for each lottery flag A.

When the main control board 71 wins any of CZ1 to CZ4 in the CZ lottery using FIG. 25, the number of precursor games is set using FIG. 28. Then, the main control board 71 performs a promotion lottery using FIG. 29 during this precursory game, and when the promotion lottery is won, the CZ1 to CZ4 won in the CZ lottery are rewritten to special CZ ( Promote).
Similarly, when the main control board 71 wins the ART in the ART lottery using FIG. 27, the number of precursor games is set using FIG. 28. Then, the main control board 71 performs a stock lottery using FIG. 30 during this precursory game, and when the stock lottery is won, one right of the additional zone 1 is granted.

<Flow of games in CZ>
Subsequently, the game in CZ will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 35. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing the flow of the game in the CZ, and FIGS. 32 to 35 are diagrams showing various data tables used in the CZ.

As shown in FIG. 31 (A), CZ1 to CZ4 are composed of the first half of CZ and the second half of CZ. In the first half of the CZ, 12 games are continued and ART lottery is performed, and in the latter half of the CZ, 3 games or 4 games are continued, and a battle effect is performed to notify the result of the ART lottery during the first half of the CZ.

The main control board 71 performs ART lottery based on the lottery flag B during the first half of CZ, and also draws the number of games in the latter half of CZ at the start of the final game in the first half of CZ. Further, the main control board 71 also performs ART lottery according to the so-called rare role in the latter half of CZ, rewrites the result of ART lottery in the first half of CZ, and grants further ART rights. The main control board 71 shifts the gaming state to the normal gaming state after the end of the CZ when the ART performed during the CZ (first and second half) is not won, and when the ART is won, the gaming state is changed to the gaming state after the end of the CZ. When the game is shifted to the normal ART and the ART and the additional zone are won, the gaming state is shifted to the additional zone of the winning type after the end of the CZ.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 31 (B), the stock lottery of the additional zone is performed during the special CZ, and the special CZ continues until 10 games have passed or until the stock lottery is won. The main control board 71 performs stock lottery of the additional zone 2 in the special CZ based on the lottery flag B. Then, when 10 games have passed without winning the stock lottery in the additional zone 2, the main control board 71 ends the special CZ and shifts the game state to the normal ART, and adds the game before the 10 games have elapsed. If the stock lottery in Zone 2 is won, the special CZ is ended and the game state is added to shift to Zone 2.

(Number determination table for ART lottery in CZ)
FIG. 32 is a CZ ART lottery number determination table for determining the CZ ART lottery number from the lottery flag B. The ART lottery number determination table in CZ is provided for each situation in CZ. For example, during the first half of the CZ that has not yet won the ART lottery, the number determination table for the ART lottery during the CZ of "the first half of the CZ that does not win the ART" is used, and during the second half of the CZ that is performed without winning the ART lottery. The ART lottery number determination table in the CZ of "ART non-winning CZ second half" is used, and the CZ (first half) after winning the ART lottery is the "CZ (first half) middle" CZ after winning the ART lottery. A medium ART lottery number determination table is used.

Further, the CZ medium ART lottery number determination table defines the CZ medium ART lottery number in association with the types of the lottery flags B and CZ. The ART lottery number in CZ is information used for ART lottery performed in CZ1 to CZ4. With reference to the ART lottery number determination table in CZ of FIG. 32, in the first half of CZ, until the ART lottery is won once, the numbers other than "0" are set as the ART lottery numbers in CZ regardless of the type of the lottery flag B. It is determined. On the other hand, once the ART lottery is won, or in the latter half of the CZ, except for the ART lottery number "0" in the CZ, the lottery flags B "3" to "7" (so-called rare role or higher) are determined only.

(ART lottery table in CZ)
FIG. 33 is an ART lottery table in CZ used for ART lottery performed based on the ART lottery number in CZ. The CZ medium ART lottery table defines lottery value information regarding the lottery result of the ART lottery for each CZ medium ART lottery number. In the pachislot machine 1, when the ART lottery number in CZ other than "0" is determined, the ART lottery is won with a predetermined probability.

(Battle game number lottery table)
FIG. 34 is a battle game number lottery table used for determining the number of games (number of battle games) in the latter half of CZ at the start of the final game in the first half of CZ. The battle game number lottery table defines the lottery value information regarding the number of games in the latter half of the CZ according to the result of the ART lottery (winning or non-winning) in the first half of the CZ. In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of games in the latter half of the CZ is always "3 games" when the ART lottery in the first half of the CZ is not won, and when the ART lottery in the first half of the CZ is won. Will be "4 games" with a predetermined probability.

(Special CZ middle addition zone lottery table)
FIG. 35 is a special CZ medium addition zone lottery table used for stock lottery of the addition zone performed during the special CZ. The additional zone lottery table defines the lottery value information regarding the lottery result of the stock lottery of the additional zone 2 for each lottery flag B. During the special CZ, the stock lottery is performed only for the additional zone 2, and the stock lottery is not performed for the other additional zones 1 and 3.

<Flow of games during normal ART>
Subsequently, the game during the normal ART will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 to 42. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing the flow of games during normal ART, and FIGS. 37 to 42 are diagrams showing various data tables used during normal ART.

As shown in FIG. 32 (A), during the normal ART, an additional lottery for adding the duration (number of games) of the normal ART and stocking the additional zone is performed. Normally, the additional lottery during ART is basically performed based on the table mode and the lottery flag C, but when the number of continuous games in the ART game state exceeds 250 games, it is based on the lottery flag C regardless of the table mode. Is done. The number of continuous games in the ART gaming state may be the sum of the number of continuous games during normal ART and the number of continuous games in the additional zones 1 to 3, and is only the number of continuous games during normal ART. You may. In addition, the number of continuous games in the ART game state is not the cumulative number of continuous games including those before the previous time, but the number of continuous games in the ART game state this time, in other words, the ART game state continues without ending. It is the number of continuous games in the same ART game state between.

The main control board 71 normally performs a front mode transition lottery during ART, and also performs the above-mentioned additional lottery. In the case of non-winning in the additional lottery, the main control board 71 continues the normal ART without any addition, and when the additional lottery wins the addition of the number of games, the number of games (duration) is added. If the normal ART is continued and the stock lottery of the additional zone is won in the additional lottery, the game state is shifted from the normal ART to the additional zone of the winning type.
The main control board 71 also performs a front mode transition lottery and an additional lottery even during ART preparation. Here, "preparing for ART" means that the user has the right to the ART gaming state (normal ART, additional mode) and is in the RT0 and RT1 gaming states before the ART gaming state starts. Since the ART gaming state starts when the RT gaming state shifts to the RT2 gaming state after the right of the ART gaming state (normal ART, addition mode) is granted, the ART gaming state starts before the ART gaming state starts (that is, ART). The RT0 and RT1 game states (after the precursory period is over) are called ART preparation.

Further, as shown in FIG. 32 (B), during normal ART, a shift lottery for the release mode and a release lottery based on the release mode are performed. The release mode is a mode in which the winning expectation of the release lottery is different. The release mode transition lottery and the release lottery are performed based on the current release mode, respectively. In the release mode transition lottery, the transfer destination release mode is drawn based on the current release mode, and in the release lottery, the current release mode is selected. The stock lottery of the additional zone 1 is performed based on the release mode.

The main control board 71 switches the set release mode according to the result of the release mode transition lottery. Further, the main control board 71 continues the normal ART when the release lottery is not won, and shifts the gaming state from the normal ART to the additional zone 1 when the release lottery is won.

(Additional lottery number determination table)
FIG. 37 is an additional lottery number determination table for determining an additional lottery number from the lottery flag C. The additional lottery number determination table is provided for each number of continuous games in the current table mode or ART game state. For example, before the ART game state has passed 250 games, the additional lottery number determination table according to the current table mode is used, and after the ART game state has passed 250 games, "ART 250G" is used regardless of the current table mode. An additional lottery number determination table is used. Then, the additional lottery number determination table defines the additional lottery number in association with the lottery flag C.

(Normally ART middle addition zone lottery table)
FIG. 38 is a normal ART middle addition zone lottery table used for the addition lottery performed based on the addition lottery number. Normally, the additional zone lottery table during ART defines the lottery value information regarding the lottery result of the additional lottery for each additional lottery number.

(Number determination table for lottery of additional games during ART)
FIG. 39 is a number determination table for the number of additional games during ART for determining the number of additional games lottery from the lottery flag C. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control board 71 is drawn only for whether or not to add the number of games in the additional lottery, and the number of games to be added is not drawn, but is an additional game performed separately from the additional lottery. The number of games to be added is drawn by number lottery. The number for the number of additional games lottery is information used in the lottery for the number of additional games. The number determination table for the number of additional games during ART is provided for each number of continuous games in the current table mode or the ART game state, and the number for the number of additional games lottery is defined in association with the lottery flag C.

(Additional game number lottery table)
FIG. 40 is an additional game number lottery table used for the additional game number lottery performed based on the additional game number lottery number. The number of additional games lottery table defines information on the lottery value for the number of additional games for each number for the number of additional games lottery.

When the main control board 71 wins the addition of the number of games in the additional lottery using FIG. 38, the number of additional games lottery is determined using FIG. 39, and FIG. 40 is based on the number of additional games lottery. Use to draw the number of additional games.

(Release mode transition lottery table)
Subsequently, FIG. 41 is a release mode transition lottery table used for the release mode transition lottery. The release mode transition lottery table defines the lottery value information for the release mode of the transition destination for each current release mode.

(Release lottery table)
Subsequently, FIG. 42 is a release lottery table used for the release lottery based on the release mode. The release lottery table defines the lottery value information regarding the presence or absence of stock in the additional zone 1 for each current release mode. The main control board 71 uses the release lottery table in the "default" column to perform a release lottery until the number of continuous games in the ART game state exceeds 250 games, and the number of continuous games in the ART game state is 250 games. After exceeding the limit, a release lottery is performed using the release lottery table in the "ART250G" column.

In addition to the additional lottery using the lottery flag C (FIGS. 37 to 40), the main control board 71 also performs a stock lottery (release lottery) of the additional zone based on the release mode, as shown in FIGS. 41 and 42. The release mode transition lottery table and the release lottery table shown are used in this lottery.

<Flow of games in additional zones 1 and 2>
Subsequently, the games in the additional zones 1 and 2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 48. 43 and 44 are diagrams showing the flow of games in the additional zones 1 and 2, and FIGS. 45 to 48 are diagrams showing various data tables used in the additional zones 1 and 2.

As shown in FIG. 43 (A), in the additional zones 1 and 2, event masses are set for each of the five games from the current game (this game) to the game four games later. The event squares slide one by one as the game progresses. Therefore, the main control board 71 sets an event mass for each of the games for the game at the start of the additional zones 1 and 2, and then slides for one vacant game each time the game progresses. Set a new event space for the game.

As shown in FIG. 43 (B), a plurality of types of event masses are provided. The main control board 71 sets the event squares drawn from these plurality of types of event squares in association with each of the five games in the additional zone 1, while the event squares in the additional zone 2 are set. Set only the "back".

In addition, rewards are associated with each event mass. The reward associated with the event mass includes a reward that is advantageous to the player and a reward that is disadvantageous to the player. In the additional zones 1 and 2, the main control board 71 is associated with the event mass set for the game based on the internal winning combination (specifically, the lottery flag C) in this game. Give a reward. Basically, when the bell or higher (lottery flag C "2" or higher) is won, the main control board 71 gives an advantageous reward associated with the event mass, and the replay or lower (lottery flag C "0") is awarded. If "1") is won, a disadvantageous reward associated with the event mass will be given. In the additional zone 2, regardless of the lottery flag C, an advantageous reward (addition of the number of games) associated with the event mass “back” is given.

In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a disadvantageous reward is associated only with the event mass “red”, and only an advantageous reward is associated with the other event masses. Specifically, the event mass "red" is associated with "life-1" as a disadvantageous reward. During the additional zone 1, the duration is managed by the life, and when the life becomes 0 due to the disadvantageous reward "life-1" of the event mass "red", the additional zone 1 ends. In addition, 1 life is given at the start of the additional zone 1 and is given by the reward of the event mass "Character 1".
In addition, in a game in which the event mass "red" is set, if a rare role or higher (lottery flag "3" or higher) is won, a reward of "additional number of games" may be given.

Further, the event cells "Blue 1" to "Blue 5" are associated with "addition of the number of games" as an advantageous reward. Further, the event mass "back" is associated with "shift to the additional zone 2" or "addition of the number of games" as an advantageous reward. Specifically, the event mass "back" may be set in both the additional zones 1 and 2, and the event mass "back" set in the additional zone 1 may be set to the "addition zone 2". Is associated, and "addition of the number of games" is associated with the event mass set in the addition zone 2. Therefore, the main control board 71 shifts the game state to the additional zone 1 or the additional zone 2 when the bell or more wins in the game in which the event mass “back” in the additional zone 1 is set.

Further, the event mass "Character 1" is associated with "Life +1" as an advantageous reward, and the event mass "Character 2" is associated with "Red mass conversion stock +1" as an advantageous reward. .. Here, the "red mass conversion stock" is the right to convert the event mass "red" to another event mass. When the main control board 71 has the "red mass conversion stock" and the event mass "red" is set in the next game, the event mass "red" is converted to another event mass.

Further, the event mass "Character 3" is associated with "double stock +1" as an advantageous reward, and the event mass "Character 4" is associated with "Resurrection stock +1" as an advantageous reward. .. Here, the "double stock" is the right to convert the number of games to be added when adding the number of games to twice the number of games drawn. Further, the "revival stock" is a reset right to restart the additional zone 1 when the life becomes 0 and the additional zone 1 is terminated. When the main control board 71 has "double stock" and the number of games is added by the event mass "blue 1" or the like, the number of games is doubled by the number of additional games determined by lottery. Add on. Further, when the life of the main control board 71 becomes 0 due to the event mass "red" (when the additional zone 1 ends) in the situation where the main control board 71 has the "revival stock", the additional zone 1 is restarted.

In addition, the event mass "battle" is associated with "convert to back mass" as an advantageous reward. Here, "convert to back mass" means to convert the currently set event mass to the event mass "back". In the game in which the event mass "battle" is set, the main control board 71 converts the event mass set for the next game and subsequent games into the event mass "back" when the bell or more wins.

(End condition of additional zone 1)
As shown in FIG. 43 (C), as a result of winning the replay or less in the game in which the event mass "red" is set, the main control board 71 becomes the disadvantageous reward "life-1" of the event mass "red". When the life becomes 0, the additional zone 1 is terminated and the game state is shifted to the normal ART. Even in a game in which the event square "red" is set, if a bell or higher wins, the disadvantageous reward "life-1" of the event square "red" can be avoided, and an additional zone can be avoided. 1 continues. Further, even if the life becomes 0, if the "revival stock" is held, the main control board 71 restarts the additional zone 1.

In addition, if the player has "double stock" or the guaranteed number of games remains, the main control board 71 is assumed to have won the replay or less in the game in which the event mass "red" is set. Also, the disadvantageous reward "Life-1" of the event mass "Red" is not given.

(Transition from additional zone 1 to additional zone 2)
Subsequently, the transition from the additional zone 1 to the additional zone 2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 (D) and 44 (E). As described above, the event mass "back" is associated with "transition to additional zone 2" as an advantageous reward. In the game in which the event mass "back" in the additional zone 1 is set, the main control board 71 is accompanied by the advantageous reward "shift to the additional zone 2" of the event mass "back" when a bell or more wins. The gaming state is shifted from the additional zone 1 to the additional zone 2. On the other hand, in the game in which the event mass "back" in the additional zone 1 is set, the main control board 71 keeps the game state in the additional zone 1 without giving an advantageous reward when the replay or less wins. maintain.

Further, as shown in FIG. 44 (E), when the winning combination related to the bonus is won in the additional zone 1, the main control board 71 performs a promotion lottery for the additional zone. When the main control board 71 wins the promotion lottery, the addition zone 1 is promoted to the addition zone 2. In this case, the bonus state that starts with the winning of the winning combination related to the bonus is a special BB having the same playability as the additional zone 2. On the other hand, in the case of non-winning in the promotion lottery, the main control board 71 maintains the additional zone 1 without promotion, and in this case, the starting bonus state is normal BB or episode BB.

(End condition of additional zone 2)
As shown in FIG. 44 (F), the main control board 71 performs an end lottery when the replay or less wins in the addition zone 2, and continues the addition zone 2 when the continuation is determined in the end lottery. On the contrary, when the end is decided in the end lottery, the addition zone 2 is ended and the gaming state is shifted from the addition zone 2 to the addition zone 1. In the additional zone 2, the guaranteed number of games is given, and the main control board 71 does not perform the end lottery itself when the guaranteed number of games remains.

(Additional zone level lottery table)
Subsequently, FIG. 45 is an additional zone level lottery table for determining the additional zone level. The additional zone level lottery table defines the lottery value information for the additional zone level. Here, the additional zone level is information used for determining the event mass to be set in the additional zone 1. Basically, the higher the additional zone level, the easier it is for the player to set an advantageous event mass. ..

The main control board 71 determines the additional zone level at the start of the additional zone 1 (more specifically, at the end of the game one game before the game that starts the additional zone 1), and is based on the determined additional zone level. Set the event mass. When the additional zone 1 is restarted by the above-mentioned "revival stock", the main control board 71 determines a more advantageous additional zone level 3 as the additional zone level (that is, at the time of restarting by the "revival stock"). , The additional zone level 3 is determined with a higher probability than the first hit of the additional zone 1).

(Event mass lottery table)
Subsequently, FIG. 46 is an event mass lottery table used for drawing the event mass to be set. The event mass lottery table defines the lottery value information for the event mass to be set as a result of the lottery. At the start of the additional zone 1, the main control board 71 determines the event masses for five games using the event mass lottery table shown in the “starting time” of FIG. 46 (A). With reference to the event square lottery table at the "start", it can be seen that the event square "red" is not set except for the third square at the start of the additional zone 1.

Further, the main control board 71 determines the event mass to be set by using the event mass lottery table shown in "other than the start time" of FIG. 46 (A) in the second and subsequent games of the additional zone 1. When referring to the event mass lottery table of "other than the start", the event mass is determined according to the additional zone level from the second game onward, and at the additional zone level "Lv3", the event mass is higher than the additional zone level "Lv1". It can be seen that the probability of determining "red" is low.

When converting the event mass "red", the main control board 71 determines the converted event mass using the event mass lottery table shown in "At the time of red conversion" in FIG. 46 (A). In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in addition to the case where there is a "red mass conversion stock", the event mass "red" is converted when two event masses "red" are set in succession. .. The event square lottery table shown in "after red square" is a table that is referred to when two event squares "red" are set in succession, and the event square lottery table shown in "stock consumption" is "red". It is a table that is referred to when there is "mass conversion stock".

Further, the main control board 71 determines the event mass to be set by using the event mass lottery table shown in "every 20 games" of FIG. 46 (A) every time the game is played a specific number of times in the addition zone 1. .. In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the event mass "battle" is set regularly (every 20 games) in the addition zone 1, and the event mass lottery table of "every 20 games" is a regular event. Used for the mass "Battle" set.

Further, in the addition zone 2 and the special BB, the main control board 71 draws the event mass to be set by using the event lottery table shown in the “addition zone 2” of FIG. 46 (A). By referring to the event lottery table of the "addition zone 2", it can be seen that the event mass "back" is always determined during the addition zone 2 and the special BB.

The event mass lottery table 2 shown in FIG. 46 (B) is a table that is referred to when the event mass "character" is determined in the event mass lottery table 1 shown in FIG. 46 (A). Information on the lottery value for the reward (reward according to characters 1 to 4) set for the "character" is specified. When the event mass "character" is determined in the event mass lottery table 1, the main control board 71 sets the event mass from the event masses "character 1" to "character 4" using the event mass lottery table 2. decide. Then, when the bell or more wins in the game in which the event mass is set, the main control board 71 gives a reward according to the set "character 1" to "character 4".

Further, the event mass lottery table 3 shown in FIG. 46 (C) is a table that is referred to when the event mass "battle" is determined in the event mass lottery table 1 shown in FIG. 46 (A), and the event mass is the table. The lottery value information about the reward (the number of back squares converted) set for "battle" is specified. When the event mass "battle" is determined in the event mass lottery table 1, the main control board 71 determines the number of back mass conversions using the event mass lottery table 3 and sets it in the event mass "battle". Then, when the bell or more wins in the game in which the event mass is set, the main control board 71 sets the event mass "back" for the game for the number of converted back masses from the next time onward. To convert to.
As will be described later, the event squares will be displayed by the corresponding display squares, but in the event squares "battle", the display squares corresponding to the set number of back squares converted (for example, the boss of the enemy character) ) Is displayed.

(Addition zone 1, 2 middle addition game number lottery number determination table)
Subsequently, FIG. 47 is a number determination table for the number of additional games in the additional zone for determining the number of additional games lottery from the lottery flag C. Normally, during ART, the number of additional games lottery is determined using the number determination table for the number of additional games during ART shown in FIG. 39, but the number of additional games during the additional zones 1 and 2 is determined. Number of additional games The lottery number is determined using the lottery number determination table. The number of additional games lottery number determination table in the additional zones 1 and 2 defines the number of additional games lottery number in association with the lottery flag C for each type of event mass.

In addition, since an advantageous reward of "transition to the additional zone 2" is set in the event mass "back" in the additional zone 1, the event mass "back" is added to the event mass "back" in the additional zone 1. The game lottery number "0" may be specified. In this case, the additional game lottery number "0" may be specified for all of the lottery flags C, and a part of the lottery flags C (for example, bell or less (lottery flag C "0") may be specified. "2")), the additional game lottery number "0" is specified, and other lottery flags C (for example, rare role or higher (lottery flag C "3" or higher)) are shown. The additional game lottery number may be specified.
In addition, in the number determination table for the number of additional games in the additional zones 1 and 2, the number of additional games other than "0" for the rare role or higher (lottery flag C "3" or higher) in the event mass "red". Although the lottery number is specified, the number of additional games may be specified as the lottery number "0" even if the event mass "red" is a rare role or higher. That is, the event mass "red" is an event mass in which "life-1" is defined as a disadvantageous reward, and an event that determines only whether or not life is subtracted by 1 without adding the number of ART games. It may be a trout.

In the additional zones 1 and 2, when the main control board 71 determines the number of additional games lottery according to the lottery flag C and the event mass, it is determined by referring to the number of additional games lottery table shown in FIG. 40. Number of additional games added The number of additional games is drawn from the lottery number.

(Additional zone promotion lottery table at the time of bonus winning)
Subsequently, FIG. 48A is a bonus winning zone promotion lottery table used for the bonus winning promotion lottery performed at the time of bonus winning in the bonus zone 1. The additional zone promotion lottery table at the time of bonus winning defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the promotion lottery of the additional zone. When the bonus-related winning combination is won in the additional zone 1, the main control board 71 performs a promotion lottery as to whether or not the additional zone 1 is promoted to the additional zone 2, and if the bonus is won in this promotion lottery, the additional zone 1 is used. 1 is added and promoted to zone 2, and the bonus state that starts with the bonus winning is set as special BB.

(Addition zone 2 end lottery table)
Subsequently, FIG. 48B is an additional zone 2 end lottery table used for the end lottery of the additional zone 2. The addition zone 2 end lottery table defines the lottery value information about the result of the end lottery for each lottery flag D. Addition Zone 2 End With reference to the lottery table, the addition zone 2 continues with a win of bell or more (lottery flag D "1") and ends with a predetermined probability at the time of replay or less (lottery flag D "0"). ..

(Resurrection stock lottery table at the end of additional zone 1)
Subsequently, FIG. 48C is a revival stock lottery table at the end of the additional zone 1 used for the lottery of the “resurrection stock” performed at the end of the additional zone 1. The resurrection stock lottery table at the end of the additional zone 1 defines the lottery value information for the "resurrection stock" lottery. If you win this "Resurrection Stock" lottery, you will be given one "Resurrection Stock".

<Flow of games in additional zone 3>
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 49 to 51, the game in the additional zone 3 will be described. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing the flow of the game in the additional zone 3, and FIGS. 50 and 51 are diagrams showing various data tables used in the additional zone 3.

As shown in FIG. 49 (A), in the additional zone 3, a plurality of games are set as one set, and one set of games is repeated until a non-winning result is obtained in the continuation determination. Further, as shown in FIG. 49 (B), during the addition zone 3, the main control board 71 ends the game at the start of the addition zone 3 (more specifically, the end of the game one game before the start of the addition zone 3). At the time), the continuation rate is drawn, and at the start of one set (more specifically, at the end of the previous set), the guarantee stock is drawn, the number of games in one set is drawn, and the continuation judgment is drawn. Further, in the addition zone 3, the main control board 71 performs an addition lottery for each game and the number of games. Therefore, the addition zone 3 is a state in which the number of games is added without digesting the number of games normally in ART until the continuation determination performed for each of a plurality of games (one set) is not won. It can be said that.

(Continuation rate lottery table)
FIG. 50A is a continuation rate lottery table used for drawing a continuation rate that defines the winning probability of the continuation determination. The continuation rate lottery table defines the lottery value information for the continuation rate. The main control board 71 draws a continuation rate at the start of the additional zone 3 (more specifically, at the end of the game one game before the game that starts the additional zone 3), and uses this continuation rate to determine the continuation. Lottery is performed.

(Guaranteed stock lottery table)
FIG. 50B is a guaranteed stock lottery table used for drawing the guaranteed stock number. The guaranteed stock lottery table provides information on the lottery value for the number of guaranteed stocks. Here, if there is a guaranteed stock, the additional zone 3 is continued (the next set is started) without making a continuation determination.
If the guaranteed stock is given by the lottery of the guaranteed stock number using the guaranteed stock lottery table during one additional zone 3, no further lottery of the guaranteed stock number is performed during the additional zone 3.

(1 set game number lottery table)
FIG. 50C is a one-set game number lottery table used for drawing one set of games. The number of games per set lottery table is provided for each presence / absence of guaranteed stock and the number of consecutive villas (more specifically, the number of consecutive villas ÷ 4 remainder), and the number of games per set as a result of the lottery. Specify the lottery value information.

(Continuation judgment table)
FIG. 50 (D) is a continuation determination table used for continuation determination as to whether or not to continue the additional zone 3. The continuation determination table defines information on the lottery value for the determination result (end, continuation) for each continuation rate. The main control board 71 makes a continuation determination at the start of one set (more specifically, at the end of the previous set) according to the continuation rate determined by using the continuation rate lottery table at the start of the addition zone 3. As a result of the continuation determination, the main control board 71 continues the additional zone 3 when it is determined to be continuous, and ends the additional zone 3 when it is determined to be completed, and shifts the gaming state to the normal ART. Let me.
The main control board 71 makes a continuation determination when the guaranteed stock is 0, and if there is a guaranteed stock, the number of guaranteed stocks is subtracted by 1 without performing the continuation determination.

(Additional zone 3 middle additional game number lottery table)
FIG. 51 (E) is a drawing table for the number of additional games in the additional zone 3 for determining the number of games to be added in the additional zone 3. The number of additional games in the additional zone 3 The lottery table defines information on the lottery value for the number of additional games as a result of the lottery for each lottery flag C. The main control board 71 performs an additional lottery of the number of games by using the additional game number lottery table in each game and the additional zone 3 during the additional zone 3.
In addition, in the game in the set whose end is determined in the continuation determination, when the additional lottery of the number of games is won (the number of additional games is "10" or more), the main control board 71 ends the result of the continuation determination. Rewrite from to continuation.

<Overview of back mode>
Subsequently, the outline of the back mode will be described with reference to FIG. 52. As shown in FIG. 52, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the back mode is managed separately from the above-mentioned front mode. The back mode is a mode in which the numbers are sequentially added (accumulated) according to the progress of the game, and the rights to the normal ART and the additional zone are granted based on the back mode accumulated up to that point when the winning combination related to the bonus is won. Will be done.

The addition of the back mode is performed at the end of the game in which the back mode lottery state is set. In addition, the subtraction of the back mode is performed at the timing when the privilege based on the back mode (usually ART or the right of the additional zone) is given. In addition, since the back mode lottery state is basically set when the result of the game is disadvantageous to the player, the back mode is added when the result of the game is disadvantageous to the player ( Will be accumulated).

Here, the back mode lottery state is a plurality of states in which expectations for the amount of the back mode to be added are different. In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the back mode lottery state is "reset", "small lottery", and "small lottery". It has five types of states: "during lottery", "large lottery", and "special". The back mode lottery state is set when the game is in a specific situation, and is cleared when the back mode is added based on the set back mode lottery state (that is, the back mode addition is set to the back mode lottery state. It is done only once at the set timing).

Specifically, the main control board 71 sets "reset" as the back mode lottery state when the back mode becomes "0". The case where the back mode becomes "0" corresponds to, for example, the case where the back mode is cleared by the initialization or the case where the back mode is subtracted by the privilege grant based on the back mode. Further, the main control board 71 sets "lottery small" as the back mode lottery state when CZ1 to CZ3 finish without winning the ART lottery, and back when CZ4 finishes without winning the ART lottery. Set "During lottery" as the mode lottery state.

Further, the main control board 71 sets the back mode lottery state based on the number of continuous games being prepared for ART. Specifically, the main control board 71 sets "small lottery" as the back mode lottery state when 20 games continue during ART preparation, and sets "lottery small" as the back mode lottery state when ART preparation continues for 30 games. Set "Small lottery", set "Lottery in progress" as the back mode lottery state when 40 games continue while preparing for ART, and set "Large lottery" as the back mode lottery state when 50 games continue while preparing for ART. set. Further, when the main control board 71 continues for 50 games or more while preparing for ART, "lottery size" is set as the back mode lottery state every 10 games (60, 70, 80 ...).

Further, the main control board 71 sets "lottery small" as the back mode lottery state when the combinations "F_chance combination 1", "F_chance combination 2", and "F_strong cherry" are determined as internal winning combinations during the flag period. set. Further, the main control board 71 sets "in lottery" as the back mode lottery state when the ART game state ends by running through. In addition, ending by running through means that the number of games is added, the winning of the additional zone, and the winning of the role related to the bonus are never performed during the ART game state. The main control board 71 sets "lottery" as the back mode lottery state at the timing of shifting from the RT2 game state to the RT1 game state after the ART game state ends by running through. In the present embodiment, the state from the RT2 gaming state to the transition to the RT1 gaming state after the ART gaming state is completed is referred to as "waiting for ART completion".

Further, the main control board 71 assigns "special" as a back mode lottery state when the game state shifts from the RT2 game state to the RT1 game state in a situation other than during the ART game state or after the end of the ART game state. .. As described above, in the game in the RT1 game state in which the combinations "F_RT1 medium lip_123" to "F_RT1 medium lip_321" are determined as the internal winning combination, if the correct answer is given in the pressing order, the combination of the symbols of the RT2 transition lip is displayed. , The gaming state shifts from the RT1 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state. Therefore, depending on the order of the stop operations of the player, the game may accidentally shift to the RT2 game state during the RT1 game state. Similarly, the RT2 gaming state may be changed to the RT1 gaming state by chance depending on the order of the player's stop operations. In such a case, the main control board 71 sets "special" as the back mode lottery state.

When the back mode lottery state is set, the main control board 71 adds the back mode only once at the set timing. Further, the main control board 71 grants or draws a privilege based on the back mode at the time of winning a winning combination related to the bonus, and subtracts the back mode when the bonus is given. Specifically, the main control board 71 manages the back mode using the data tables shown in FIGS. 53 and 54.

(Back mode addition value lottery table)
FIG. 53 is a back mode addition value lottery table for determining the back mode addition value when the back mode lottery state is set. The back mode addition value lottery table defines the lottery value information for the back mode addition value for each back mode lottery state. When the back mode lottery state is set, the main control board 71 draws the back mode addition value based on the set back mode lottery state, and adds the back mode by the amount of the back mode addition value.

(ART lottery table at the time of bonus winning)
FIG. 54 is a bonus winning ART lottery table for drawing whether or not to give a privilege based on the back mode at the time of winning a winning combination related to the bonus. The ART lottery table at the time of bonus winning defines the lottery value information regarding the lottery result of the ART lottery for each value of the back mode (more specifically, the quotient of the back mode ÷ 50). When the main control board 71 wins (other than non-winning), the main control board 71 grants one right corresponding to the winning content and subtracts 50 from the back mode. If the back mode becomes a negative value as a result of the subtraction, the main control board 71 sets the value of the back mode to 0. If you win this lottery at the time of winning the bonus, the bonus state to start subsequently will be episode BB (however, if the bonus state to start is special BB, it will remain special BB).

<Flow of the game during the bonus state>
Subsequently, the game in the bonus state will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 57. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing the flow of the game in the bonus state, and FIGS. 56 and 57 are diagrams showing various data tables used in the bonus state.

As shown in FIG. 55 (A), the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a special BB, an episode BB, and a normal BB as bonus states. These bonus states are distributed based on the conditions met at the start of the bonus state. Specifically, the pachi-slot machine 1 (main control board 71) wins the promotion lottery (see FIG. 48 (A)) at the time of bonus winning performed in the additional zone 1, or has a role related to the bonus in the additional zone 2. If any of the conditions of winning is satisfied, the starting bonus state is treated as a special BB.

In addition, the pachislot machine 1 episodes the bonus state that starts when the stock of normal ART is +1 or more due to the winning or winning of the role related to the bonus that triggered the start of the bonus state at the start of the bonus state. Treat as BB. In addition, when the stock of normal ART becomes +1 or more due to the winning or winning of the role related to the bonus that triggered the start, for example, at the time of winning the confirmed BB (lottery flag A "8") or during the special CZ. This corresponds to the normal BB (lottery flag A “7”) winning time (see FIGS. 26 and 27) and the ART lottery winning time based on the back mode (see FIG. 54).

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 treats the bonus state to be started as a normal BB when neither the special BB nor the episode BB is satisfied. It should be noted that the normal BB and the episode BB differ only in the content of the effect on the liquid crystal display device 11, and the playability in the bonus state is the same. Therefore, the main control board 71 may handle the normal BB and the episode BB without distinguishing them, and the sub control board 72 may distinguish the normal BB from the episode BB. On the other hand, since the special BB differs not only in the effect content but also in the playability, it is managed that the bonus state to be started is the special BB also in the main control board 71.

(Flow of games during normal BB and episode BB)
Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 55 (B), when 7 sets in BB are established during normal BB and episode BB, more specifically, during the bonus state, the roles “F_7 match combination 1” and “F_7 match combination 1” and “F_7 match combination” are established. When "2" is decided as an internal bonus, the right of ART or additional zone is usually granted.

(Flow of games during special BB)
Subsequently, the flow of the game in the special BB will be described with reference to FIG. 55 (C). As described above, during the special BB, it has the same playability as the additional zone 2. More specifically, in the additional zone 2, the event mass "back" is set for each game, and each game until the end of the end lottery of the additional zone 2, the number of games based on the event mass "back". Addition is performed (see FIGS. 47 and 40 (in the event mass "back", the number of games is always added because the lottery number "1" or more is always determined)). The special BB has continuity with the additional zone 2 in terms of game playability, and each game and the number of games are added. Further, as will be described later in FIG. 72, the special BB has continuity with the additional zone 2 from the effect side, and during the special BB and the additional zone 2, the liquid crystal display device 11 has an event mass “back”. The image corresponding to "" is set and displayed for each game.

(ART lottery table in BB)
FIG. 56 is an ART lottery table in BB used for ART lottery usually performed during BB or episode BB. The ART lottery table in BB is usually provided for each presence or absence of stock of ART, and defines the lottery value information about the result of ART lottery for the lottery flag E. During normal BB or episode BB, the main control board 71 performs ART lottery based on the lottery flag E, and when the lottery is won, the corresponding stock is added by 1.

(Special BB middle addition game number lottery table)
FIG. 57 is a special BB medium addition game number lottery table used for performing an addition lottery of the number of games based on the lottery flag E on the special BB. The lottery table for the number of additional games in the special BB defines information on the lottery value for the number of additional games as a result of the lottery in association with the lottery flag E. As described above, during the bonus state, the roles "F_RB role", "F_7 fanning role", "F_7 matching role 1", and "F_7 matching role 2" are always determined as the internal winning combination and are not "missing". If you refer to the lottery table for the number of extra games in the special BB, add 5 or more to the lottery flag E according to these roles "F_RB role", "F_7 fanning role", "F_7 matching role 1", and "F_7 matching role 2". Since the number of games is associated with each other, the number of games is always added to each game during the special BB.

<Overview of push order notification during ART>
As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, various gaming states are controlled by the main control board 71. Here, the pachi-slot machine 1 notifies the player of an advantageous stop operation mode (pushing order) during an ART gaming state or the like. This notification is performed on both the main (main control board 71) and the sub (sub control board 72). In FIG. 58, the contents of the main side notification (navigation), the main side notification, and the sub side notification are shown. The correspondence relationship of is explained.

(Contents of main navigation)
FIG. 58 (A) is a diagram showing the contents of the notification (navigation) performed on the main side. As shown in FIG. 58, basically, on the main side, when the push order combination is won, a value that uniquely indicates the correct push order for the push order combination is displayed on the notification lamp 147a (see FIG. 3). By doing so, the information of the stop operation is notified. Specifically, when the correct answer pressing order is "left, middle, right", "1" is displayed on the notification lamp 147a, and when the correct answer pressing order is "left, right, middle", the notification lamp 147a is displayed. "2" is displayed on the notification lamp 147a, and "3" is displayed on the notification lamp 147a when the correct answer pressing order is "middle, left, right", and the correct answer pressing order is "middle, right, left". "4" is displayed on the notification lamp 147a, and "5" is displayed on the notification lamp 147a when the correct answer pressing order is "right, left, middle". When it is "right, middle, left", "6" is displayed on the notification lamp 147a, and the correct pressing order is "left 1st (the first stop operation is for the left reel 3L)". In the case, "7" is displayed on the notification lamp 147a, and when the correct pressing order is "middle 1st (the first stop operation is for the reel 3C in the middle)", "8" is displayed on the notification lamp 147a. Is displayed, and when the correct pressing order is "right 1st (the first stop operation is for the right reel 3R)", "9" is displayed on the notification lamp 147a.

(Correspondence between main navigation and sub navigation)
FIG. 58B is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the content of the notification (navigation) performed on the main side and the content of the notification (navigation) performed on the sub side. On the sub (sub-control board 72) side, information on the stop operation is notified by displaying on the liquid crystal display device 11 directly indicating the pressing order of the correct answer. The notification performed on the sub side is composed of a push order pattern and a color pattern. The push order pattern is a display pattern that directly indicates the push order of the correct answer. For example, when the correct push order is "left, middle, right", the sub-control board 72 displays "1, 2, 3" on the liquid crystal display device 11 based on the push order pattern 1. , Notify the order of stop operations. Further, for example, when the correct push order is "medium 1st", the sub-control board 72 displays "-, 1,-" on the liquid crystal display device 11 based on the push order pattern 8. Notify the order of stop operations.

Further, the color pattern represents a color at the time of performing notification according to the push order pattern, and a color corresponding to the push order combination of the notification target is provided. For example, when notifying the replay, the sub-control board 72 displays the content corresponding to the push order pattern based on the color pattern 1 in blue, and when notifying the bell, the sub-control board 72 , The content corresponding to the push order pattern based on the color pattern 2 is displayed in yellow. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, only two types of push order, replay (blue) and bell (yellow), are provided, but the sub-control board 72 uses the color pattern 3 (white). The order of pressing the correct answer may be notified. This point will be described later in FIGS. 101 and 102.

As shown in FIG. 58 (B), the push order pattern on the sub side has a one-to-one correspondence with the navigation content on the main side. When navigating on the main side, the main control board 71 notifies the sub control board 72 of the navigation content (1 to 9 or none) on the main side and the type of winning combination (replay or bell). In the sub-control board 72, the corresponding push order pattern is determined from the navigation content on the main side, the color pattern is determined from the type of winning combination, and the content according to the determined push order pattern is colored according to the color pattern. By displaying with, the navigation on the sub side is performed.

[Control on the sub-control side]
The control on the main control board 71 has been described above. Subsequently, the control on the sub-control board 72 side will be described. Specifically, the effect controlled by the sub-control board 72 and the display contents of the liquid crystal display device 11 will be described.

(Outline of production)
The sub-control board 72 executes a large number of effects, and first, with reference to FIG. 59, an outline of a typical effect among these effects will be described. FIG. 59A is a diagram showing an outline of the back mode effect. The back mode effect is an effect that suggests a back mode managed on the main (main control board 71) side. As described above, on the main side, the back mode is accumulated at a predetermined opportunity. Among the back mode suggestion effects, the back mode absorption effect is an effect that suggests that the back mode has been accumulated (added), and the back mode suggestion effect is an effect that suggests the amount of accumulation of the current back mode. These back mode effects are performed using the spherical accessory 12 in addition to the liquid crystal display device 11.

The sub-control board 72 has accumulated the back mode by controlling the liquid crystal display device 11 and the sphere accessory 12 so that the energy (back mode) is absorbed by the sphere accessory 12 in the back mode absorption effect. Suggest that. Specifically, the sub-control board 72 generates energy from the left, right, or bottom of the liquid crystal display device 11 when performing the back mode absorption effect, so that this energy is absorbed by the spherical accessory 12. The display of the liquid crystal display device 11 is controlled. At this time, the sub-control board 72 changes the magnitude of energy and the appearance position of energy according to the amount of back modes accumulated (added) on the main side.

Further, the sub-control board 72 suggests the accumulated amount of the back mode by controlling the liquid crystal display device 11 and the sphere accessory 12 so that the absorbed energy overflows from the sphere accessory 12 in the back mode suggestion effect. To do. At this time, the sub-control board 72 changes the magnitude of the energy overflowing from the spherical accessory 12 according to the accumulated amount of the current back mode.

Subsequently, FIG. 59B is a diagram showing an outline of the effect for the additional zone. As described above, on the main side, event squares for 5 games are set in the additional zones 1 and 2. The effect for the additional zone is an effect performed by displaying an image corresponding to the set event mass on the liquid crystal display device 11.

On the main side, various types of event squares are set as event squares in the additional zone 1. Therefore, the sub-control board 72 displays images corresponding to various set event masses on the liquid crystal display device 11 during the addition zone 1. Further, in the additional zone 1, double stock or resurrection stock may be given, and in such a case, the sub-control board 72 displays on the liquid crystal that the double stock or resurrection stock is given. Displayed on the device 11.

On the other hand, during the additional zone 2, only the "back" is set as the event mass on the main side. Therefore, the sub-control board 72 displays an image (black diamond described later) corresponding to the event mass “back” in association with each game in the additional zone 2. Further, during the addition zone 2, the display screen is dimmed to give a different overall impression to the addition zone 1.
In addition, since the sub-control board 72 has a continuity with the additional zone 2 in terms of playability and production during the special BB, the sub-control board 72 darkens the display screen even during the special BB and an image corresponding to the event mass “back”. (Black diamond described later) is displayed in association with each game.

<Overview of menu screen>
Subsequently, the menu screen of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 60 (A) is a diagram showing an outline of a menu screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, and FIG. 60 (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the menu screen. When the decision button of the operation button 22 is operated in the situation where the game is not performed, the sub-control board 72 calls the menu screen shown in FIG. 60A and displays it on the liquid crystal display device 11.

As shown in FIG. 60 (B), this menu screen is provided with "custom game", "volume adjustment", "game data", "payout / arrangement", and "dedicated site" as main menus, and some main menus are provided. Has more detailed submenus. For example, the main menu "custom game" is provided with submenus "character selection", "easy start", "enter password", "view intermediate record", "record and end", and "member registration".

The submenu "Character selection" is a menu for customizing the character used for the effect performed on the liquid crystal display device 11. Customization of this character will be described later in FIGS. 61 to 64.

The submenus "Easy Start" to "Membership Registration" are menus used for registered games of players. In recent pachislot machines, by registering a player who plays a game, a privilege that does not affect the payout may be given as compared with a player who does not register. Specifically, when the player is registered, the sub-control board 72 executes the game in addition to the game history after the registration (for example, the game history such as the number of bonuses and the winning probability of a small winning combination). (Including the production history of the production) is managed, and certain benefits are given based on this history. The history of this game can include not only the one related to the current game but also the one related to the previous game. Specifically, the game history for each player is managed on the server, and when the game is played, the server notifies the game machine of the game history via a mobile phone or the like to notify the game machine of the previous game. You can take over the history and play the game.

The submenu "Easy Start" is a menu that is operated to only accumulate the history of the current game without inheriting the history of the previous game, that is, to perform a simple login. In addition, the submenu "Enter password" is a menu that is operated to carry over the history of the previous game and further accumulate the history of the current game, that is, to perform a formal login. Here, simple login is completed only by operating the submenu "Easy Start", while formal login is performed by entering the password in the pachislot machine 1 after registering as a member. It is said. Therefore, comparing simple login and formal login, it can be said that simple login is a simpler registration procedure than formal login, and conversely, formal login is more complicated registration than simple login. It can be said that it is a procedure.

The submenu "View midway record" is a menu that is operated when checking the midway record of the game history accumulated up to that point when logging in (simple or official). The submenu "Record and end" is a menu that is operated when the history of games accumulated up to that point is recorded on the server when logging in (simple or formal). When these submenus "view intermediate recording" and "record and end" are operated, the accumulated game history is read from the pachislot machine 1 onto the player's mobile phone or server.
Further, the submenu "member registration" is a menu operated for initial registration of a player on the server.

Further, the main menu "game data" is provided with submenus "game history 1" and "game history 2". The submenu "Game history 1" is a menu operated when checking the first page of the accumulated game history, and the submenu "Game history 2" is the second page of the accumulated game history. This is the menu that is operated when checking. Here, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the submenu "Game history 2" can be selected only at the time of official login, and only the submenu "Game history 1" can be selected at the time of simple login or non-login. (Note that both the submenus "Game History 1" and "Game History 2" can be selected at the time of official login).

Specifically, the sub-control board 72 controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 11 so that both the first page and the second page of the game history can be displayed when the login is accepted by the formal registration procedure. On the other hand, when login is accepted by a simple registration procedure, the display of the liquid crystal display device 11 is controlled so that the first page of the game history can be displayed and the second page of the game history cannot be displayed. ..
The contents displayed on the first and second pages of the game history will be described later with reference to FIG. 65.

Further, the main menu "Dividend / Arrangement" is further provided with the submenu shown in FIG. 60B, and when the submenu is selected, the contents corresponding to the submenu are displayed. On the other hand, the main menu "volume control" and "dedicated site" do not have submenus, and when selected, the contents corresponding to the main menu are displayed.

<Operation mode of pachislot machine 1 (touch operation, selection operation)>
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 61 to 64, a method of customizing the character in the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described, and an operation mode in the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described.

FIG. 61 (A) is a character customization screen for customizing a character. On the character customization screen, a "character" selection field, a "costume" selection field, a "pose" selection field, and an "accessory" selection field are provided, and a plurality of selectable icons are provided in each selection field. In the pachi-slot machine 1, the character is customized based on the icon content selected in each selection field at the timing when the decision icon is operated.

The "character" selection field is used to select a character, and the sub-control board 72 determines one character selected in the "character" selection field from a plurality of types of characters. In addition, the "costume" selection field is used to select the character's costume, the "pose" selection field is used to select the character's pose, and the "accessory" selection field is used to select the character's accessories. Used to do. The "costume" selection field to the "accessory" selection field are used to customize the display mode (costume, pose, accessory) of the character. The sub-control board 72 determines one display mode selected in the selection field from among a plurality of display modes corresponding to the corresponding selection fields.

When the character is customized on this character customization screen, the sub-control board 72 is placed in the "character" selection field wearing the costume selected in the "costume" selection field and the accessory selected in the "accessory" selection field. The character selected in the above is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 in the pose selected in the "pause" selection field.

Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, the entire surface of the liquid crystal display device 11 is a touch panel, and an operation button 22 having a cross key and a decision button is provided. The selection on the display screen can be performed by both a touch operation using the touch panel and a button operation using the operation button 22. In the example shown below, the operation method will be described using the character customization screen as an example, but the display screen that can be operated is not limited to the character customization screen, and for example, other display screens such as the menu screen shown in FIG. 60. Similar operations are possible.

(Touch operation mode and button operation mode)
As shown in FIG. 61 (B), the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a touch operation mode and a button operation mode. In the touch operation mode, the sub-control board 72 determines the icon selected by the touch operation via the touch panel (touch sensor 111), and in the button operation mode, the sub-control board 72 uses the cross key of the operation button 22. The selection cursor is moved based on the operation (movement operation) performed, and the icon pointed to by the selection cursor is determined by the operation (decision operation) via the enter button of the operation button 22.

The sub-control board 72 switches between the touch operation mode and the button operation mode by a simple method. Specifically, the sub-control board 72 switches to the corresponding operation mode when the operation corresponding to each mode is performed. More specifically, the sub-control board 72 switches the operation mode from the touch operation mode to the button operation mode when the operation button 22 is operated in the touch operation mode, and also via the touch panel in the button operation mode. When a touch operation is accepted, the operation mode is switched from the button operation mode to the touch operation mode.

(Overview of touch operation mode)
Subsequently, the outline of the touch operation mode will be described with reference to FIG. 62. As shown in FIG. 62 (A), in the touch operation mode, the selected content is determined according to the touch operation of the player. At this time, in the situation where the icon is touched (selected icon), the sub-control board 72 generates a touch-on effect on the icon so that the player can recognize the touched (selected) icon. Display on. Further, when the sub-control board 72 releases the finger from the touched icon, a determined effect is generated on the icon, and the selected icon is displayed so that the player can understand it.

By the way, in a pachislot machine that enables character customization, the customizable range may be opened step by step. In such a case, a plurality of icons are an open icon and an unopened icon. Will be included. As shown in FIG. 62 (B), in the touch operation mode, even if the unopened icon is touched, it does not respond. That is, the sub-control board 72 generates a touch-on effect on the opened icon when the opened icon is touch-operated, but does not generate the touch-on effect even when the unopened icon is touch-operated.

FIG. 62C is a diagram showing an aspect of the icon in the touch operation mode described above. As shown in FIG. 62 (C), in the touch operation mode, the opened icon can be selected (determined), and the touch-on effect is generated when the touch operation is performed. Also, when the touch operation for the opened icon ends (remove the finger from the icon), the determined effect is generated for this icon. On the other hand, it is impossible to select an unopened icon in the touch operation mode, and there is no reaction even if the touch operation is performed in the first place.

(Overview of button operation mode)
Subsequently, the outline of the button operation mode will be described with reference to FIG. 63. As shown in FIG. 63 (A), in the button operation mode, a selection cursor appears and moves between a plurality of icons. This selection cursor moves up, down, left, and right by operating the cross key of the operation button 22. Then, in the button operation mode, when the decision button of the operation button 22 is operated, the icon pointed to by the selection cursor is determined, and the determined effect is generated on the icon.

Further, it is the same as the touch operation mode in that the unopened icon cannot be selected (determined) even in the button operation mode, but as shown in FIG. 63 (B), the unopened icon is also selected in the button operation mode. You can hover over it.

In this way, the unopened icon does not respond in the touch operation mode, but the selection cursor can be moved in the button operation mode. The touch operation mode is an operation mode in which intuitive operation is possible, and if a touch operation (touch-on effect is generated) to an unopened icon occurs during such an operation mode, the player intuitively. It is misunderstood that it is possible to select the unopened icon. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the touch operation mode, the player does not react to the operation of the unopened icon, so that the unopened icon cannot be selected now. It is supposed to be intuitively reported to.

On the other hand, in the button operation mode using the selection cursor, if the unopened icon is not responded, the position of the selection cursor becomes unclear. I am trying to do it. This makes it possible to clarify the difference between the two operations.

Subsequently, FIG. 63 (C) is a diagram showing a method of moving the selection cursor. When the cross key is operated in the button operation mode, the sub-control board 72 moves the selection cursor in the direction shown in FIG. 63 (C).

FIG. 63 (D) is a diagram showing an aspect of the icon in the button operation mode described above. As shown in FIG. 63 (D), in the button operation mode, the selection cursor can be placed on both the opened icon and the unopened icon. When the selection cursor is set, the selection cursor is displayed together with the icon so that it can be seen that the icon is being selected. Further, when the decision button of the operation button 22 is operated, the determined effect is generated on the icon.

Comparing FIG. 62 and FIG. 63, whether or not the selection cursor is displayed differs between the touch operation mode and the button operation mode. Further, in the touch operation mode, the unopened icon does not respond, but in the button operation mode, the selection cursor can be moved even if the unopened icon is used. Also, in the touch operation mode, the selected icon can be identified by generating a touch-on effect, whereas in the button operation mode, the selected icon can be identified by moving the selection cursor. The point is also different. On the other hand, the point that the determined effect is generated for the selected (determined) icon is common to both the touch operation mode and the button operation mode.

(Customizable combination table)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 64, the customizable range in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. From the player's point of view, it is preferable that the character can be freely customized without limitation, but from the character's manager's point of view, it is preferable that the character can be customized only within a range that does not impair the image of the character. In order to enable customization within a range that does not damage the character's image, the selectable parts may be limited. For example, a costume that damages the character's image may be made unselectable from the beginning.

In this way, if you want to prohibit customization of only one part (for example, costume), you can make it unselectable from the beginning, but although the part is basically acceptable, when combined with other parts May become unacceptable. In such a case, it is not necessary to make the selection impossible from the beginning, and only a specific combination needs to be prohibited. For example, if the first costume and the first accessory can be combined, but the first costume and the second accessory cannot be combined, the first costume itself or the second accessory itself is prohibited. Instead of doing this, this combination should be prohibited.

FIG. 64 is a customizable combination table that defines customizable combinations. This customizable combination table defines for each part (costume, pose, accessory) the types of other parts that can be selected in combination with the part. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, for the accessory 3, only the costume 5 can be selected, and the costumes 1 to 4 cannot be selected.

For the sub-control board 72, only one of the plurality of options in the first part can be selected, and the second part in which all the other options cannot be selected has been selected (determined). ) In that case, regardless of the player's selection, the only selectable option for the second part is automatically selected (determined). Specifically, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 64, when the accessory 3 is selected as the accessory, the sub-control board 72 automatically selects the costume 5, which can be combined as the only costume, instead of selecting the player. Choose.

This allows the character to be customized without compromising the character's unique image. In addition, when only one combination is possible, the one that can be combined is automatically selected, so it is possible to customize the character without damaging the unique image without taking the trouble of the player. ..

Depending on the order in which the player customizes, the costume may be selected before the accessories. If the costume selected earlier is specified to be uncombinable with the accessory selected later, the sub-control board 72 selects the costume selected earlier based on the accessory selected later. You may clear it. Further, when only one costume can be combined with the accessory selected later, the sub-control board 72 automatically changes the costume selected earlier to the one costume. May be good. As an example, if the player selects the accessory 3 after the player has selected the costume 1, the sub-control board 72 can only combine the costume 1 selected earlier with the accessory 3 selected later. It may be changed automatically to the costume 5.

(Overview of history screen)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 65, an outline of the history screen for displaying the game history will be described. FIG. 65 (A) is the first page of the game history called from the submenu “Game history 1”, and FIG. 65 (B) is the second page of the game history called from the submenu “Game history 2”. is there. As shown in FIG. 65 (A), the total number of games, the current number of games, the number of bonuses, the number of CZs, the number of ARTs, the number of additional zones 1 and 2, and the number of additional zones 3 are displayed on the first page of the game history. Will be done. In this way, on the first page of the game history, in addition to the total number of games and the current number of games, the number of times a game state advantageous to the player such as a bonus or ART is performed is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 65 (A), the "Next page" icon is displayed on the first page of the game history. When this "go to next page" icon is selected, the second page of the game history is called. As described above, the first page of the game history can be displayed by all players, but the second page of the game history can be displayed only by the player who has officially logged in. Login players and simple login players cannot be displayed. Therefore, the sub-control board 72 makes it impossible to hide or select the "Next Page" icon when the login is not performed or only the simple login is performed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 65 (B), on the second page of the game history, the number of times the watermelon (“F_watermelon”) is determined as the internal winning combination (the number of winnings) and the chance eye A (“F__”) The number of wins for the chance role 1), the number of wins for the chance role B (“F_chance role 2”), the number of wins for the weak cherry (“F_weak cherry”), the number of wins for the strong cherry (“F_strong cherry”), And the number of winnings of the confirmed cherry (“F_confirmed cherry”) is displayed. That is, on the second page of the game history, the number of winnings of the so-called rare role is displayed.

By displaying the number of winnings of the rare role only for the player who has made a formal login in this way, the pachislot machine 1 can directly play the game for the player who has taken the trouble to register by following the formal procedure. It is possible to give a privilege that does not affect (display of the number of winnings of the rare role). As a result, it is possible to encourage the player who wants to display the number of winnings of the rare role to use the formal registration, and as a result, the player can be attached to the game machine and the operation of the game machine can be increased.

In addition, since the pachislot machine 1 does not display the second page of the game history that displays the number of winnings of the rare role for the player who logged in by the simple procedure, the simple login procedure is used. It is possible to prevent the act of snooping on the result of the other person's game after the other person has played the game by only logging in.

<Back mode production>
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 66 to 69, the back mode effect performed based on the back mode will be described. In the pachi-slot machine 1, the sub-control board 72 performs the back mode absorption effect and the back mode suggestion effect shown in FIG. 59 (A). Hereinafter, a method of executing these back mode absorption effects and back mode suggestion effects will be described.

(Back mode absorption production lottery table)
66 and 67 are back mode absorption effect lottery tables that are referred to when the back mode absorption effect is executed. The back mode absorption effect lottery table is provided for each game situation, and the back mode absorption effect lottery table shown in FIG. 66 (B) is when the CZ fails (that is, when the CZ fails without winning the ART lottery). ), The back mode absorption effect lottery table of FIG. 66 (C) is referred to at the end of ART, and the back mode absorption effect lottery table of FIG. 66 (D) is referred to during ART preparation. The back mode absorption effect lottery table of FIG. 66 (A) is referred to when the continuous effect fails, and the back mode absorption effect lottery table of FIG. 66 (A) is referred to in other cases.
In the pachislot machine 1, the production is performed over a plurality of games, and if the production is successful, the possibility of winning a bonus or ART increases, and if the production fails, the possibility of winning a bonus or ART increases. May be a continuous production. The back mode absorption effect lottery table of FIG. 67 (E) is referred to when this continuous effect fails.

The back mode absorption effect lottery table defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the effect pattern of the back mode absorption effect for each difference of the back mode. The difference between the back modes will be described later in FIG. 69. When any of the effect patterns is determined as a result of the lottery using the back mode absorption effect lottery table, the sub-control board 72 executes the corresponding back mode absorption effect.

(Back mode suggestion production lottery table)
Subsequently, FIG. 68 is a back mode suggestion effect lottery table that is referred to when executing the back mode suggestion effect. This back mode suggestion effect lottery table is referred to when the back mode absorption effect is not won (not executed). That is, the back mode suggestion effect may be executed in a game in which the back mode absorption effect is not executed. The back mode suggestion effect lottery table defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the effect pattern of the back mode suggestion effect for each current back mode (value of the main back mode counter described later). The sub-control board 72 executes the corresponding back mode suggestion effect when any of the effect patterns is determined as a result of the lottery using the back mode suggestion effect lottery table.

<How to manage the back mode on the sub side and the opportunity to produce the back mode>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 69, the back mode management method on the sub (sub control board 72) side, the trigger of the back mode effect (back mode absorption effect, back mode suggestion effect), and the main (main control board 71). The relationship with the addition opportunity of the back mode on the side will be described.

FIG. 69A is a diagram showing a management method of the back mode on the sub side. The sub side (sub RAM 103) has a main back mode counter and a sub back mode counter as counters for counting back modes. The main back mode counter is a counter that completely matches the value of the back mode on the main side, and stores the value of the back mode received from the main side as it is.

On the other hand, the sub-back mode counter is basically a counter to which the value of the main back mode counter at the time of executing the back mode absorption effect is transferred. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the back mode absorption effect may be performed at a predetermined timing (see FIGS. 66B to 66E). This back mode absorption effect is basically performed based on the value of the back mode (difference between the above-mentioned back modes) increased from the previous back mode absorption effect. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the sub RAM 103 is provided with a main back mode counter and a sub back mode counter in order to specify the value of the back mode increased during such a back mode absorption effect, and the main back mode is provided. By subtracting the sub-back mode counter (the value of the back mode at the time of the previous production) from the counter (the value of the current back mode), the value of the back mode (difference between the back modes) increased between the back mode absorption effects is calculated. To do. The back mode difference referred to in FIGS. 66 and 67 means "the value of the main back mode counter-the value of the sub back mode counter".

As shown in FIG. 69 (A), the value of the main back mode counter of the next game is transferred to the sub back mode counter (1) when the value of the main back mode counter is 0. This update trigger is for setting some value as an initial value in the sub-back mode counter at the time of initialization. Further, the value of the main back mode counter of the current game is transferred to the sub back mode counter at the time of (2) winning the back mode absorption effect. That is, since the back mode absorption effect suggests the back mode value (difference) increased from the previous back mode absorption effect, the value of the sub back mode counter is updated. Further, when the value of the main back mode counter is reduced as compared with the previous game, the value of the main back mode counter of the current game is transferred to the sub back mode counter. As described above, when the privilege based on the back mode is given on the main side, the back mode is subtracted by 50. Since the back mode effect (back mode absorption effect, back mode suggestion effect) is an effect performed to guess the timing when the privilege based on the back mode is given, after the privilege based on the back mode is given, Update the value of the sub-back mode counter.

Next, FIG. 69B is a diagram showing the relationship between the trigger of the back mode effect (back mode absorption effect, back mode suggestion effect) and the back mode addition trigger on the main (main control board 71) side. .. On the main side, back mode accumulation is performed: (1) back mode reset, (2) CZ failure, (3) ART end, (4) ART preparation, (5) between flags, and (6) non-ART. There is a possibility that it will be performed at six triggers at the time of transition from the RT2 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state (see FIG. 52).

On the other hand, on the sub side, there is a possibility that the back mode absorption effect will be performed at four triggers: (1) CZ failure, (2) ART end, (3) ART preparation, and (4) continuous effect failure. Yes (see FIGS. 66 and 67). Comparing the opportunity to absorb the back mode on the sub side and the opportunity to accumulate the back mode on the main side, there are some common parts but some not. By making the opportunity to absorb the back mode different from the opportunity to accumulate the back mode in this way, the capacity on the main side (that is, the opportunity to accumulate the back mode) is suppressed, and the effect is produced with various opportunities. Can be executed, and the production can be varied.

More specifically, the back mode is accumulated when the result of the game becomes a disadvantageous result for the player, but for the player, the disadvantageous result is often directed. I feel it from the side. For example, if the so-called rare role is determined as the internal winning role, but the bonus, ART, or CZ is not won, the player will be affected by the effect (continuous production failure) triggered by the rare role. You will feel that the result is unfavorable. Then, in order to accumulate the back mode on the main side at the timing when the player feels a disadvantageous result, it is necessary to provide a huge number of opportunities for accumulating the back mode on the main side, and the capacity of the main side increases. Will end up.

In this respect, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, unlike the opportunity to accumulate the back mode on the main side, and the opportunity to feel that the player has a disadvantageous result, when the continuous production fails, the back Perform mode absorption effect. For the player, the back mode absorption effect is expressed so that the back mode is accumulated, so that the back mode is accumulated at the timing when he / she feels that the result is disadvantageous. Then, as the back mode accumulates, the grant of benefits by the back mode approaches, so in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the grant of benefits by the back mode approaches at the timing when the player feels a disadvantageous result. Can be reported. In other words, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, while limiting the triggers on the main side and suppressing the capacity on the main side, it is possible to perform the back mode absorption effect with various triggers than the triggers on the main side.

<Flow of games in additional zones 1 and 2 (sub side)>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 70, the flow of the game in the additional zones 1 and 2 controlled by the sub (sub-control board 72) side will be described. As described above, in the additional zones 1 and 2, the main side sets the event masses associated with the rewards for 5 games. In the following, how to show (display) the set event mass will be described.

On the main side, multiple event squares "red" to "battle" are managed. On the other hand, on the sub side, the display squares are "enemy", "treasure chest", "diamond", "pet", "weak?", "Strong?", "Character 1", "character 2", "character 3", and "character 4". It has "Character 5", "Black Diamond", "Battle 1", "Battle 2", and "Battle 3". As shown as an example in FIG. 70A, these display squares are associated with the event squares based on the rewards associated with the event squares.

Specifically, the display square "enemy" is a display square in which the additional zone 1 may end, and the event square "red" to which the reward of "life-1" is associated is set. Displayed for games.

In addition, the display squares "treasure box", "diamond", "pet", and "character 5" are display squares in which the number of games may be added, and the event squares associated with the reward of "addition of the number of games" are associated. It is displayed for the game in which "Blue 1" to "Blue 5" are set.

Further, the display cells "weak?" And "strong?" Are display cells whose display is switched to another display cell. The display of the display cell "weak?" Is switched to the display cell "treasure box" or higher, and the display of the display cell "strong?" Is switched to the display cell "character 1" to "character 5".

In addition, the display squares "Character 1" to "Character 4" are display squares in which "Life +1", "Red square conversion stock +1", "Double stock +1", and "Resurrection stock +1" may be performed, respectively. The event squares "Character 1" to "Character 4" to which each reward is associated are displayed for the set game.

In addition, the display cell "black diamond" is a display cell in which "shift to additional zone 2" or "addition of the number of games" may be performed, and the event cell "back" to which the same reward is associated is Displayed for the set game.

In addition, the display squares "Battle 1", "Battle 2", and "Battle 3" are display squares that may be "converted to back squares", and the event squares "Battle" to which the same reward is associated are set. It is displayed for the played game. The number of back-mass conversions is set in the event mass "battle" (see FIG. 46 (C)). The display square "Battle 1" is displayed corresponding to the event square "Battle" in which "1", "2", and "4" are set as the number of back squares converted, and the display square "Battle 2" is the number of back squares converted. It is displayed corresponding to the event mass "Battle" in which "2" and "4" are set, and the display mass "Battle 3" corresponds to the event mass "Battle" in which "4" is set as the number of back mass conversions. Is displayed.

Image data corresponding to the display mass described above is stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86. In addition, the ROM cartridge substrate 86 also stores image data corresponding to the display mass “unknown” described later.

(Display example 1)
As shown in FIG. 70 (B), when the event mass is set on the main side, the sub-control board 72 is arbitrary from the display cells (see FIG. 70 (A)) that can be displayed for the set event mass. Is drawn and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11.

(Display example 2)
The player will perform the additional zones 1 and 2 using the display squares displayed under the control of the sub side, but some players may not want to display the event squares (display squares). is there. For example, in a situation where an event mass that is not very preferable for the player is set, it is possible that some players do not want to display the event mass. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the event mass is hidden when a predetermined operation is performed. The predetermined operation may be an arbitrary operation. For example, the operation button 22 is operated by the upper part of the cross-shaped key and the enter button at the same time.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70 (C), the sub-control board 72 displays a common display mass “unknown” regardless of the set event mass even when the event mass is set on the main side. , Displayed in association with each game. As a result, the contents of the set event mass (reward) cannot be understood, so that the player plays the game with expectations for each game.

The sub-control board 72 may hide all the cells for 5 games (display cells "unknown"), hide some cells, and display some cells. It may be that. In the example shown in FIG. 70 (C), the corresponding display square "treasure box" is displayed for the event square set for this game, and the event set for the next and subsequent four games is displayed. The square is hidden.

<Example of special BB production>
Subsequently, an example of the production of the special BB will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 and 72. As described above, the special BB has a certain continuity with the additional zone 2 in terms of playability and effect. The continuity regarding playability is realized by drawing the number of additional games on the main side, while the continuity from the production side is realized by the control on the sub side. Hereinafter, the continuity of the special BB and the additional zone 2 with respect to the effect surface will be described by comparing the normal BB and the special BB.

(Normal BB display example)
FIG. 71 is a display example when the bonus state (normal BB) starts in the additional zone 1. As shown in FIG. 71 (A), the display squares are displayed over the games for 5 games in the additional zone 1. In the additional zone 1, in addition to the additional zone 1, the number of additional games acquired in the additional zone 1 is displayed.

When the winning combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination in the additional zone 1, the display example shown in FIG. 71 (B) is displayed. Specifically, in addition to the display of the display squares for 5 games peculiar to the additional zone 1, the display "bonus confirmation" indicating that the winning combination related to the bonus has been determined as the internal winning combination is displayed.

When the winning combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination in this way, the so-called bonus confirmation screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. This point is the same when the winning combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination in the additional zone 1, and the sub-control board 72 displays the bonus confirmation screen shown in FIG. 71 (C) in accordance with the winning of the bonus. It is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11.

After that, when the bonus state starts, the sub-control board 72 displays the display screen (bonus effect screen) in the bonus shown in FIG. 71 (D) on the liquid crystal display device 11. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the end condition of the bonus state is "payment of medals exceeding 232", the sub-control board 72 has the number of medals acquired during the bonus state and the end of the bonus state. The number of medals remaining up to the condition (that is, the number obtained by subtracting the number of medals paid out during the bonus state from 232 medals, which is the end condition of the bonus state) is displayed.

(Display example of special BB)
Subsequently, FIG. 72 is a display example when the bonus state (special BB) starts in the additional zone 2. As shown in FIG. 72 (A), in the additional zone 2, the display squares are displayed over the games for five games as in the additional zone 1. At this time, during the addition zone 2, the display screen goes dark and only the event mass “back” is set, so that only the display mass “black diamond” is displayed.

When the winning combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination in the additional zone 2, the display example shown in FIG. 72 (B) is displayed. Specifically, in addition to the display of the display squares for 5 games peculiar to the additional zone 2, the display "bonus confirmation" indicating that the winning combination related to the bonus has been determined as the internal winning combination is displayed.

In the case of the above-mentioned normal BB, the bonus confirmation screen (FIG. 71 (C)) is displayed, but in order to realize the continuity between the additional zone 2 and the special BB from the effect side, the sub-control board 72 If the combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination during the addition zone 2, the display space for 5 games peculiar to the addition zone 2 is displayed without switching to the bonus confirmation screen (addition effect screen). To maintain. On the other hand, in order to be able to start the bonus state appropriately, the sub-control board 72 is displayed on the additional effect screen to aim at a combination of symbols according to the winning bonus such as "Aim for 7". To encourage the winning of the role related to the bonus.

After that, when the bonus state starts, the sub-control board 72 displays the display screen shown in FIG. 72 (D) on the liquid crystal display device 11. Specifically, the sub-control board 72 displays the display squares for five unique games, similar to the additional effect screen in the additional zone 2. Further, the sub-control board 72 normally displays the remaining number up to the end condition of the bonus state during BB, but during the special BB, the end condition of the bonus state is satisfied instead of this remaining number. The remaining number of games required (30 times in this embodiment) is displayed.

From the player's point of view, since the playability and the continuity from the production side are ensured, it is possible to give the player the playability as if the additional zone 2 is continuous. Further, by replacing the end timing of the bonus state with an intuitively easy-to-understand display of the number of remaining games, it is possible to give the player a feeling as if the additional zone 2 is guaranteed for 30 games.

(Lock at the start (end) of the bonus)
By the way, in recent pachislot machines, the progress of the game may be temporarily stopped at the start and end of the bonus state. Such lock control at the start (end) of the bonus is preferable because it can emphasize the start and end of the bonus state, but when the additional zone 2 and the special BB are to have continuity, the lock control is preferable. It leads to a loss of continuity. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the bonus state is the normal BB or the episode BB, the main control board 71 temporarily stops the progress of the game at the start and end of the bonus state. , In the case of special BB (that is, in the additional zone 2), the progress of the game is not stopped at the start and end of the bonus state. As described above, since the main control board 71 manages whether or not the bonus state is the special BB, such control makes the lock control different depending on whether or not the bonus state is the special BB. Can be realized with.

(Normal display example at the start of BB)
Subsequently, a display example at the start of normal BB will be described with reference to FIG. 73. The main control board 71 normally performs an ART lottery based on whether or not the combinations “F_7 matching combination 1” and “F_7 matching combination 2” are won during the BB (see FIG. 56). In recent years, the results of ART lottery based on the 7 sets in such a bonus state will be announced in various forms. Typical examples are "chance announcement", "complete announcement", and "post-announcement". The pachislot machine announces the result of the ART lottery in the bonus state according to the mode selected by the player from these various modes.

Although pachislot machines that make it possible to select the mode of notification in this way also exist in existing pachislot machines, in existing pachislot machines, the production (video + music) in the bonus state is also determined according to the mode of notification. It ends up. For the player, he wants to be notified of the result of the ART lottery in his favorite mode while playing his favorite production during the bonus state, but in the existing pachislot machines, the notification mode and the production are linked, and both Cannot be selected individually.

In this respect, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the mode of notification and the effect can be individually selected. FIG. 73 is a display example of the bonus start screen at the start of the normal BB. As shown in FIG. 73, the player can select the ART lottery notification mode from “chance notification”, “complete notification”, and “post-notification” on the bonus start screen, and the sub-control board 72 is selected. The result of the ART lottery will be announced in this manner. In addition, the player can also select the effect flowing during the bonus state on the bonus start screen from "effect A", "effect B", and "effect C", and the sub-control board 72 reads out the selected effect. And perform the effect during the bonus state.

As a result, the mode of notification and the effect (video + music) can be individually selected, so that the game in the bonus state can be performed with a combination that was not possible with the existing pachislot machine. In the example shown in FIG. 73, the effect in which the video and the music are set can be selected, but the video and the music may be individually selectable.

[Explanation of operation of main control circuit]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 74 to 99, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 93 of the main control circuit 91 by using the program will be described.

<Main pachislot operation processing controlled by the main CPU>
First, the procedure of the main operation processing (processing after the power is turned on) of the pachi-slot machine 1 performed under the control of the main CPU 93 will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 74 (hereinafter referred to as the main flow).

First, when the power is turned on to the pachi-slot machine 1, the main CPU 93 performs an initialization process at the time of turning on the power (S1). In this process, it is determined whether the backup has been performed normally, whether the settings have been changed appropriately, and the like, and initialization is performed according to the determination result.

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs an initialization process at the end of one game (S2). In this initialization process, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 95 is cleared. The designated storage area referred to here is a storage area such as an internal winning combination storage area and a display combination storage area, which requires data to be erased for each unit game (game).

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs medal reception / start check processing (S3). In this process, the input of the medal sensor and the start switch 79 is checked.

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs an internal lottery process (S4). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to an internal lottery table (FIG. 13) according to the current gaming state, and draws a winning combination determined as an internal winning combination from a plurality of winning combinations.

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the combination related to the bonus (“F_BB1” to “F_BB3”) is determined as the internal winning combination (S5). When the winning combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination (YES), the main CPU 93 updates the RT3 gaming state flag to ON, and shifts the RT gaming state to the RT3 gaming state (between the flags) (S6). ..

When the RT3 game state flag is updated to ON, or when the combination related to the bonus is not determined as the internal winning combination in S5 (NO), the main CPU 93 performs the lottery flag conversion process (S7). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines the lottery flag from the internal winning combination determined in S4 with reference to the lottery flag determination table (FIG. 19).

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs the control process for each start state, which will be described later in FIG. 75 (S8). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs a start command generation process (S9). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates start command data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. The command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by the command data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 99.

The start command data includes various information such as an internal winning combination, information on the main navigation, back mode values, and game status. Here, when some of the combinations (pushing order combinations) are determined as internal winning combinations, the main CPU 93 groups them and includes them in the start command. Specifically, push order replays ("F_RT1 medium lip_123" to "F_RT2 medium lip_3rd") are grouped as replays and push order bells ("F_push order bell 1-11st" to "F_push order bell 2_3rd"). Group as bells. On the sub control circuit 101 side, the navigation (pushing order pattern, color pattern) on the sub side can be appropriately determined from the information on the navigation on the main side and the information called the grouped replay (or bell).

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs the reel stop initial setting process described later in FIG. 90 (S10). In this process, the reel stop control information used for the stop control is determined according to the internal winning combination determined in S4. The determined reel stop control information is stored in the main RAM 95 and used in the reel stop control process of S12.

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs a reel rotation start process after performing the wait process (S11). In this process, the main CPU 93 requests the start of rotation of all reels. Then, when the start of rotation of all reels is requested, each reel is accelerated and controlled until its rotation speed reaches a constant speed by an interrupt process executed at a constant cycle (1.1172 msec), and then the reels are accelerated and controlled. It is controlled so that the constant speed is maintained.

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs a reel stop control process described later in FIG. 91 (S12). In this process, using the reel stop control information determined in S10, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped based on the timing at which the left stop button 19L, the middle stop button 19C, and the right stop button 19R are pressed, respectively. Reel.

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs a winning determination medal payout process (S13). In this winning determination medal payout process, as a result of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R being stopped, based on the combination of symbols displayed along the valid line, according to the combination of the symbols such as medal payout and replay operation. Give profits. Further, in this process, the main CPU 93 generates data of the winning operation command and stores the command data in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. The winning operation command data includes various information such as a combination of symbols displayed along the valid line.

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus end check process, which will be described later in FIG. 92 (S14). In this process, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus state according to the number of medals paid out during the bonus state, and shifts the gaming state to the general gaming state. Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus operation check process, which will be described later in FIG. 93 (S15). In this process, the main CPU 93 activates the bonus according to the combination of symbols displayed along the effective line.

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs the RT operation check process described later in FIG. 94 (S16). In this process, the main CPU 93 shifts the RT gaming state according to the combination of symbols displayed along the effective line. Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs the end-time state-based control process described later in FIG. 95 (S17). When the control process for each state at the end is performed, the main CPU 93 returns the process to S2 assuming that one game (unit game) is completed.

<Control processing by state at start>
Next, with reference to FIG. 75, the control process for each state at the start will be described. In the start state-based control process, first, the main CPU 93 performs the table mode transition process described later in FIG. 76 (S31). Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the transition of the table mode is performed at the start of the game (S8 in FIG. 74), but the transition of the table mode is performed at the end of the game (S17 in FIG. 74). ) May be used.

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the gaming state is in the normal gaming state (S32). When the gaming state is in the normal gaming state (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently performs the start-time normal processing described later in FIG. 77 (S33).

On the other hand, when the gaming state is not in the normal gaming state (NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the gaming state is in the CZ precursor (S34). When the gaming state is in the CZ omen (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently performs the start-time CZ omen processing (S35), which will be described later in FIG. 78.

On the other hand, when the gaming state is not in the CZ precursor (NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the gaming state is in the CZ (S36). If the gaming state is in CZ (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently performs the start-time CZ in-process, which will be described later in FIG. 79 (S37).

On the other hand, when the gaming state is not in CZ (NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the gaming state is in the ART precursor (S38). If the gaming state is in the ART precursor (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently performs the start-time ART precursor process described later in FIG. 82 (S39).

On the other hand, when the gaming state is not in the ART precursor (NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the gaming state is in ART (S40). Here, the term "during ART" in S40 includes not only that the gaming state is in the ART gaming state (normal ART, additional zone), but also that ART is being prepared and waiting for the end of ART. If the gaming state is in ART (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently performs a process during ART at the start, which will be described later in FIG. 83 (S41).

On the other hand, when the gaming state is not in ART (NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the gaming state is in the bonus state (S42). If the gaming state is in the bonus state (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently performs the start bonus processing, which will be described later in FIG. 89 (S43).

Following the process during the start bonus, or when the game state is not in the bonus state in S42 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently performs other processes (S44), and ends the control process for each start state. To do. In this process, the main CPU 93 determines the navigation content on the main side, and sets "small lottery" as the back mode lottery state when the role "F_chance combination 1" or the like is determined between the flags. I do.

<Table mode transition process>
Subsequently, the table mode transition process will be described with reference to FIG. 76. In the table mode transition process, first, the main CPU 93 determines the table mode transition lottery number from the lottery flag and the current table mode with reference to the table mode transition lottery number determination table (FIG. 21) (S51). .. Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines and sets the table mode of the migration destination based on the table mode transition lottery number determined in S51 with reference to the table mode transition lottery table 1 (FIG. 22 (A)) (S52). ), End the table mode transition process.

<Normal processing at start>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 77, the normal processing at the start will be described. In the normal middle process at the start, first, the main CPU 93 determines the CZ lottery number from the lottery flag B with reference to the CZ lottery number determination table (FIG. 24) (S71). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 refers to the CZ lottery table (FIG. 25) during normal operation, and performs CZ lottery based on the CZ lottery number determined in S71 (S72).

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the CZ lottery has been won (S73). If the CZ lottery has been won (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently adds 1 to the stock of the winning type of CZ (S74).

Following the processing of S74, or if the CZ lottery has not been won in S73 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently refers to the ART lottery number determination table (FIG. 26) from the lottery flag A. The ART lottery number is determined (S75). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 refers to the ART lottery table (FIG. 27) and performs the ART lottery based on the ART lottery number determined in S75 (S76).

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the ART lottery has been won (S77). If the ART lottery has been won (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently adds 1 to the stock of the winning type of ART or the additional zone (S78).

Following the processing of S78, or if the ART lottery was not won in S77 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not there is a stock of normal ART (S79). If there is a stock of normal ART (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently draws and sets the number of precursor games with reference to the precursor game number lottery table (FIG. 28) (S80). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 sets the ART precursor in the next game (S81), and ends the normal processing at the start.

On the other hand, if there is usually no stock of ART in S79 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not there is stock of CZ (S82). If there is no stock of CZ (NO), the normal processing is completed at the start, while if there is stock of CZ (YES), the precursor game number lottery table (FIG. 28) is referred to. The number of games is drawn and set (S83). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 sets the CZ omen in the next game (S84), and ends the normal processing at the start.

<CZ precursor processing at start>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 78, the CZ precursory processing at the start will be described. In the CZ precursor processing at the start, the main CPU 93 first determines whether or not the special CZ has been won (S91). If the special CZ has not been won (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently refers to the CZ promotion lottery table (FIG. 29) in the CZ omen and draws the CZ promotion lottery based on the lottery flag B. Do (S92). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the promotion lottery has been won (S93), and if the promotion lottery has been won (YES), rewrites the stocked CZ type to a special CZ (S94). ).

Following the processing of S94, if the special CZ is won in S91 (YES), or if the promotion lottery is not won in S93 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines the ART lottery number. With reference to the table (FIG. 26), the ART lottery number is determined from the lottery flag A (S95). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 refers to the ART lottery table (FIG. 27) and performs the ART lottery based on the ART lottery number determined in S95 (S96).

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the ART lottery has been won (S97). If the ART lottery has been won (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently adds 1 to the stock of the winning type of ART or the additional zone (S98), and ends the CZ precursor processing at the start.

On the other hand, if the ART lottery is not won in S97 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently updates the number of precursor games (S99). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of precursor games has become 0 (S100). If the number of precursor games is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the CZ precursor processing at the start, while if the number of precursor games is 0 (YES), the main CPU 93 wins the next game. The CZ corresponding to the existing CZ type is set, the stock of the CZ is subtracted by 1 (S101), and the CZ precursor processing at the start is completed.

<Processing during CZ at start>
Subsequently, the process during CZ at the start will be described with reference to FIG. 78. In the start CZ process, first, the main CPU 93 determines the ART lottery number from the lottery flag A with reference to the ART lottery number determination table (FIG. 26) (S111). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 refers to the ART lottery table (FIG. 27) and performs the ART lottery based on the ART lottery number determined in S111 (S112).

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the ART lottery has been won (S113). If the ART lottery has been won (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently adds 1 to the stock of the winning type of ART or the additional zone (S114).

Following the processing of S114, or if the ART lottery has not been won in S113 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not it is in CZ1 to CZ4 (S115). When CZ1 to CZ4 are in progress (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently performs a normal CZ process described later in FIG. 80 (S116), and ends the CZ process at the start. On the other hand, if it is not in CZ1 to CZ4 (NO), since it is in special CZ, the main CPU 93 subsequently performs special CZ processing described later in FIG. 81 (S117), and ends the processing during CZ at the start. To do.

<Normal CZ processing>
Subsequently, the normal CZ process will be described with reference to FIG. 80. In the normal CZ process, first, the main CPU 93 refers to the ART lottery number determination table (FIG. 32) in the CZ, and starts from the lottery flag B based on the state in the CZ (first half, whether ART is correct or not). The ART lottery number in CZ is determined (S131). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 refers to the ART lottery table in CZ (FIG. 33) and performs ART lottery based on the ART lottery number in CZ determined in S131 (S132).

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the ART lottery has been won (S133). If the ART lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 93 adds 1 to the stock of the winning type of ART or the additional zone (S134). Following the processing of S134, or when the ART lottery is not won in S133, the main CPU 93 updates the number of games in the CZ (S135).

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is the final game of the first half (that is, the twelfth game) (S136). In the case of the final game of the first half (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently draws and sets the number of battle games (S137) with reference to the battle game number lottery table (FIG. 34), and performs normal CZ processing. finish.

On the other hand, if it is not the final game of the first half (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not it is the final game of the second half (S138). If it is not the final game of the second half (NO), the main CPU 93 normally ends the CZ processing, while if it is the final game of the second half (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently has the stock of ART. It is determined whether or not it is 1 or more (that is, whether ART is stocked during CZ) (S139).

When the stock of ART is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently sets the next game to be preparing for ART (S140), and normally ends the CZ process. On the other hand, when the stock of ART is 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently sets the normal game state in the next game (S141). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 sets the back mode lottery state (CZ1 to CZ3 is "lottery small", CZ4 is "lottery in progress") corresponding to CZ, assuming that CZ has failed (S142), and normally ends the CZ process. To do.

<Special CZ processing>
Subsequently, the special CZ process will be described with reference to FIG. 80. In the special CZ process, first, the main CPU 93 refers to the special CZ middle addition zone lottery table (FIG. 35) and performs ART lottery based on the lottery flag B (S151). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the ART lottery has been won (S152). If the ART lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently adds 1 to the stock of the winning type of ART and the additional zone (S153), and sets the next game to be preparing for ART (S157). ), End the special CZ process.

On the other hand, if the ART lottery is not won in S152 (NO), the main CPU 93 updates the number of games in the CZ (S154). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is the final game (that is, the 10th game) of the special CZ (S155). If it is not the final game of the special CZ, the main CPU 93 ends the special CZ process.

On the other hand, in the case of the final game of the special CZ (YES), the main CPU 93 normally adds 1 to the stock of ART (S156). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 sets ART preparation in progress for the next game (S157), and ends the special CZ process.

<Processing during ART precursors at the start>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 82, the ART precursor processing at the start will be described. In the start-time ART precursory processing, first, the main CPU 93 determines the ART lottery number from the lottery flag A with reference to the ART lottery number determination table (FIG. 26) (S171). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 refers to the ART lottery table (FIG. 27) and performs the ART lottery based on the ART lottery number determined in S171 (S172).

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the ART lottery has been won (S173). If the ART lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently adds 1 to the stock of the normal ART or the additional zone of the winning type (S174).

Following the processing of S174, or if the ART lottery has not been won in S173 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently refers to the ART precursor middle addition zone lottery table (FIG. 30) and the lottery flag. An additional zone lottery is performed based on A (S175). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the additional zone lottery has been won (S176). If the additional zone lottery is not won (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the ART precursor processing at the start, while if the additional zone lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 93 is Subsequently, the stock of the additional zone of the winning type is added by 1 (S177), and the ART precursor processing at the start is completed.

<Processing during ART at start>
Subsequently, the process during ART at the start will be described with reference to FIG. 83. In the process during ART at the start, the main CPU 93 first determines the ART lottery number from the lottery flag A with reference to the ART lottery number determination table (FIG. 26) (S191). ). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 refers to the ART lottery table (FIG. 27) and performs the ART lottery based on the ART lottery number determined in S191 (S192).

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the ART lottery has been won (S193). If the ART lottery has been won (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently adds 1 to the stock of the winning type of ART or the additional zone (S194). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is waiting for the end of ART (S195). When waiting for the end of ART (that is, winning the ART lottery while waiting for the end of ART) (YES), the main CPU 93 sets the ART or additional zone of the type won in the next game, and sets the corresponding stock to 1. Subtract (S196) and end the process during ART at the start.

If the ART lottery is not won in S193 (NO), or if the ART is not waiting for the end in S195 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not the ART is normally in progress (S197). ). When the main CPU 93 is in the normal ART, the main CPU 93 subsequently performs the normal ART process described later in FIG. 84 (S198), and ends the process during the ART at the start.

On the other hand, if it is not normally in ART (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not it is in the additional zones 1 and 2 (S199). When the additional zones 1 and 2 are in progress, the main CPU 93 subsequently performs the additional zones 1 and 2 processing described later in FIG. 85 (S200), and ends the processing during ART at the start.

On the other hand, if it is not in the additional zones 1 and 2 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not it is in the additional zone 3 (S201). If it is not in the additional zone 3 (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the processing during ART at the start, while if it is in the additional zone 3, the main CPU 93 is subsequently described later in FIG. 88. The additional zone 3 processing is performed (S202), and the processing during ART at the start is completed.

<Normal ART processing>
Subsequently, the normal ART process will be described with reference to FIG. 84. In the normal ART process, first, the main CPU 93 determines the additional lottery number from the lottery flag C with reference to the additional lottery number determination table (FIG. 37) (S211). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 refers to the additional zone lottery table (FIG. 38) during normal ART, and performs additional lottery based on the additional lottery number determined in S211 (S212).

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the addition zone has been won in this addition lottery (S213), and if the addition zone has been won (YES), the stock of the addition zone of the winning type is set to 1. Add (S214). Following this process, or if the additional zone has not been won in S214 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not the additional number of games has been won (S215).

If the number of additional games is won (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently refers to the number determination table for the number of additional games during ART (FIG. 39) and draws the number of additional games from the lottery flag C. The number to be used is determined (S216). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 refers to the additional game number lottery table (FIG. 40) and draws the number of additional games based on the number of additional games lottery determined in S216 (S217). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 adds the number of additional games drawn to the duration of normal ART (the number of ART games) (S218).

Following the processing of S218, or if the addition of the number of games is not won in S215 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently sets the release mode with reference to the release mode transition lottery table (FIG. 41). Along with the lottery, the release lottery is performed based on this release mode with reference to the release lottery table (FIG. 42) (S219).

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the addition zone has been won in this release lottery (S220). If the additional zone is won (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently adds 1 to the stock of the added zone of the winning type (S221).

Following this process, or if the additional zone has not been won in S220 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently updates the number of ART games (S222). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not there is stock in the additional zone (S223). If there is stock in the additional zone (YES), the main CPU 93 sets the additional zone corresponding to the next game, subtracts 1 from the stock in the additional zone (S224), and ends the normal ART process.

On the other hand, when there is no stock in the additional zone, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of ART games is 0 (S225). If the number of ART games is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 normally ends ART processing, while if the number of ART games is 0 (YES), the main CPU 93 ends ART in the next game. Waiting is set (S226), and normal ART processing is terminated.

<Additional zones 1 and 2 processing>
Subsequently, the addition zones 1 and 2 processing will be described with reference to FIG. 85. In the addition zones 1 and 2 processing, first, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is in the addition zone 2 (S231). If the player is in the additional zone 2 (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not there is a guaranteed number of games (S232).

If there is no guaranteed number of games (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently refers to the additional zone 2 end lottery table (FIG. 48 (B)) and based on the lottery flag D, the additional zone 2 end lottery. (S233). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the end is determined in this end lottery (S234). When the end is determined (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently sets the additional zone 1 in the next game (S235), and ends the additional zones 1 and 2 processing.

If the game is not in the additional zone 2 in S231 (NO), if there is a guaranteed number of games in the processing of S232 (YES), or if the end is not determined (continue) in S234 (NO), the main CPU 93 is determined. Subsequently, the number of additional games lottery is determined from the lottery flag C and the event mass set for the current game with reference to the number determination table for the number of additional games in the additional zone (FIG. 47). (S236). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 refers to the additional game number lottery table (FIG. 40) and draws the number of additional games based on the number of additional games lottery determined in S236 (S237).

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not there is double stock (S238). If there is double stock (YES), the number of games obtained by doubling the number of additional games drawn in S237 is added to the normal ART duration (number of ART games) (S239, S240). Further, in this process, the main CPU 93 subtracts 1 from the double stock (S239). On the other hand, when there is no double stock (NO), the main CPU 93 adds the number of additional games drawn in S237 to the normal ART duration (number of ART games) as it is (S240).

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs the event mass control process described later in FIG. 86 (S241), and ends the additional zones 1 and 2 processes.

<Event mass control processing>
Subsequently, the event mass control process will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87. In the event mass control process, first, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a bell or more is winning (S251). As described above, during the addition zone, a favorable reward is given for winning a bell or higher, and a disadvantageous reward is given for winning a replay or lower. The determination in S251 determines whether an advantageous reward will be given or an unfavorable reward will be given in the subsequent processing. In the case of winning the replay or less (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts the process to S271 in FIG. 87.

On the other hand, in the case of winning more than a bell (YES), the main CPU 93 updates the guaranteed number of games (S252). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the event mass set in this game is "Character 1" (S253). When "Character 1" is set as the event mass (YES), the main CPU 93 adds 1 life (S254) and ends the event mass control process.

On the other hand, if "Character 1" is not set as the event cell (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not the event cell set in this game is "Character 2". (S255). When "Character 2" is set as the event mass (YES), the main CPU 93 adds 1 to the red mass conversion stock (S256), and ends the event mass control process.

On the other hand, if "Character 2" is not set as the event cell (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not the event cell set in this game is "Character 3". (S257). When "Character 3" is set as the event mass (YES), the main CPU 93 adds 1 to the double stock (S258), and ends the event mass control process.

On the other hand, if "Character 3" is not set as the event cell (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not the event cell set in this game is "Character 4". (S259). When "Character 4" is set as the event mass (YES), the main CPU 93 adds 1 to the resurrection stock (S260) and ends the event mass control process.

On the other hand, if "Character 4" is not set as the event cell (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not the event cell set in this game is "battle". (S261). When "Battle" is set as the event mass (YES), the main CPU 93 is set to the event mass "Battle" (see S463 in FIG. 96 described later) by the number of back-mass conversions after the next game. The event mass is converted to the back mass (S262), and the event mass control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if "battle" is not set as the event mass (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently has the event mass in which this game is in the additional zone 1 and is set in this game. Is determined to be "back" (S263). If this determination is NO, the main CPU 93 ends the event mass control process, while if this determination is YES (YES), the main CPU 93 converts all the cells into the event mass "back". (S264). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 sets the additional zone 2 in the next game, adds 10 guaranteed games (S265), and ends the event mass control process.

On the other hand, in the case of winning the replay or less, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the event mass set in this game is "red" (S271). If "red" is not set as the event mass (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently updates the guaranteed number of games (S281) and ends the event mass control process.

On the other hand, when "red" is set as the event mass (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not the additional zone 1 is within 5 games from the start (S272). If this determination is YES, the main CPU 93 converts all event masses to “back” (S273). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 sets the additional zone 2 in the next game, adds 10 guaranteed games (S274), and ends the event mass control process. As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the reward "life-1" corresponding to the event mass "red" is given within 5 games from the start of the additional zone 1, the main CPU 93 starts from the additional zone 1. The game state is shifted to the additional zone 2.

On the other hand, if it is not within the starting 5 games in S272, the (NO) main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not there is a guaranteed number of games (S275) and whether or not there is double stock (S276), and this additional zone. It is determined whether or not the addition has been performed even once (S277). If YES in any of these determinations, the main CPU 93 subsequently updates the guaranteed number of games (S281) and ends the event mass control process. That is, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, if the guaranteed number of games remains, if there is double stock, or if no addition has been made, the life is subtracted by the event mass "red". I can't.

On the other hand, if all are NO in S275 to S277, the main CPU 93 subsequently subtracts 1 life (S278). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the life has become 0 (S279). If the life is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the event mass control process, while if the life is 0 (YES), the main CPU 93 sets the normal ART for the next game. (S280), the event mass control process is terminated. If there is a resurrection stock, the main CPU 93 restarts the additional zone 1 in the processing in the additional zones 1 and 2 at the end described later (FIGS. 96 and 97 described later).

<Additional zone 3 processing>
Subsequently, the additional zone 3 processing will be described with reference to FIG. 88. In the additional zone 3 processing, first, the main CPU 93 draws the number of additional games based on the lottery flag C with reference to the additional game number lottery table (FIG. 51 (E)) in the additional zone 3 (S291). .. Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the lottery has been won (S292), and if it has not won (NO), the addition zone 3 process ends.

On the other hand, when the lottery of the number of additional games is won (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently adds the number of the lottered additional games to the number of ART games (S293). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 converts the continuation determination into continuation (S294) when the continuation determination is discontinued, and ends the addition zone 3 processing. As described above, in the addition zone 3, the continuation determination is performed at the start of one set (more specifically, at the end of the previous one set). When the number of ART games is added during the set in which the continuation determination is discontinued, the main CPU 93 rewrites the result of the continuation determination to continuation.

<Processing during bonus at start>
Subsequently, the process during the start bonus will be described with reference to FIG. 89. In the start bonus processing, the main CPU 93 first determines whether or not it is in the special BB (S311). If not in the special BB (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently refers to the ART lottery table in the BB (FIG. 56) and performs an ART lottery based on the lottery flag E (S312).

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the ART lottery has been won (S313). If the ART lottery has not been won, the main CPU 93 ends the processing during the bonus at the start, while if the ART lottery has been won (YES), the ART of the winning type or the stock of the additional zone Is added by 1 (S314), and the processing during the bonus at the start is completed.

On the other hand, when the special BB is in S311 (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently refers to the special BB medium addition game number lottery table (FIG. 57) and determines the number of ART games based on the lottery flag E. An additional lottery is performed (S316). Referring to FIG. 57, in this additional lottery, the number of additional games of 5 or more games is always drawn. The main CPU 93 subsequently adds the number of added games drawn to the number of ART games (S317), and bonuses at the start. End the middle process.

<Reel stop initial setting process>
Next, the reel stop initial setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 90. In the reel stop initial setting process, first, the main CPU 93 refers to the reel stop initial setting table (not shown) and acquires the reel stop number based on the internal winning combination or the like (S331). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 refers to the rotating cylinder stop initial setting table, and acquires each information based on the rotating cylinder stop number (S332). In this process, the main CPU 93 acquires various information associated with the rotation stop number, such as determination data for each pressing order.

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 stores the rotating identifier in the symbol code storage area (not shown) (S333). That is, the main CPU 93 sets the bits of the entire symbol code storage area (excluding the unused area) to "1". Subsequently, the main CPU 93 stores 3 in the stop button non-operation counter (S334), and ends the reel stop initial setting process. The stop button non-operation counter is for determining the number of stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R that have not been stopped by the player, and is stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 95.

<Reel stop control process>
Subsequently, the reel stop control process will be described with reference to FIG. 91. In the reel stop control process, the main CPU 93 first determines whether or not a valid stop button has been pressed (S351). This process is a process of determining whether or not a signal is output from the stop switch board 80. If the main CPU 93 determines that the valid stop button has not been pressed (NO), the main CPU 93 repeatedly executes the process of step S351.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that a valid stop button has been pressed (YES), the pressing order storage area (not shown) and the operation stop button storage area (FIG. (Not shown) and is updated (S352). That is, the main CPU 93 manages the type of the pressed stop button by updating the operation stop button storage area, and updates the pressing order storage area based on the type of the pressed stop button and its order. Use to manage the order of stop operations (push order).

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 subtracts 1 from the stop button non-operation counter (S353), determines the search target reel from the operation stop button (S354), and stores the stop start position in the main RAM 95 based on the symbol counter (S353). S355). The stop start position is a symbol position corresponding to the symbol counter of the corresponding reel when the stop operation is detected by the stop switch board 80.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes the sliding piece number determination process (S356). This sliding piece number determination process determines the number of sliding pieces specified at the stop start position based on the reel stop control information (stop table group) selected based on the internal winning combination from the rotating cylinder stop initial setting table. It is a process.

Next, the main CPU 93 generates reel stop command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the generated reel stop command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 95. The generation process is executed (S357). This reel stop command data represents the type of reel to be stopped, the stop start position, the number of sliding pieces (or the planned stop position), and the like.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines the scheduled stop position based on the stop start position and the number of slip pieces determination data, and stores the stop schedule position in the main RAM 95 (S358). The planned stop position is a symbol position obtained by adding any of the predetermined numerical values "0" to "4" defined as the number of sliding pieces to the stop start position, and the symbol position at which the rotation of the reel is stopped. Is.

Next, the main CPU 93 sets the scheduled stop position as the search symbol position (S359). Next, the main CPU 93 executes the symbol code storage process (S360). This symbol code storage process acquires the symbol code of the check symbol position data for checking the symbol position of the rotating reel.

Next, the main CPU 93 updates the symbol code storage area from the symbol code acquired in the symbol code storage process (S361). Next, the main CPU 93 performs a control change process (S362). In this control change process, the stop information group used for stopping the reel is updated when the reel is at a specific stop position.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the pressed stop button is released (S363). This process is a process of determining whether or not a signal is no longer output from the stop switch board 80.

If the main CPU 93 determines that the pressed stop button has not been released (NO), the main CPU 93 repeatedly executes the process of step S363. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the pressed stop button is released (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not the stop button non-operation counter is 0 (S364). Here, if it is determined that the stop button non-operation counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 executes the pull-in priority storage process (S365), and executes the process of step S41. In this pull-in priority storage process, the pull-in priority of all the symbols of the rotating reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop button non-operation counter is 0 (YES), the main CPU 93 ends the reel stop control process.

<Bonus end check process>
Subsequently, the bonus end check process will be described with reference to FIG. 92. In the bonus end check process, first, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of medals paid out during the bonus state (the number of medals paid out) exceeds the predetermined number (252) (S371). If the number of payouts does not exceed the specified number, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process.

On the other hand, when the number of payouts exceeds the specified number (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently performs the bonus end time table mode transition process (S372). In this process, the main CPU 93 draws and sets the table mode of the transition destination with reference to the table mode transition lottery table 2 (FIG. 22 (B)).

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 sets the game state corresponding to the next game (S373). Specifically, the main CPU 93 sets the game state corresponding to the next game based on the type of stock held, and for example, when no stock is held, the main CPU 93 sets the next game. Set the normal game state to.

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus end time process (S374) and performs a bonus end check process. In this process, the main CPU 93 performs various processes associated with the end of the bonus state, such as clearing the information used during the bonus state. Further, in this process, the main CPU 93 generates bonus end command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the generated bonus end command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 95. .. This bonus end command data includes information such as the type of game state set for the next game.

<Bonus operation check process>
Subsequently, the bonus operation check process will be described with reference to FIG. 93. In the bonus operation check process, first, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the combination of BB symbols (“C_BB_A” to “C_BB_C3”) is displayed (S391). If the combination of BB symbols is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process.

On the other hand, when the combination of the symbols of BB is displayed (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not the game in which the combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination is in the additional zone 2. (S392). If it is in the additional zone 2, the main CPU 93 sets a special BB in the next game (S393). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus start time process (S394), and ends the bonus operation check process. In the bonus start processing, the main CPU 93 performs various processes associated with the start of the bonus state, such as setting information used for the bonus state. Further, in this process, the main CPU 93 generates bonus start command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the generated bonus start command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 95. .. This bonus start command data includes information on the type of the started bonus state (normal BB or special BB) and whether or not the ART stock has been granted according to the winning of the winning combination related to the bonus. The sub-control circuit 101 distinguishes between a normal BB, an episode BB, and a special BB from this information.

On the other hand, if the game in which the bonus-related combination is determined as the internal winning combination in S392 is not in the additional zone 2 (NO), the main CPU 93 adds the game in which the bonus-related combination is determined as the internal winning combination. It is determined whether or not it was in zone 1 (S395). If the game in which the winning combination of the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination is in the additional zone 1 (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines the additional zone promotion lottery table at the time of winning the bonus (FIG. 48 (A)). With reference to, the additional zone promotion lottery at the time of bonus winning is performed (S396).

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the additional zone promotion lottery has been won (S397). If the additional zone promotion lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 93 sets a special BB for the next game (S398). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus start time process (S399), and ends the bonus operation check process.

On the other hand, if the game in which the bonus-related combination is determined as the internal winning combination in S395 is not in the additional zone 1 (NO), or if the additional zone promotion lottery is not won in S397 (NO), the main CPU 93 Subsequently, referring to the bonus winning ART lottery table (FIG. 54), ART lottery is performed based on the back mode based on the value of the back mode (S400).

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the ART lottery has been won (S401). If the episode BB is won (YES), the main CPU 93 adds 1 to the stock of the winning type of ART or the additional zone (S402), and then subtracts 50 from the back mode (S403). If the back mode becomes a negative value as a result of the subtraction, the main CPU 93 sets the value of the back mode to 0. When the back mode becomes 0 due to the subtraction of the back mode, the main CPU 93 subsequently sets "reset" as the back mode lottery state (S404).

Following the processing of S404, or when the ART lottery has not been won in S401, the main CPU 93 subsequently performs the bonus start processing (S405), and ends the bonus operation check processing.

<RT operation check process>
Subsequently, the RT operation check process will be described with reference to FIG. 94. In the RT operation check process, first, the main CPU 93 shifts the RT game state according to the combination of the displayed symbols (S411). Specifically, the main CPU 93 shifts the RT gaming state according to the conditions described in FIG.

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not ART is being prepared (S412). If ART is being prepared (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not the process has shifted to the RT2 gaming state in the process of S411 (S413). When the state shifts to the RT2 gaming state during the ART preparation (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently sets the gaming state corresponding to the next game (S414). Specifically, the main CPU 93 usually sets the corresponding gaming state according to the stock of the ART or the additional zone. Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs the ART start processing (S415), and ends the RT operation check processing. In this process, the main CPU 93 subtracts the stock, sets the initial value of the number of ART games, and the like.

On the other hand, if ART is not being prepared in S412 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not the RT2 gaming state has shifted to the RT1 gaming state in the processing of S411 (S416). If the RT2 gaming state has not transitioned to the RT1 gaming state (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the RT operation check process, while the RT2 gaming state has transitioned to the RT1 gaming state (YES). ), The main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not the gaming state was in the normal gaming state or in CZ (S417).

When shifting from the RT2 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state during the normal gaming state or CZ (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently sets "special" as the back mode lottery state (FIG. 94) and checks the RT operation. End the process.

On the other hand, if the transition from the RT2 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state is not in the normal gaming state or in the CZ (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not the ART is waiting for the end (S419). ). If it is not waiting for the end of ART (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the RT operation check process, while if it is waiting for the end of ART (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently runs through the ART. It is determined whether or not the process ends with (S420). If the ART has been completed by running through (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently sets "in lottery" as the back mode lottery state (S421).

Following the process of S421, or when it is determined in X420 that the ART does not run through (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently sets the game state corresponding to the next game (S422). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs an ART end time process (S423) for clearing various information used during the ART game state, and ends the RT operation check process.

<Control processing by state at the end>
Subsequently, the control process for each state at the end will be described with reference to FIG. 95. In the end state-based control process, the main CPU 93 first determines whether or not ART is being prepared (S431). When the ART is being prepared, the main CPU 93 sets the back mode lottery state according to the number of continuous games (S432).

On the other hand, when ART is not being prepared, the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not it is in the additional zones 1 and 2 (S433). In addition to the case where the additional zones 1 and 2 are currently in the additional zones 1 and 2, when the additional zones 1 and 2 start from the next game (the additional zones 1 and 2 are set to the next game at the start). ) Is also included. If it is in the additional zones 1 and 2 (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently performs the processing in the additional zones 1 and 2 at the end, which will be described later in FIGS. 96 and 97 (S434).

On the other hand, if it is not in the additional zones 1 and 2 in S433, the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not it is in the additional zone 3 (S435). In addition to the case where the additional zone 3 is currently in the additional zone 3, the term includes the case where the additional zone 3 starts from the next game (the additional zone 3 is set to the next game at the start). If it is in the additional zone 3 (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently performs the processing in the additional zone 3 at the end, which will be described later in FIG. 98 (S436).

Following the processing of S432, S434, S436, or when not in the additional zone 3 in S435 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not the back mode lottery state is set (S437). ). If the back mode lottery state is set (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently refers to the back mode addition value lottery table (FIG. 53) and backs up based on the set back mode lottery state. The mode addition value lottery process is performed (S438). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 updates the back mode based on the lottered back mode addition value (S439), and clears the back mode lottery state (S440).

Following the processing of S440 or when the back mode lottery state is not set in S437 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently performs other necessary processing according to the current gaming state (S441). .. Subsequently, the main CPU 93 generates unit game end command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the generated unit game end command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 95 ( S442). The unit game end command data includes information about the result of each process at the end of the unit game.

<Additional zones 1 and 2 at the end>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 96, the processing in the additional zones 1 and 2 at the end will be described. In the processing in the additional zones 1 and 2 at the end, first, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is the start of the additional zone 1 (S451). The start time of the additional zone 1 is the end of the game in which the additional zone 1 starts from the next game.

If it is the start of the additional zone 1 (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether the additional zone level is set, and if the additional zone level is not set, the additional zone level lottery table. With reference to (FIG. 45), the additional zone level is drawn and set (S452). The case where the additional zone level is not set is, for example, when the additional zone 1 starts from the normal ART, at the end of the additional zone 2 started from a state other than the additional zone 1, and also at the additional zone level. Is set, for example, when the additional zone 1 is restarted based on the resurrection stock (addition zone level 3 is set), and at the end of the additional zone 2 transitioned from the additional zone 1 (the first additional zone 1). The additional zone level set at the start is maintained). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 draws and sets event masses for 5 games with reference to the event mass lottery table 1 (FIG. 46 (A)) (S453). Further, in this process, the main CPU 93 sets "5" as the guaranteed number of games.

On the other hand, if it is not the start of the additional zone 1 in S451 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not the number of games is the specific number in the additional zone 1 (S454). As described above, in the additional zone 1, the event mass "battle" is set every 20 games. The process of S454 is a process of determining whether it is the timing to set the event mass "battle". If the number of games is a specific number in the additional zone 1 (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently sets "battle" as a new event mass (S455).

On the other hand, if the number of games is not the specific number in the additional zone 1 in S454 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently refers to the event mass lottery table 1 (FIG. 46 (A)) and sets a new event mass. It is drawn and set (S456).

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not there is a red mass conversion stock (S457). If there is a red mass conversion stock (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not the event mass set for the next game is “red” (S458). When the event mass set for the next game is "red" (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently refers to the event mass lottery table 1 (FIG. 46 (A)) for the next game. The event mass "red" set in the above is converted into another event mass, and the red mass conversion stock is subtracted by 1 (S459).

Following the processing of S453, S455, and S459, if there is no red mass conversion stock in S457, or if the event mass set for the next game in S458 is not "red" (NO), the main CPU 93 is Then, it is determined whether or not there is an event cell in which the "character" is set in the event cells for 5 games (S460). If there is an event cell in which the "character" is set (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently refers to the event cell lottery table 2 (FIG. 46 (B)) to draw a character type and respond. Set to the event mass "Character" to be performed (S461). When the event squares "characters" are set in a plurality of event squares out of the event squares for 5 games, the main CPU 93 determines all of these multiple event squares by one lottery. The character type may be set, or an individual lottery may be performed for each of the plurality of event squares, and the character type determined by the individual lottery may be set.

Following the processing of S461, or when there is no event cell in which "character" is set in S460 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently sets "battle" in the event cell for 5 games. It is determined whether or not there is an event mass that has been set (S462). If there is an event mass in which "battle" is set (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently draws the number of back mass conversions with reference to the event mass lottery table 3 (FIG. 46 (C)). , Set to the corresponding event mass "Battle" (S463). If the event squares "battle" are set in a plurality of event squares out of the event squares for 5 games, the main CPU 93 determines all of these multiple event squares by one lottery. The number of back-mass conversions may be set, or individual lottery may be performed for each of the plurality of event squares, and the number of back-mass conversions determined by the individual lottery may be set.

Following the processing of S463, or when there is no event mass in which "battle" is set in S462 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not normal ART is set in the next game. (S471). When the normal ART is not set in the next game (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the processing in the additional zones 1 and 2 at the end, while the normal ART is set in the next game (NO). YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently refers to the resurrection stock lottery table at the end of the additional zone 1 (FIG. 48 (C)), performs the resurrection stock lottery at the end of the additional zone 1 (S472), and determines the lottery result. Based on this, the number of resurrection stocks is updated (S473).

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the resurrection stock is 1 or more (S474). If the resurrection stock is not 1 or more (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the processing in the additional zones 1 and 2 at the end, while if the resurrection stock is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 93 is Subsequently, the additional zone 1 is set in the next game, that is, the game state set in the next game is rewritten from the normal ART to the additional zone 1 (S475).

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 sets the additional zone level 3 as the additional zone level (S476), and sets "5" as the guaranteed number of games (S477). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 subtracts 1 from the resurrection stock (S478), and ends the processing in the additional zones 1 and 2 at the end.

<Processing in additional zone 3 at the end>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 98, the processing in the additional zone 3 at the end will be described. In the processing during the addition zone 3 at the end, first, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is the start of the addition zone 3 (S491). The start time of the additional zone 3 is the end of the game in which the additional zone 3 starts from the next game. If it is the start of the addition zone 3 (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently draws and sets the continuation rate with reference to the continuation rate lottery table (FIG. 50 (A)) (S492). Further, in this process, the main CPU 93 adds 4 to the guaranteed stock number.

On the other hand, if it is not the start of the additional zone 3 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently updates the number of continuous games in one set (S493). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of continuous games in one set has reached the number of games in one set (S494). When the number of games in one set has not been reached (NO), the main CPU 93 finishes the processing in the additional zone 3 at the end, while the number of games in one set has been reached (at the end of one set). (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not continuation is set (S495).

If continuation is not set (NO), the main CPU 93 sets a normal ART for the next game (S496), and ends the process in the additional zone 3 at the end. On the other hand, if continuation is set (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not the guaranteed stock has been drawn (S497). If the guaranteed stock lottery has not been completed (NO), or following the process of S492, the main CPU 93 performs the guaranteed stock lottery with reference to the guaranteed stock lottery table (FIG. 50 (B)) (S498).

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the guaranteed stock lottery has been won (S499). If the guaranteed stock lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently adds 3 to the guaranteed stock number and sets the guaranteed stock lottery completed (S500).

Following the processing of S500, if it is determined in S497 that the guaranteed stock lottery has been completed (YES), or if it is determined in S499 that the guaranteed stock lottery has not been won (NO), the main CPU 93 determines. It is determined whether or not there is a guaranteed stock (S501). If there is a guaranteed stock (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently subtracts 1 from the guaranteed stock number and refers to the 1 set game number lottery table (FIG. 50 (C)) for one set of the next set. The number of games is drawn and set (S502). Further, in this process, the main CPU 93 clears the number of continuous games in one set. After that, the main CPU 93 ends the processing in the additional zone 3 at the end.

On the other hand, when there is no guaranteed stock (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently performs a continuation determination lottery with reference to the continuation determination lottery table (FIG. 50 (D)), and sets the lottery result (continuation or end). (S503). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 draws and sets the number of one-set games in the next set with reference to the one-set game number lottery table (FIG. 50 (C)) (S504). Further, in this process, the main CPU 93 clears the number of continuous games in one set. After that, the main CPU 93 ends the processing in the additional zone 3 at the end.

<Interrupt processing controlled by the main CPU>
Subsequently, the interrupt process controlled by the main CPU 93 will be described with reference to FIG. 99. First, the main CPU 93 saves the register (S511). Next, the main CPU 93 performs an input port check process (S512). In this process, signals input from various switches such as a stop switch are checked.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a timer update process (S513). In this process, the main CPU 93 performs a process of subtracting a predetermined timer value for each interrupt process, for example. Next, the main CPU 93 performs a communication data transmission procedure (S514). In this process, the main CPU 93 transmits various commands stored in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 95 to the sub control circuit 101.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel control process (S515). In this process, the main CPU 93 starts rotating the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R when all the reels are requested to start rotating, and then each reel rotates at a constant speed. Drive and control three stepping motors. When the number of sliding pieces is determined, the main CPU 93 updates the symbol counter of the corresponding reel by the number of sliding pieces. Then, the main CPU 93 waits for the updated symbol counter to match the value corresponding to the scheduled stop position, and then drives and controls the corresponding stepping motor so that the rotation of the corresponding reel is decelerated and stopped. ..

Next, the main CPU 93 performs the lamp 7-segment drive process (S516). In this process, the main CPU 93 drives and controls the information display 14 to display the number of payouts, the number of credits, and the like. Next, the main CPU 93 performs a register reset process (S517). Then, after that, the main CPU 93 ends the interrupt process.

[Explanation of operation of sub-control circuit]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 100 and 101, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101 using the program will be described.

<Main board communication task>
FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing a main board communication task executed by the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101.

First, the sub CPU 102 executes initialization of the communication message queue (S611) and checks the reception command (S612). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a command different from the previous one has been received (S613). Here, if it is determined that a command different from the previous one has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 executes the process of S611.

On the other hand, if it is determined that a command different from the previous one has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 creates game information from the received command and stores the created game information in the sub RAM 103 (S614). Next, the sub CPU 102 registers the effect based on the game information created in S614 (S615). Although details will be omitted, for example, the sub CPU 102 registers an effect using a display cell corresponding to the event cell set on the main side, and registers a back mode effect based on the value of the back mode. Perform processing. When the effect is registered, the sub CPU 102 controls the liquid crystal display device 11, the speakers 65L, 65R, various LEDs, and the like to execute the registered effect. Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 performs a navigation error insurance process (S616), which will be described later in FIG. 101, and returns to the process of S101.

<Insurance processing at the time of navigation error>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 101, the insurance processing at the time of navigation error under the control of the sub CPU 102 will be described. This navigation error insurance process is performed at the timing when the start command is received from the main control circuit 91. In the navigation error insurance process, the sub CPU 102 first determines whether or not there is a main navigation (S631). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the received start command includes information about the main navigation.

If there is no main side navigation (NO), the insurance processing at the time of navigation error is terminated, while if there is a main side (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs a navigation effect pattern check (S632). It is determined whether or not an effect matching the main navigation is registered (S633). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the effect registered in S615 of FIG. 100 is an effect corresponding to the main navigation. As an example, when "1" is determined as the main navigation, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub navigation of the push order pattern "1" is set (see FIG. 58 (B)). ..

If the effect that matches the main navigation is registered (YES), the insurance processing at the time of navigation error is terminated, while if the effect that does not match the main navigation is registered (NO), the sub Subsequently, the CPU 102 rewrites the push order pattern in the effect related to the sub-side notification (navigation) to a push order pattern that matches the main side navigation (S634). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 sets "color 3 (white)" as a color pattern in the effect related to the notification (navigation) on the sub side (S635), and ends the insurance processing at the time of a navigation error.

Here, FIG. 102 shows a rough flow of the insurance processing at the time of navigation error. Note that FIG. 102 shows the flow of insurance processing at the time of navigation error when the combination “F_pushing order bell 1-11st” is determined as the internal winning combination. When the main side (main CPU93) determines the combination "F_pushing order bell 1-1_1st" as the internal winning combination, the main side navigation content according to the internal winning combination is determined. Here, the main side navigation "7" corresponds to the role "F_pushing order bell 1_1st" (see FIG. 58).

When the main CPU 93 determines the internal winning combination and the main side navigation, it generates start command data including these and sends it to the sub side. When the sub side (sub CPU 102) receives the start command, the sub side (sub CPU 102) registers the effect content from the information included in the start command. In the example shown in FIG. 102, the sub CPU 102 basically determines the push order pattern "7" and "color 2 (yellow)" as the effect of the sub side navigation, but when some error occurs. , Different sub-side navigation, or nothing may be determined as a sub-side navigation. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the sub CPU 102 determines the effect content, the main side navigation is compared with the determined effect content. The sub CPU 102 may or may not compare at least the push order patterns of the main side navigation and the sub side navigation, and may or may not compare the color patterns of the internal winning combination and the sub side navigation.

Then, as a result of this comparison, when the main side navigation and the determined effect content match, the sub CPU 102 performs the sub side navigation according to the determined effect content. For example, the sub CPU 102 navigates the sub side by displaying on the liquid crystal display device 11 that the correct pressing order is the left 1st using yellow characters, images, and the like.

On the other hand, if the sub CPU 102 does not match the determined effect content with the main side navigation as a result of this comparison, the sub CPU 102 rewrites the determined effect content to the effect according to the content of the main side navigation. Specifically, the sub CPU 102 rewrites the push order pattern of the sub side navigation system to "7". At this time, the sub CPU 102 sets "color 3 (white)" as the color pattern. That is, when the main navigation and the determined production content are different, the sub CPU 102 sets the push order pattern matching the main navigation and the color pattern "color 3 (white)". Then, the sub CPU 102 navigates the sub side according to the rewritten effect content. For example, the sub CPU 102 navigates the sub side by displaying on the liquid crystal display device 11 that the correct pressing order is the left 1st using white characters or images.

[Modification example]
Although the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment has been described above, the present invention is not limited to this.

[Modification 1: Transition to CZ or ART]
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the above embodiment, the CZ or ART gaming state is shifted to the CZ or ART gaming state by winning the transition lottery performed during the normal gaming state. Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, a setting difference may be given to the transition lottery, but the transition lottery may be performed based on "information having no difference in the set value". In addition, "information with no difference in set values" means a combination that is determined as an internal winning combination with the same probability in all the set values in the internal lottery process (setting unquestioned combination), and all settings when all reels are stopped. It includes at least a combination of symbols that will be displayed with the same probability in the value (combination of symbols with no setting difference).

That is, in the pachislot machine 1 of the modified example, when the setting unquestioned combination is determined as the internal winning combination, a lottery for shifting to the CZ or ART game state is performed, and the combination with the setting difference (setting difference combination) is used as the internal winning combination. If it is decided, the lottery for transition to the CZ or ART gaming state is not performed. Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a combination of symbols having no setting difference is displayed when all reels are stopped, a lottery for transitioning to the CZ or ART game state is performed, and the combination of symbols having a setting difference is obtained. If it is displayed, the lottery for transition to the CZ or ART gaming state is not performed.

In addition, the lottery for transitioning to the CZ or ART game state is performed based on a predetermined probability of perfection that does not fluctuate at all. The "predetermined perfect probability that does not fluctuate at all" means at least the probability that the probability does not fluctuate based on the set value (that is, the probability that the winning probability is the same regardless of the set value).
It should be noted that the "perfect probability that is predetermined and does not fluctuate at all" may be further included as the probability that is uniquely determined for "information that does not differ in the set value". In recent pachislot machines, a state in which it is easy to win a transition lottery and a state in which it is difficult to win may be provided in the transition lottery. In such a case, when the transition lottery is performed with the "probability uniquely determined for the information having no difference in the set value", for example, at the time of winning the setting unquestioned role, regardless of the gaming state. The transition lottery that wins with the same probability will be performed. On the contrary, when the transition lottery is performed with a "probability that is not a uniquely determined probability (that is, a probability that fluctuates) for information that does not have a difference in the set value", for example, when the setting unquestioned role is won, A transition lottery that wins with a probability according to the current gaming state, that is, if the current gaming state is a high probability state, a transition lottery that wins with a high probability is performed, and the current gaming state is a low probability state. In that case, a transition lottery, which wins with a low probability, will be performed.

In this way, the transition lottery performed based on "information with no difference in the set value" is performed with the same probability of winning regardless of the set value. The degree of expectation regarding the transition to is the same for each set value, and the difference in ball ejection performance can be suppressed to the winning probability of the setting difference combination with the setting difference.

<Example of lottery table used for transition lottery>
Here, an example of a lottery table used for a lottery for transition to a CZ or ART game state is shown in FIG. 103. FIG. 103 (A) is an internal lottery table for determining the internal winning combination.

As shown in the example shown in FIG. 103 (A), the internal lottery table defines the lottery value information corresponding to each combination. Here, the winning combination determined by lottery using the internal lottery table includes a setting difference combination in which the lottery value differs depending on the set value, and a set unquestioned combination in which the lottery value is the same regardless of the set value. In the example shown in FIG. 103 (A), the combination “F_BB1”, “F_maintenance lip A”, etc. are setting difference combinations in which the lottery value differs depending on the set value, and the combination “F_sabo1” “F_chili lip” “F_BB1 + F_reach eye lip”. , Etc. are set unquestioned roles with the same lottery value regardless of the set value. In the modified pachislot machine 1, when the setting difference combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the transition to the CZ or ART game state is not performed, and when the setting unquestioned combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the CZ or A lottery for transition to the ART game state is performed. It should be noted that not performing the transition lottery to the CZ or ART game state includes not performing the transition lottery itself, and also including performing the transition lottery but always being non-winning. In addition, the transition lottery to the CZ or ART game state does not have to be performed when any of the setting unquestioned roles is determined as the internal winning combination, and the transition lottery is performed with the setting unquestioned combination to perform the transition lottery. It is also possible to provide a non-setting unquestioned role.

Here, as a lottery for shifting to the CZ or ART game state, as shown in FIG. 103 (B), (1) an internal lottery for determining the internal winning combination, and (2) whether or not to perform the transition. There are three possible lottery: the transition lottery of (3) and the advantageous section type lottery for determining the transition destination in the case of transition. In the modified pachislot machine 1, these three lottery may be performed by using individual random numbers, or all the lottery may be performed by using a common random number, and 2 One lottery may be performed using a common random number value, and the remaining one lottery may be performed using individual random number values. In addition, using a common random number value means, for example, (1) when "F_watermelon" is determined in the random number range of "0 to 128" in the internal lottery, (2) "0 to 64" is transferred to the lottery. The non-winning random number range, "65-128" is the random number range of the winning lottery, and (3) "65-83" is the random number range where the migration destination is CZ1, and "83-99" is the migration destination. Is a random number range of CZ2, "99 to 115" is a random number range in which the migration destination is normally ART, and "115 to 128" is a random number range in which the migration destination is the additional zone 1. In other words, the lottery results of other lottery are assigned to a part of the random number range that is won in one lottery.

Further, the present invention can be applied not only to pachislot machines but also to pachinko machines. Here, the pachinko machine plays the game without accepting the start operation and the stop operation of the player, and the pattern is changed by using the mechanical reel and displayed on the liquid crystal display device. You can also do it above. Therefore, when applied to a pachinko machine, a symbol display means for displaying a part of a plurality of symbols, a symbol changing means for changing the symbol based on the establishment of a start condition, and an internal one based on the establishment of the start condition. It is displayed on the symbol display means when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the internal lottery means for performing the above-mentioned lottery, the stop control means for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol based on the lottery result of the internal lottery means, and the stop control means. It suffices to provide a game control means for controlling the progress of the game based on the combination of the symbols.

[Transformation example 2: Reel production using medal insertion]
In recent years, game operations from the insertion of medals to the operation of the stop button are performed as a series of assembly line work, and in order to prevent clerical work, when medals are inserted into the game machine, a sub-reel production symbol is used. When the rotation of the game is started, the start lever is operated, and the start operation of the unit game is detected, a game machine that stops the rotation of the production symbol based on the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means has been proposed. There is. However, it is required to provide a game machine having unprecedented playability, in which the symbol is rotated and stopped by an operation different from the operation of the player to make the winning combination predictable. ..

Therefore, when the medals are stored (credited), the main control circuit 91 specifies that the symbols on at least one reel 3L, 3C, 3R among the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R are changed by a specific amount and stopped. The winning combination may be predicted by controlling the effect and using a symbol that is changed by a specific amount.

By doing so, it is possible to provide a game machine with unprecedented playability by rotating and stopping the symbol and making it possible to predict the winning combination, triggered by the medal storage operation (credit operation). it can.

<Game lock lottery table>
FIG. 104 is a game lock effect table for drawing the presence or absence of a lock effect. As shown in FIG. 104, the game lock lottery table defines lottery value information regarding the presence or absence of a lock effect according to the type of the lottery flag A.

<Production control table when locked>
FIG. 105 is an effect control table at the time of locking, which is referred to when executing the lock effect. As shown in FIG. 105, the effect control table at the time of locking defines information on the lottery value for determining the final stop position of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R according to the type of the lottery flag A.

For example, when the lottery flag A is "3" (watermelon) and the lottery result is the effect number "31", the main control circuit 91 has a plurality of reels 3L according to the medal storage (credit) operation. Of, 3C and 3R, first, a specific effect of changing the symbol on the left reel 3L by one frame and stopping is executed until the watermelon symbol at the symbol position "17" stops on the center line. Subsequently, the main control circuit 91 produces a specific effect in which the symbol on the middle reel 3C is changed by one frame among the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R to stop according to the medal storage (credit) operation. This is executed until the watermelon symbol at the symbol position "10" stops. Then, the main control board 71 performs a specific effect on the center line in which the symbol on the right reel 3R is changed by one frame among the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R according to the medal storage (credit) operation. This is executed until the watermelon symbol at the symbol position "13" stops.

<Explanation of operation of main control circuit>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 106 to 110, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 93 of the main control circuit 91 by using the program will be described.

(Main operation processing of pachislot under the control of the main CPU)
First, the procedure of the main operation processing (processing after the power is turned on) of the pachi-slot machine 1 performed under the control of the main CPU 93 will be described with reference to the flowcharts (hereinafter referred to as the main flow) shown in FIGS. 106 and 107.

Compared with the main flow (FIG. 74) described in the present embodiment, in this modification, the game lock lottery process (step S711) is added after the lottery flag conversion process (step S7), and the reel stop initial setting process (step S711) is added. The difference is that the game start lock process (step S712) is added after step S10). Further, when the start command generation process (S9) is performed, the start command is different in that it includes information regarding the result of the lottery in the game lock lottery process.

(Game lock lottery processing)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 108, the game lock lottery process controlled by the main CPU 93 will be described.

In the game lock lottery process, first, the main CPU 93 refers to the game lock lottery table (FIG. 104) and performs the game lock lottery according to the lottery flag A (S731). By the process of S731, whether the lock number "0" (without lock effect) or the lock number "1" (with lock effect) is determined.

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 sets the determined game lock number in the game lock counter (S732). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 sets a predetermined value in the lock timer (S733), and ends the game lock lottery process.

The value set in the lock timer in the process of S733 may be a predetermined constant value such as 10 seconds or 30 seconds, or a plurality of values such as 5 seconds, 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds and 60 seconds. It may be a value determined by lottery from the value of.

(Lock processing at the start of the game)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 109, the lock lottery process at the start of the game under the control of the main CPU 93 will be described.

In the game start lock lottery process, first, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the lock number set in the game lock counter is "1" (with lock effect) (S751). When the lock number is "1" (YES), the main CPU 93 shifts the process to S752. When the lock number is "0" (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the lock process at the start of the game.

When the lock number is "1" (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently refers to the effect lottery table (FIG. 105) at the time of locking, and determines the symbol position to be stopped according to the effect random value (S752). ). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 sets the left reel effect flag, the middle reel effect flag, and the right reel effect flag on (S753). At that time, a command for the reel effect flag is also generated, and the command also includes information that the left reel effect flag, the middle reel effect flag, and the right reel effect flag are on.

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not credit is possible (S754).

The medals received from the medal slot 20 are used for one game up to a preset number of medals (for example, 3), and the amount exceeding the preset number of medals is deposited inside the pachislot machine 1. be able to. That is, the pachislot machine 1 has a so-called credit function. An upper limit (for example, 50) is set in advance for the number of credits that can be deposited inside the pachislot machine 1.

In S754, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of sheets deposited inside the pachi-slot machine 1 is less than a preset upper limit. If credit is possible (YES), the main CPU 93 shifts the process to S755 and permits the acceptance of medals (S755). When permitting medal acceptance, a medal acceptance command is also generated. If credit is not possible (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts processing to S763.

After the main CPU 93 permits the acceptance of medals (after the processing of S755), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not the lock timer has a positive value (S756). If the lock timer has a positive value (YES), the main CPU 93 shifts the process to S757, and if the lock timer has a non-positive value (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts the process to S763.

In S757, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a medal has been inserted. When a medal is inserted (YES), the main CPU 93 shifts the process to S758 and adds "1" to the value of the credit number counter (S758). If no medal is inserted (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts the process to S756.

After the main CPU 93 adds "1" to the value of the credit number counter (after the processing of S758), the main CPU 93 subsequently executes the reel effect processing (S759). The reel effect processing is a process for performing an effect by a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R according to the symbol position determined in the process of S752. The details of the reel effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 110.

The main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not credit is possible (S760). If credit is possible (YES), the main CPU 93 shifts the process to S761. If credit is not possible (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts processing to S763.

If credit is possible (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not any of the reel effect flags is off (S761). When any of the reel effect flags is off (YES), the main CPU 93 shifts the process to S762, sets the lock timer to "0" (S762), and shifts the process to S763. When any of the reel effect flags is on (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to S763.

In S763, the main CPU 93 clears the lock number and the effect number (S763). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 updates from "medal acceptance permission" to "medal acceptance prohibition" (S764), and ends the lock process at the start of the game. When prohibiting the acceptance of medals, a medal acceptance prohibition command is also generated.

(Reel production processing)
Subsequently, the reel effect processing controlled by the main CPU 93 will be described with reference to FIG. 110.

In the reel effect processing, first, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the left reel effect flag is “on” (S771). When the left reel effect flag is "on" (YES), the main CPU 93 shifts the process to S772 and moves the left reel 3L by one frame (S772). If the left reel effect flag is not "on" (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts the process to S775.

After the main CPU 93 moves the left reel 3L by one frame (after the processing of S772), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the symbol stop position stopped in the middle stage of the left reel 3L is the symbol position determined by the lock process at the start of the game. (S773). When the symbol stop position stopped in the middle stage of the left reel 3L is the symbol position determined by the lock process at the start of the game (YES), the main CPU 93 shifts the process to S774 and sets the left reel effect flag to off (S774). ), End the reel production process. At that time, a command for the reel effect flag is also generated, and the command also includes information that the left reel effect flag is set to off. If the symbol stop position stopped in the middle stage of the left reel 3L is not the symbol position determined by the lock process at the start of the game (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the reel effect process.

When it is determined that the left reel effect flag is not "on" (NO in S771), the main CPU 93 shifts the process to S775 and determines whether or not the middle reel effect flag is "on" (S775). When the middle reel effect flag is "on" (YES), the main CPU 93 shifts the process to S776 and moves the middle reel 3C by one frame (S776). If the middle reel effect flag is not "on" (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts the process to S779.

After the main CPU 93 moves one frame of the middle reel 3C (after the processing of S776), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the symbol stop position stopped in the middle stage of the middle reel 3C is the symbol position determined by the lock process at the start of the game. (S777). When the symbol stop position stopped in the middle stage of the middle reel 3C is the symbol position determined by the lock process at the start of the game (YES), the main CPU 93 shifts the process to S778 and sets the middle reel effect flag to off (S778). ), End the reel production process. At that time, a command for the reel effect flag is also generated, and the command also includes information that the middle reel effect flag is set to off. If the symbol stop position stopped in the middle stage of the middle reel 3C is not the symbol position determined by the lock process at the start of the game (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the reel effect process.

When it is determined that the middle reel effect flag is not "on" (NO in S775), the main CPU 93 moves the right reel 3R by one frame (S779). After the main CPU 93 moves one frame on the right reel 3R (after the processing of S779), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the symbol stop position stopped in the middle stage of the right reel 3R is the symbol position determined by the lock process at the start of the game. Is determined (S780). When the symbol stop position stopped in the middle stage of the right reel 3R is the symbol position determined by the lock process at the start of the game (YES), the main CPU 93 shifts the process to S781 and sets the right reel effect flag to off (S781). ), End the reel production process. At that time, a command for the reel effect flag is also generated, and the command also includes information that the right reel effect flag is set to off. If the symbol stop position stopped in the middle of the right reel 3R is not the symbol position determined by the lock process at the start of the game (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the reel effect process.

<Example of game lock>
Next, an example of the game lock in this modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 111 and 112. Specifically, FIG. 111 is an example in which a game lock is performed in a unit game while the internal winning combination is a watermelon, and a reel effect using medal insertion is performed using the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. Further, FIG. 112 is an example in which a game lock is performed in a unit game in which the internal winning combination is lost, and a reel effect using medal insertion is performed using the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

(When the internal winning role is a watermelon)
First, FIG. 111 will be described. After the main CPU 93 determines the watermelon as the internal winning combination in the internal lottery process (S4 in FIG. 106), the main CPU 93 performs the game lock lottery process (S711 in FIG. 106, FIG. 108). In the game lock lottery process, the main CPU 93 refers to the game lock lottery table (FIG. 104) and performs the game lock lottery according to the lottery flag A (number “3”, watermelon) (S731 in FIG. 108). When the lock number "1" (with lock effect) is determined as the lottery result, the main CPU 93 generates a start command (S9 in FIG. 106). This start command also includes information about the result of the lottery in the game lock lottery process. Since the sub CPU 102 has received the start command, which is a command different from the previous one (YES in S613 of FIG. 100), the game lock lottery is applied to the sub RAM 103 in the subsequent processing of the main board communication task (FIG. 100). Information about the result of the lottery in the process is stored (S614 in FIG. 100).

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs a game start lock process (S712 in FIG. 106, FIG. 109). In the game start lock process, the main CPU 93 refers to the effect lottery table (FIG. 105) at the time of lock, and determines the effect number, that is, the symbol position to be stopped, according to the lottery flag A (number “3”, watermelon). (S752 in FIG. 109). When the effect number is "31", the symbol position for stopping the left reel 3L is "17" (watermelon), the symbol position for stopping the middle reel 3C is "10" (watermelon), and the right reel. The symbol position for stopping the 3R is "13" (watermelon).

After that, the main CPU 93 sets the left reel effect flag, the middle reel effect flag, and the right reel effect flag on (S753 in FIG. 109), and if credit is possible (YES in S754 in FIG. 109), Allow medal acceptance. When permitting medal acceptance, a medal acceptance command is also generated.

The sub RAM 103 stores information regarding the result of the lottery in the game lock lottery process. In addition, since the sub CPU 102 has received the medal acceptance command, which is a command different from the previous command (YES in S613 in FIG. 100), the sub RAM 103 also stores information that the medal can be credited (FIG. 100). 100 S614). Therefore, the sub CPU 102 registers the effect of prompting the credit of the medal (S615 in FIG. 100). When the effect is registered, the sub CPU 102 controls the liquid crystal display device 11, the speakers 65L, 65R, various LEDs, and the like to execute the registered effect.

FIG. 111A shows a display example of the liquid crystal display device 11 at that time and a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R inside the display window 4. On the liquid crystal display device 11, the characters "Save medals!" Are displayed as an effect of prompting the credit of medals. Then, the display window 4 displays a symbol when the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped and displayed in the previous unit game. In particular, on the left reel 3L, "replay" (symbol position: 11 in FIG. 9), "bell" (symbol position: 10), and "blue 7" (symbol position: 9) are displayed from the top. Further, on the middle reel 3C, "replay" (symbol position: 2), "cherry" (symbol position: 1), and "blank 1" (symbol position: 0) are displayed from the upper row. Further, on the right reel 3R, "replay" (symbol position: 1), "blank 3" (symbol position: 0), and "red 7" (symbol position: 19) are displayed from the upper row.

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 is used every time a medal is inserted (while it is determined to be YES in S756 of FIG. 109) while the lock timer is a positive value (every time it is determined to be YES in S757 of FIG. 109). ), The reel effect process is executed (S759 in FIG. 109), and the left reel 3L is moved frame by frame (S772 in FIG. 110). The process of moving the left reel 3L frame by frame is until the symbol stop position stopped in the middle stage of the left reel 3L becomes "17" (watermelon), which is the symbol stop position determined by the lock process at the start of the game (FIG. 110). (Until it is determined as YES in S773).

When the symbol stop position stopped in the middle stage of the left reel 3L becomes "17" (watermelon), which is the symbol stop position determined by the lock process at the start of the game, the main CPU 93 sets the left reel effect flag to off (FIG. 110). S774). At that time, a command for the reel effect flag is also generated, and the command also includes information that the left reel effect flag is set to off. Since the sub CPU 102 received a command different from the previous one (YES in S613 in FIG. 100), the sub RAM 103 also stores the information that the left reel effect flag is set to off (S614 in FIG. 100). Therefore, the sub CPU 102 registers an effect of encouraging further credit of the medal (S615 in FIG. 100). When the effect is registered, the sub CPU 102 controls the liquid crystal display device 11, the speakers 65L, 65R, various LEDs, and the like to execute the registered effect.

FIG. 111B shows an example of display of the liquid crystal display device 11 at that time and a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R inside the display window 4. On the liquid crystal display device 11, the characters "Save more medals!" Are displayed as an effect of encouraging further credits for medals. Then, in the display window 4, seven medals are credited from the display state in (A) of FIG. 111, and the symbol when the symbol of the left reel 3L is moved by seven frames is displayed. Specifically, on the left reel 3L, "red 7" (symbol position: 18 in FIG. 9), "watermelon" (symbol position: 17), and "replay" (symbol position: 16) are displayed from the upper row. Further, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R are the same as the display state in FIG. 111 (A).

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 is used every time a medal is inserted (while it is determined to be YES in S756 of FIG. 109) while the lock timer is a positive value (every time it is determined to be YES in S757 of FIG. 109). ), The reel effect processing is executed (S759 in FIG. 109), and the middle reel 3C is moved frame by frame (S776 in FIG. 110). The process of moving the middle reel 3C frame by frame is until the symbol stop position stopped in the middle stage of the middle reel 3C becomes "10" (watermelon), which is the symbol stop position determined by the lock process at the start of the game (FIG. 110). (Until it is determined as YES in S777).

When the symbol stop position stopped in the middle stage of the middle reel 3C becomes "10" (watermelon), which is the symbol stop position determined by the lock process at the start of the game, the main CPU 93 sets the middle reel effect flag to off (FIG. 110). S778). At that time, a command for the reel effect flag is also generated, and the command also includes information that the middle reel effect flag is set to off. Since the sub CPU 102 received a command different from the previous one (YES in S613 in FIG. 100), the sub RAM 103 also stores the information that the middle reel effect flag is set to off (S614 in FIG. 100). Therefore, the sub CPU 102 registers an effect of encouraging further credit of the medal (S615 in FIG. 100). When the effect is registered, the sub CPU 102 controls the liquid crystal display device 11, the speakers 65L, 65R, various LEDs, and the like to execute the registered effect.

FIG. 111 (C) shows a display example of the liquid crystal display device 11 at that time and a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R inside the display window 4. On the liquid crystal display device 11, the characters "Save more medals!" Are displayed as an effect to encourage further credits for medals. Then, in the display window 4, nine medals are credited from the display state in FIG. 111 (B), and the symbol when the symbol of the middle reel 3C is moved by nine frames is displayed. Specifically, on the middle reel 3C, "cherry" (symbol position: 11 in FIG. 9), "watermelon" (symbol position: 10), and "blue 7" (symbol position: 9) are displayed from the upper row. Further, the left reel 3L and the right reel 3R are the same as the display state in FIG. 111 (B).

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 is used every time a medal is inserted (while it is determined to be YES in S756 of FIG. 109) while the lock timer is a positive value (every time it is determined to be YES in S757 of FIG. 109). ), The reel effect process is executed (S759 in FIG. 109), and the right reel 3R is moved frame by frame (S779 in FIG. 110). The process of moving the right reel 3R frame by frame is until the symbol stop position stopped in the middle stage of the right reel 3R becomes "13" (watermelon), which is the symbol stop position determined by the lock process at the start of the game (FIG. 110). (Until it is determined as YES in S780).

When the symbol stop position stopped in the middle of the right reel 3R becomes "13" (watermelon), which is the symbol stop position determined by the lock process at the start of the game, the main CPU 93 sets the right reel effect flag to off (FIG. 110). S781). At that time, a command for the reel effect flag is also generated, and the command also includes information that the right reel effect flag is set to off. Since the sub CPU 102 received a command different from the previous one (YES in S613 in FIG. 100), the sub RAM 103 also stores the information that the right reel effect flag is set to off (S614 in FIG. 100). Therefore, the sub CPU 102 registers an effect of encouraging further credit of the medal (S615 in FIG. 100). When the effect is registered, the sub CPU 102 controls the liquid crystal display device 11, the speakers 65L, 65R, various LEDs, and the like to execute the registered effect.

FIG. 111 (D) shows a display example of the liquid crystal display device 11 at that time and a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R inside the display window 4. On the liquid crystal display device 11, the characters "watermelon" are displayed as an effect suggesting that the internal winning combination is a watermelon. In this modified example, the character "watermelon" is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a pattern or color suggesting that the internal winning combination is "watermelon" may be used.

Then, in the display window 4, 13 medals are credited from the display state in FIG. 111 (C), and the symbol when the symbol of the right reel 3R is moved by 13 frames is displayed. Specifically, on the right reel 3R, "BAR" (symbol position: 14 in FIG. 9), "watermelon" (symbol position: 13), and "bell" (symbol position: 12) are displayed from the upper row. The symbol combination of "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" is displayed on the center line connecting the symbol stop positions in the middle stages of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. From this combination of symbols, it is expected that the internal winning role is watermelon.

(When the internal winning role is lost)
Subsequently, FIG. 112 will be described. The main CPU 93 performs the game lock lottery process (S711, FIG. 108 in FIG. 106) after determining the loss as the internal winning combination in the internal lottery process (S4 in FIG. 106). In the game lock lottery process, the main CPU 93 refers to the game lock lottery table (FIG. 104) and performs the game lock lottery according to the lottery flag A (number “0”, off) (S731 in FIG. 108). When the lock number "1" (with lock effect) is determined as the lottery result, the main CPU 93 generates a start command (S9 in FIG. 106). This start command also includes information about the result of the lottery in the game lock lottery process. Since the sub CPU 102 has received the start command, which is a command different from the previous one (YES in S613 of FIG. 100), the game lock lottery is applied to the sub RAM 103 in the subsequent processing of the main board communication task (FIG. 100). Information about the result of the lottery in the process is stored (S614 in FIG. 100).

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs a game start lock process (S712 in FIG. 106, FIG. 109). In the game start lock process, the main CPU 93 refers to the effect lottery table (FIG. 105) at the time of lock, and determines the effect number, that is, the symbol position to be stopped, according to the lottery flag A (number "0", off). (S752 in FIG. 109). When the effect number is "03", the symbol position for stopping the left reel 3L is "17" (watermelon), the symbol position for stopping the middle reel 3C is "10" (watermelon), and the right reel. The symbol position for stopping the 3R is "12" (bell).

After that, the effect using the left reel 3L and the middle reel 3C is as described with reference to FIG. 111. That is, (A) to (C) in FIG. 112 are the same as (A) to (C) in FIG. 111.

After the effects (A) to (C) of FIG. 112 are performed, the main CPU 93 inserts medals while the lock timer has a positive value (while it is determined to be YES in S756 of FIG. 109). Every time (every time it is determined to be YES in S757 of FIG. 109), the reel effect processing is executed (S759 of FIG. 109), and the right reel 3R is moved frame by frame (S779 of FIG. 110). The process of moving the right reel 3R frame by frame is until the symbol stop position stopped in the middle stage of the right reel 3R becomes "12" (bell), which is the symbol stop position determined by the lock process at the start of the game (FIG. 110). (Until it is determined as YES in S780).

When the symbol stop position stopped in the middle of the right reel 3R becomes "12" (bell), which is the symbol stop position determined by the lock process at the start of the game, the main CPU 93 sets the right reel effect flag to off (FIG. 110). S781). At that time, a command for the reel effect flag is also generated, and the command also includes information that the right reel effect flag is set to off. Since the sub CPU 102 received a command different from the previous one (YES in S613 in FIG. 100), the sub RAM 103 also stores the information that the right reel effect flag is set to off (S614 in FIG. 100). Therefore, the sub CPU 102 registers an effect of encouraging further credit of the medal (S615 in FIG. 100). When the effect is registered, the sub CPU 102 controls the liquid crystal display device 11, the speakers 65L, 65R, various LEDs, and the like to execute the registered effect.

FIG. 112 (D) is a display example of the liquid crystal display device 11 at that time and the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R inside the display window 4. On the liquid crystal display device 11, the characters "sorry" are displayed as an effect suggesting that the internal winning combination is lost.

Then, in the display window 4, 12 medals are credited from the display state in FIG. 112 (C), and the symbol when the symbol of the right reel 3R is moved by 12 frames is displayed. Specifically, on the right reel 3R, "watermelon" (symbol position: 13 in FIG. 9), "bell" (symbol position: 12), and "replay" (symbol position: 11) are displayed from the top. The symbol combination of "watermelon-watermelon-bell" is displayed on the center line connecting the symbol stop positions in the middle stages of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. From this combination of symbols, it is expected that the internal winning role will be lost.

According to this modification, the main CPU 93 that controls the effect using the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R is among the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R when medals are stored (credited) in the credit number counter. , The symbol on at least one reel 3L, 3C, 3R is changed by a specific amount (in this modified example, it is set to one frame at a time, but it is not limited to this). The resulting symbol suggests the result of whether or not the privilege is given, which is determined by the main CPU 93. In this modified example, the result of the internal winning combination is illustrated as an example of the result of the presence / absence of the privilege grant, but the result is not limited to this, and the privilege grant such as the presence / absence of ART and the presence / absence of the bonus internal winning is given. Any content may be used as long as it corresponds to the presence or absence.

As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having unprecedented playability, in which a symbol is rotated and stopped by a medal storage operation as a trigger, and an internal winning combination can be predicted.

In this modification, the effect triggered by the medal storage operation is performed while the lock process at the start of the game is being executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. Regardless of whether or not the game is locked at the start of the game, the medal storage operation is a trigger for any period between the operation of the start lever 23 and the operation of the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R. The produced effect may be made feasible.

In this modification, it has been described that the process of moving the mechanical reels 3L, 3C, and 3R can be executed in response to the detection of the insertion of the medal by the main CPU 93, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the main CPU 93 detects the insertion of a medal, a command indicating that the main CPU 93 has detected the insertion of a medal is generated, and when the sub CPU 102 receives the command, the liquid crystal display device 11 displays the command. The sub CPU 102 may be able to execute the process of moving the liquid crystal reel (not shown).

In this modification, the operation of storing medals is used as a trigger to change and stop the symbols on at least one reel 3L, 3C, 3R by a specific amount (one frame at a time in this modification) to change the specific amount. The symbol suggests the result of whether or not the privilege is given determined by the main CPU 93, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the period from the operation of the start lever 23 to the operation of the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R is set as the period during which the medal storage operation is possible, and in this period, each time the medal storage operation is performed. , The effect may be executed according to the result of determining whether or not the privilege is given. For example, the storage operation of the first medal is an effect of notifying whether or not the internal winning combination is lost, and the storage operation of the second medal is notified of whether or not the internal winning combination is a replay. Production to notify whether the internal winning combination is a bell or not for the storage operation of the third medal, and notification of whether or not the internal winning combination is a cherry for the storage operation of the fourth medal. Directing the 5th medal storage operation to notify whether the internal winning combination is a watermelon, ... The Nth medal storage operation is a bonus whether the internal winning combination is a bonus. It is a production to notify. Then, if the internal winning combination is a bonus, a loss denial effect that denies that the internal winning combination is lost is executed at the time of the storage operation of the first medal, and the storage operation of the second medal is performed. At that time, a replay denial effect that denies that the internal winning combination is a replay is executed, and ... A bonus confirmation effect that notifies that the internal winning combination is a bonus when the Nth medal is stored. May be executed. Alternatively, if the internal winning combination is a replay, a loss denial effect that denies that the internal winning combination is lost is executed at the time of the storage operation of the first medal, and the storage operation of the second medal is performed. At that time, a replay confirmation effect for notifying that the internal winning combination is a replay may be executed. In this case, even if the third and subsequent medals are stored, the effect of notifying the internal winning combination is not executed.

An upper limit (for example, 50) is set for the number of medals that can be stored. The content of the effect when the upper limit is reached is not particularly limited, but for example, the effect is not executed even if more storage operations are performed, and when the upper limit of the number of stored sheets is reached, all the planned effects are displayed. It is executed, and so on.

[Modification 3: A function to mute the voice of a favorite character even if a predetermined trigger occurs]
In recent years, in a game machine capable of notifying whether or not a privilege has been granted, a music sound output means for outputting a music sound composed of vocal sounds and accompaniment sounds, which are sung voices, and notification by the notification means. It has been proposed to provide a dialogue sound output means for outputting a dialogue sound, which is a voice containing a character's dialogue, from the sound output means in a game within a predetermined period of time. In this gaming machine, the sound output control means outputs the sound signals of the vocal sound, the accompaniment sound, and the dialogue sound to the sound output means via separate channels when the music sound is output and the dialogue sound is output at the same time. However, the volume of the vocal sound is set to be lower than the volume when the output of the music sound and the output of the dialogue sound are not performed at the same time.

In this game machine, for example, the volume of the navigation voice sound output from the upper left speaker and the upper right speaker is set to be lower than the predetermined volume, so that the volume of the navigation voice sound is set to the predetermined volume. In comparison, the music sound becomes easier to hear. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect of the sound and enhance the interest of the game.

However, in the above-mentioned game machine, when the production on the game machine is switched to the next production based on a predetermined trigger such as a so-called medal betting operation, a start lever operation, or a third stop operation, the character's dialogue sound is produced. It may be forcibly terminated even though it is in the middle of the dialogue.

Vocal sounds and music sounds have a large meaning as sound effects and BGM when displaying images, and since it is a relatively long time, it is unavoidable to forcibly end in the middle of vocal sounds and music sounds. There is also. On the other hand, the character's dialogue sound is relatively short, and if it is forcibly terminated even though it is in the middle of the dialogue, the dialogue sound is cut off in the middle of the dialogue for the player. It can give the impression that it has been done. Therefore, further improvement is required for the dialogue sound of the character when switching the production on the game machine to the next production based on a predetermined opportunity.

Therefore, when a predetermined trigger occurs, the sub-control circuit 101 terminates an effect different from the effect of at least one target character selected from a plurality of types of characters, and an effect of displaying an image of the target character. On the other hand, at least for the effect of producing the sound of the target character, the operation of the device group related to the effect may be controlled so that the effect is continuously executed even at the above-mentioned predetermined trigger.

By doing so, the voice of the character that the player likes will be a predetermined opportunity, and even if the production on the game machine is switched to the next production, it will be output to the end without ending in the middle. Be sounded. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine that further enhances the interest of the game.

<Sound data transmission channel>
FIG. 113 is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of a sound data transmission channel provided in the sub RAM 103.

The sound data transmission channel has a function of temporarily registering sound data determined by the sub CPU 102, and includes a sound data transmission channel A110 and a sound data transmission channel B120. Each sound data transmission channel is provided with different transmission channels depending on the type of character, sound effect, and BGM.

In this modification, when the sub CPU 102 registers a new effect, sound data and other effect data (image data, lamp effect data, etc.) required for the new effect are set. At the start of the game, when the sub CPU 102 registers a new effect, the sound data required for the new effect is set in the sound data transmission channel A110 in different transmission channels depending on the type of character, sound effect, and BGM. Subsequently, when the sub CPU 102 registers a new effect, the sound data required for the new effect is set in the sound data transmission channel B120 in different transmission channels depending on the type of character, sound effect, and BGM.

Then, the sub CPU 102 is directed so as to end the effect different from the effect of at least one target character selected from the plurality of types of characters used in the effect and the effect of displaying the image of the target character. (Speaker group 65L, 65R, LED group 85, liquid crystal display device 11) is controlled. In particular, the sub CPU 102 sets the volume value of the sound data registered in the sound data transmission channel A110 for the sound data transmission channel, the sound effect data transmission channel, and the BGM data transmission channel of a character different from the target character. The speaker groups 65L and 65R are controlled so as to update to "0". On the other hand, the sub CPU 102 controls the speaker groups 65L and 65R so as to maintain the volume value as it is for the sound data transmission channel of the target character. Then, the sub CPU 102 can output sound from the speaker groups 65L and 65R by setting the volume value to a predetermined value for any sound data transmission channel for the sound data newly registered in the sound data transmission channel B120. To control.

After that, every time the sub CPU 102 registers a new effect, the sound data is alternately set in the order of the sound data transmission channel A110 and the sound data transmission channel B120.

By doing so, in this modified example, the voice of the character preferred by the player will be a predetermined opportunity, and even if the production on the game machine is switched to the next production, it will end in the middle. It is possible to output sound to the end.

<Providing an opportunity to mute the voice of your favorite character using Unimemo>
In recent years, a service that links a mobile phone with a dedicated site on the Internet and provides the player with the game content (game history) from the start of the game to a certain point in time by the dedicated site (hereinafter, "Unimemo"). ") Is known. Using this service, for example, the sub CPU 102 creates a game record QR code when a progress acquisition operation is performed, a recording end operation is performed, or the like, and the player uses a mobile phone to play a game. By reading the record QR code and inputting the read information into a dedicated site on the Internet, it is possible to manage the game history of the player on the dedicated site. Then, when a predetermined game history, for example, a player plays a unit game 10,000 times in total, it is possible to mute the voice of a favorite character from a data management server that manages a dedicated site. Even if the effect on the game machine is switched to the next effect for the first time by sending a special pass-third for the player and entering the special password into the pachislot machine 1 at the start of the game. , It may be possible to mute the voice of a favorite character. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the attractiveness of making a predetermined game history such that the total number of unit games is 10,000 times.

FIG. 114 is a schematic schematic diagram of the game information providing system S in this modified example. The game information providing system S includes a pachislot machine 1, a camera-equipped mobile communication terminal 400 (hereinafter, referred to as “mobile terminal”) possessed by the player, and a data management server 500 for managing game information. Although one mobile terminal 400 is shown in FIG. 114 for convenience of explanation, a plurality of mobile terminals 400 can access the data management server 500 at the same time.

The mobile terminal 400 and the data management server 500 can send and receive data to and from each other via the network NW, for example, using TCP / IP or the like as a communication protocol. The network NW is constructed by, for example, the Internet, a dedicated communication line (for example, a CATV (Community Antenna Television) line), a mobile communication network (including a base station, etc.), a gateway, and the like. Further, the pachislot machine 1 is not connected to the network NW.

Although not particularly shown, the mobile terminal 400 and the data management server 500 each include a control unit, a storage unit, a display unit, a communication unit, and the like.

The sub CPU 102 of the pachislot machine 1 records the game content after the player starts the game in the game data area of the sub RAM 103, and the game information indicating the game content during the game or at the end of the game. The game information is provided to the player by the QR code (registered trademark) 330, which is a two-dimensional code.

When the sub CPU 102 of the pachislot machine 1 provides the game information providing service, the player's game recorded in the game data area 103 or the like of the sub RAM 103 so that the player's mobile terminal 400 can access the data management server 500. The information is converted into a QR code (registered trademark) 330, and the QR code (registered trademark) 330 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11.

Specifically, i) when the player starts the game, ii) when the player tries to acquire the game information in the middle of the game, iii) the player tries to acquire the game information at the end of the game. Occasionally, the QR code (registered trademark) 330 is displayed, respectively.

In addition, instead of or together with the QR code (registered trademark) 330, a bar code in which the player's game information is converted may be displayed.

The above i) Information transmitted when the player starts the game includes information on the domain of the data management server 500, login number information indicating the number of logins from the power on, and identification of the own game machine and another game machine. The game machine identification information for the purpose is included.

Further, the transmission information when the above ii) player tries to acquire the game information in the middle of the game, or ii) the player tries to acquire the game information at the end of the game is included in the information. In addition, the above-mentioned i) game information indicating the game content recorded after the player starts the game is included.

The control unit of the mobile terminal 400 reads the QR code (registered trademark) 330 displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 with a camera, and accesses the data management server 500 according to the information such as the domain included in the QR code (registered trademark) 330. , In the case of the above i), the login count information, the game machine identification information, etc. included in the QR code (registered trademark) 330 are transmitted as the start transmission data, and in the case of the above ii) or iii). The login count information, the game machine identification information, the game information, etc. included in the QR code (registered trademark) 330 are transmitted as output transmission data.

When the control unit of the data management server 500 is accessed at the time of i) above, the control unit stores the login count information, the game machine identification information, and the like included in the received start transmission data in the storage unit.

When the control unit of the game information management server 500 is accessed during the above ii) and iii), the login count information and the game machine identification information included in the received output transmission data and the above i) It is determined whether the login count information and the game machine identification information stored at that time match, and if they match, the login count information, the game machine identification information, the game information, etc. included in the output transmission data are not shown. It is stored in the game information DB (database).

Further, the control unit of the game information management server 500 generates display data (for example, a Web page) so that the mobile terminal 400 can display the contents indicated by the received game information and the like, and the mobile terminal 400 that has accessed the game information management server 500. Send back. The control unit of the mobile terminal 400 causes the display unit to display an image showing the game content or the like based on the received display data. The player can confirm the game content and the like from the displayed image.

<Explanation of operation of sub-control circuit>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 115 to 120, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101 by using the program will be described.

(Unimemo management task)
FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing a uni-memo management task executed by the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101.

First, the sub CPU 102 sets a cycle of 10 ms for OS time management (S811). After the cycle of 10 ms has elapsed, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the operation performed by the player is a menu activation operation (S812). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the menu activation operation is performed, the sub CPU 102 makes a uni-memo menu display request described later with reference to FIG. 116 (S813), waits for a cycle of 10 ms (S827), and then the player performs the operation. The process proceeds to determine whether or not the operation is a menu activation operation (S812).

In S812, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the operation performed by the player is not a menu activation operation, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the operation performed by the player is a recording start operation (S814).

When the sub CPU 102 determines that the operation performed by the player is the recording start operation, the sub CPU 102 initializes the uni-memo recording area (S815). For example, the sub CPU 102 initializes the game data area of the sub RAM 103.

Following S815, the sub CPU 102 creates a game recording start QR code (registered trademark) (S816), and subsequently makes a game recording start request (S817). At this time, the game recording start QR code (registered trademark) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, and the player reads it with the camera of the mobile terminal 400. After that, the sub CPU 102 waits for a cycle of 10 ms (S817), and then shifts to a process of determining whether or not the operation performed by the player is a menu activation operation (S812).

In S814, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the operation performed by the player is not the recording start operation, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the operation performed by the player is an intermediate progress acquisition operation (S818).

In S818, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the operation performed by the player is an intermediate progress acquisition operation, for example, the player selects the "intermediate progress acquisition" item with the selection button 24 and presses the enter button 25. If so, the password input process is executed (S819).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the password input process has been canceled (S820), and if it determines that the password input process has been canceled, waits for a cycle of 10 ms (S827), and then the player. Moves to the process of determining whether or not the operation performed by is a menu activation operation (S812).

In S822, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the password input process has not been canceled, the sub CPU 102 creates a game record QR code (registered trademark) (S821). This QR code (registered trademark) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, and when the player reads it with the camera of the mobile terminal 400, the game information of the progress is recorded in the player-specific area of the storage unit of the data management server 500. To.

In S818, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the operation performed by the player is not an intermediate progress acquisition operation, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the operation performed by the player is a recording end operation (S822).

In S822, if the sub CPU 102 determines that the operation performed by the player is not a recording end operation, the sub CPU 102 waits for a cycle of 10 ms (S827), and then whether or not the operation performed by the player is a menu activation operation. The process proceeds to the determination process (S812).

In S822, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the operation performed by the player is the recording end operation, the sub CPU 102 executes the password input process (S823). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the password input process has been canceled (S824), and if it determines that the password input process has been canceled, waits for a cycle of 10 ms (S827), and then the player. Moves to the process of determining whether or not the operation performed by is a menu activation operation (S812).

If the sub CPU 102 determines in step S824 that the password input process has not been canceled, the sub CPU 102 creates a game record QR code (registered trademark) (step S825). This QR code (registered trademark) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, and when the player reads it with the camera of the mobile terminal 400, it enters the player's unique area in the storage unit of the data management server 500 from the middle of the process to the end of the game. Game information is recorded.

Following step S825, the sub CPU 102 makes a game recording end request (S826), waits for a cycle of 10 ms (S827), and then shifts to a process of determining whether or not the operation performed by the player is a menu activation operation. (S812).

(Unimemo menu display request processing)
FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing a uni-memo menu display request process executed by the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the character selection operation has been performed within the predetermined time (S831).

In S831, when it is determined that the character selection operation has been performed within the predetermined time, the sub CPU 102 sets the character selection information (S832). In S831, when the sub CPU 102 determines that there is no character selection operation within a predetermined time, the sub CPU 102 proceeds to a process of registering information according to the operation content (S833).

In S832, when the sub CPU 102 executes the process of setting the character selection information (S832), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the special password input operation has been performed within the predetermined time (S833).

In S833, when it is determined that the special password input operation has been performed within the predetermined time, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the special password is correct (S834). In S834, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the special password is correct, it sets the special effect flag on (S835) and registers the information according to the operation content (S836). If the sub CPU 102 determines in S834 that the special password is incorrect, the sub CPU 102 repeats the process of S834.

In S833, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the special password input operation has not been performed within the predetermined time, the sub CPU 102 proceeds to the process of registering information according to the operation content (S836).

In S836, when the sub CPU 102 executes a process of registering information according to the operation content, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there has been a uni-memo menu display end request operation (S837).

When it is determined in S837 that there is a uni-memo menu display end request operation, the sub CPU 102 ends the uni-memo menu display request process and waits for a cycle of 10 ms in the uni-memo management task (FIG. 115). After (S827 in FIG. 115), the process proceeds to a process of determining whether or not the operation performed by the player is a menu activation operation (S812 in FIG. 115).

If it is determined in S837 that there is no end request operation for displaying the uni-memo menu, the sub CPU 102 returns to the process (S831) of determining whether or not the character selection operation has been performed within the predetermined time.

(Main board communication task)
FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the main board communication task in the third modification.

Compared with the main board communication task (FIG. 100) described in the present embodiment, in the present modification 3, the process of registering the effect according to the game information (step S615) and the process of insurance for navigation error (step S616) It differs in that processing is added in between.

In S615, when the sub CPU 102 registers the effect according to the game information, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a new effect has been registered (S851). When it is determined in S851 that a new effect has been registered, the sub CPU 102 sets the effect update flag on (S852), and proceeds to the navigation error insurance process (S616). If it is determined in S851 that no new effect has been registered, the sub CPU 102 moves to the navigation error insurance process (S616).

(Periodic interrupt processing)
FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing a periodic interrupt process executed by the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101. This interrupt process is performed every 2 ms.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the effect update flag is on (S871). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the effect update flag is on, the sub CPU 102 performs a sound data set process (S872), which will be described later with reference to FIG. 119, and then performs a process of setting other effect data (S873). , End the periodic interrupt process. When the sub CPU 102 determines that the effect update flag is not on (off), the sub CPU 102 ends the periodic interrupt process.

(Sound data set processing)
119 and 120 are flowcharts showing a sound data set process executed by the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the channel A use flag is on (S891). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the channel A use flag is on, the sub CPU 102 sets the sound data to be output in the next production to a predetermined channel of the sound data transmission channel B (S892), and specifies the volume of the channel B (S892). S893).

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the channel A use flag is not on (off), the sub CPU 102 sets the sound data to be output in the next production to a predetermined channel of the sound data transmission channel A (S899). The volume of channel A is specified (S900).

After the sub CPU 102 specifies the volume of the channel B (S893), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the special effect flag is on (S894). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the special effect flag is on, the sub CPU 102 specifies a phrase number for muting the volume of the sound data transmission channel A other than the channel that transmits the sound of the selected character ( S895), the channel A use flag is turned off (S897).

When the sub CPU 102 determines that the special effect flag is not on (off), the sub CPU 102 specifies a phrase number for muting the volume for all the channels constituting the sound data transmission channel A (S896), and channel A Turn off the use flag (S897).

After the sub CPU 102 turns off the channel A use flag (S897), the sub CPU 102 turns on the channel B use flag (S898). After that, the sub CPU 102 ends the sound data set processing, and shifts the processing to S873 in FIG. 118.

On the other hand, after the sub CPU 102 specifies the volume of the channel A (S900), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the special effect flag is on (S901). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the special effect flag is on, the sub CPU 102 specifies a phrase number for muting the volume of the sound data transmission channel B other than the channel that transmits the sound of the selected character ( S902), turn off the channel B use flag (S904).

When the sub CPU 102 determines that the special effect flag is not on (off), the sub CPU 102 specifies a phrase number for muting the volume for all the channels constituting the sound data transmission channel B (S903), and channel B Turn off the use flag (S904).

After the sub CPU 102 turns off the channel B use flag (S904), the sub CPU 102 turns on the channel A use flag (S905). After that, the sub CPU 102 ends the sound data set processing, and shifts the processing to S873 in FIG. 118.

According to this modification, the character selection operation is performed within a predetermined time after the Unimemo menu is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 (S831 and S832 in FIG. 116), and the special password is correctly set within the predetermined time. When input (S833, S834 in FIG. 116), the special effect flag is set to on (S835 in FIG. 116). Then, when a new effect is registered (S851 in FIG. 117), the effect update flag is set to on (S852 in FIG. 117), and the sound data set process is executed (S872 in FIG. 118). In the sound data set processing, the sub CPU 102 mutes sounds that are different from the sounds of the target character related to the selection operation (S895 in FIG. 119 and S902 in FIG. 120). On the other hand, at least for the effect of producing the sound of the target character, the sub CPU 102 continues to output the sound without muting even if a new effect is registered (S895 in FIG. 119 and S902 in FIG. 120). ..

As a result, regarding the voice of the character that the player likes, even if the production on the pachislot machine 1 is switched to the next production by registering a new production, the sound is not ended in the middle and is the last. Is sounded up to. Therefore, it is possible to provide the pachi-slot machine 1 that further enhances the interest of the game.

Further, in this modification, if the sounds of all the characters can be output when a new effect is registered, various sounds (characters) in the next effect that start when the new effect is registered. It may be confused with any voice including vocal sound and music sound, not limited to the voice of the above, and on the contrary, the voice cannot be identified. According to the pachi-slot machine 1 described in this modification, since the sound for continuously executing the effect when a new effect is registered is narrowed down to the sound of the favorite character selected by the player, various sounds are produced. It is possible to prevent a situation in which each voice cannot be identified due to confusion.

When it is possible to output the voices of all the characters according to a predetermined trigger, various voices (not limited to the voices of the characters but also vocal sounds and musical music sounds) in the next production that starts with the trigger are all voices. ), And on the contrary, it may not be possible to identify the voice. According to such a game machine, since the voice that continues to execute the production even when a predetermined trigger is reached is narrowed down to the voice of the favorite character selected by the player, various voices are confused and each voice is confused. It is possible to prevent the situation where the character cannot be identified.

[Modification example 4: Effect of inserting medals]
So far, a gaming machine has been proposed that can grasp that the player has shifted to the ART state by repeatedly hitting the bet button by the player himself / herself. However, no gaming machine has been proposed that enables a so-called continuous striking effect to be executed not only by operating a physical button but also by operating in another form, which leads to a state advantageous for the player.

Therefore, when the main control circuit 91 detects the stored signal of the medal while executing the predetermined effect, the sub-control circuit 101 produces a notification effect regarding the granting of the privilege in the liquid crystal display device 11 or the like according to the detected stored signal. It may be possible to control it. By doing so, not only the physical button operation but also the operation of storing medals (credit operation), which is another form of operation, makes it possible to execute the so-called continuous hitting effect, which leads to an advantageous state for the player. In that respect, it is possible to provide a game machine having a new game property that has never been seen before.

<Direction group lottery table>
FIG. 121 is an effect group lottery table for drawing an effect group. As shown in FIG. 121, the effect group lottery table defines information on the lottery value for selecting the effect group number depending on the presence or absence of the ART win.

<Battle production lottery table>
FIG. 122 is a battle effect lottery table for drawing the effect numbers in the battle effect. The battle effect lottery table is referred to when the result of the lottery referring to the effect group lottery table shown in FIG. 121 is the effect group number “1” (battle effect).

The battle effect lottery table defines information on the lottery value for selecting the effect number according to the presence or absence of the ART win. If you win the ART, it is easier to win the battle than if you did not win the ART (effect numbers "1", "3"), and if you do not win the ART, you will get the ART. Compared to the case of winning, it is easier to perform a production that loses the battle (production numbers "2", "4").

In addition, when the production of the continuous hit chance is performed (production numbers "3" and "4"), the ART is won as compared with the case where the production of the continuous hit chance is not performed (production number "1" and "2"). There is a high possibility that it is. Then, after the chance of repeated hits, if the production to win the battle is performed, the ART is won with a probability of 100/101 (production number "3"). In addition, if a production that loses the battle is performed after the chance of repeated hits, there is a 5/6 chance that the ART will not be won (production number "4"). Therefore, it can be said that the production of the chance of repeated hits is not only a production that raises the expectation of winning the ART, but also a production with a high degree of reliability regarding the presence or absence of the ART winning regarding the result of the battle.

<Explanation of operation of main control circuit>
Next, with reference to FIG. 123, a specific embodiment of the medal acceptance / start check process (S3) in the main flow (FIG. 74) of the present embodiment will be described according to the present modification.

(Medal reception / start check processing)
In the medal reception / start check process, the main CPU 93 first determines whether or not there is an automatic insertion request (S1011). If a player wins a replay role in the previous unit game, a medal is automatically inserted in this unit game. That is, the determination process in step S1011 is equivalent to determining whether or not the replay was won in the previous unit game.

When it is determined in step S1011 that there is an automatic insertion request, the main CPU 93 executes an automatic insertion process of automatically inserting the same number of medals as the medals inserted in the previous unit game (step S1012). Specifically, the main CPU 93 copies the automatic closing counter to the closing number counter and clears the automatic closing counter.

Next, the main CPU 93 generates medal insertion command data, and stores the generated medal insertion command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 95 (step S1013). The medal insertion command data includes information such as the number of medals inserted. The main CPU 31 shifts the process to step S1015 after the process of step S1013.

When it is determined in step S1011 that there is no automatic insertion request, the main CPU 93 executes the medal acceptance permission (step S1014). Specifically, the main CPU 93 drives a solenoid of a selector (not shown) to promote the passage of medals in the selector.

Next, the main CPU 93 sets the maximum value of the number of inserted sheets according to the gaming state (step S1015). In this modification, the main CPU 93 will be described as setting the maximum value of the number of input sheets to "3" in all the gaming states, but the present invention is not limited to this.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not there is permission to accept medals (step S1016). If this determination is YES, the main CPU 31 subsequently performs the process of step S1017, and if NO, the main CPU 31 subsequently performs the process of step S1021.

In step S1017, the main CPU 31 executes a medal insertion check process for checking the number of inserted medals. In the medal insertion check process, the main CPU 93 updates the value of the insertion number counter according to the number of checked medals.

Next, the main CPU 93 generates medal insertion command data, and stores the generated medal insertion command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 95 (step S1018). The medal insertion command data includes information such as the number of medals inserted.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not it is possible to insert medals or credit (step S1019). When the main CPU 31 determines that neither the insertion of the medal nor the credit is possible based on the detection result by the medal sensor (not shown) or the data representing the number of credits stored in the main RAM 95 (NO), the medal After prohibiting the acceptance of (step S1020), the process is transferred to step S1021.

After executing the process of step S1020, if it is determined in step S1016 that the medal acceptance is not permitted, or if it is determined in step S1019 that either medal insertion or credit is possible (YES), the main CPU 93 inserts the medal. It is determined whether or not the number of medals that have been played is the number of medals that can start the game (three in this modification) (step S1021).

When it is determined in step S1021 that the number of inserted medals is not the number that can start the game (NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to step S1016.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of inserted medals is the number of medals that can start the game (YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the start switch 79 is on (step S1022).

When it is determined in step S1022 that the start switch 79 is not on, the main CPU 93 returns the process to step S1016. On the other hand, when it is determined that the start switch 79 is on, the main CPU 93 prohibits medal acceptance (step S1023). Specifically, the solenoid of the selector (not shown) is not driven, and the medals inserted into the insertion slot are ejected from the medal payout outlet 32. After executing the process of step S1023, the main CPU 93 ends this subroutine.

<Explanation of operation of sub-control circuit>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 124 to 127, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101 by using the program will be described.

(Main board communication task)
FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the main board communication task in the present modification 4.

Compared with the main board communication task (FIG. 100) described in the present embodiment, in the present modification 4, the mode of processing when the start command is received, the reel stop command is received, and the medal insertion command is received is concrete. It differs in that it is described (S1031 to S1037).

(Processing when a start command is received)
FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing a start command reception process executed by the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state is the normal gaming state or the chance zone (S1051). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state is the normal gaming state or the chance zone, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S1052. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state is not the normal gaming state or the chance zone, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S1057.

In S1052, the sub CPU 102 refers to the effect group lottery table (FIG. 121) and determines the effect group number according to the result of the ART lottery.

Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the effect group number is "1" (S1053). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the effect group number is "1", the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S1054. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the effect group number is not "1", the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S1057.

In S1054, the sub CPU 102 refers to the battle effect lottery table (FIG. 122) and determines the effect group number according to the result of the ART lottery.

Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the effect number is "3" or "4" (S1055). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the effect number is "3" or "4", the sub CPU 102 sets the continuous hit effect flag to ON (S1056), and shifts the process to S1058. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the effect number is not "3" or "4", the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S1058.

In S1057, the sub CPU 102 determines the effect number according to the game state and the effect group.

Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 registers the effect data at the start according to the determined effect number. (S1058). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 executes another process at the time of receiving the start command (S1059), and ends the process at the time of receiving the start command.

(Processing when receiving reel stop command)
FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing a reel stop command reception processing executed by the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the stop button non-operation counter is "0" (S1071). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the stop button non-operation counter is "0", the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S1072. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the stop button non-operation counter is not "0", the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S1074.

In S1072, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the continuous hitting effect flag is on. When the sub CPU 102 determines that the continuous hitting effect flag is on, the sub CPU 102 starts the measurement of the continuous hitting timer (S1073), and shifts the processing to S1074. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the continuous hitting effect flag is not on (off), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S1074.

Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 registers the effect data at the time of stopping according to the effect number and the type of the operation stop button (S1074), and ends the processing at the time of receiving the reel stop command.

(Processing when receiving a medal insertion command)
FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing a medal insertion command reception processing executed by the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the continuous hitting effect flag is on (S1091). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the continuous hitting effect flag is on, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S1092. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the continuous hitting effect flag is not on (off), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S1099.

In S1092, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the measurement time of the continuous hitting effect timer is less than 20 seconds. When the sub CPU 102 determines that the measurement time of the continuous hitting effect timer is less than 20 seconds, the sub CPU 102 adds "1" to the continuous hitting count counter (S1073), and shifts the processing to S1094. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the measurement time of the continuous hitting effect timer is not less than 20 seconds (20 seconds or more), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S1096.

In S1094, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the continuous hit count counter is "30". When the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of repeated hits counter is "30", the sub CPU 102 registers the effect data of the continuous hit effect according to the effect number (S1095), and shifts the process to S1097. When the sub CPU 102 determines that the continuous hit count counter is not "30", the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S1100.

In S1096, the sub CPU 102 registers the effect data of the failure of repeated hits, and shifts the processing to S1097.

Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 clears the continuous hit timer and the continuous hit effect counter (S1097), sets the continuous hit effect flag to off (S1098), and shifts the process to S1100.

In S1099, the sub CPU 102 registers the effect data at the time of inserting the medal according to the type of the effect number, and shifts the process to S1100.

Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 executes another process at the time of receiving the medal insertion command (S1100), and ends the process at the time of receiving the medal insertion command.

According to the pachislot machine 1 described in this modification, when the medal sensor (not shown) detects the medal credit operation and the sub CPU 102 receives the medal insertion command during the battle effect, the sub CPU 102 receives the medal insertion command. In response to the input command, the effect of notification regarding the addition of ART in the liquid crystal display device 11 or the like is controlled. Therefore, not only the physical button operation but also the credit operation of the medal, which is another form of operation, makes it possible to execute the so-called continuous hitting effect, which leads to an advantageous state for the player. It is possible to provide a pachislot machine 1 having no new playability.

Further, in the pachislot machine 1 described in this modification, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of times that the medal sensor (not shown) detects the medal credit operation and the sub CPU 102 receives the medal insertion command during the battle effect. Accordingly, the effect of notification regarding the addition of ART in the liquid crystal display device 11 or the like is controlled. Therefore, not only the physical button operation but also the continuous credit operation (storage operation) of medals, which is a continuous operation in another form, makes it possible to execute the so-called continuous hitting effect, which is advantageous for the player. In terms of connection, it is possible to provide a game machine with a newer game property.

In this modified example, the period during which medals can be inserted is from the third stop to the start operation, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be another timing such as during rotation of the reel.

An upper limit (for example, 50) is set for the number of medals that can be stored. The content of the effect when the upper limit is reached is not particularly limited, but for example, the effect is not executed even if more storage operations are performed, and when the upper limit of the number of stored sheets is reached, all the planned effects are displayed. It is executed, and so on.

Further, in this modification, the storage operation of one medal is described as corresponding to the effect of one hit, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the storage operation of one medal may correspond to the production of two or more hits, or the storage operation of two or more medals corresponds to the production of one hit. It may be a thing.

[Modification 5: New relief function]
So far, a game machine having a relief function for forcibly shifting to an advantageous state when the advantageous state is not performed for a long period of time has been known. However, the conventional device for the relief function is relief by shifting the state of the game from the normal state to the advantageous state when the normal state, which is not the advantageous state, continues for a long time. Therefore, it is required to provide a new remedy and to have a variation in the treatment for preventing the player from suffering a great disadvantage.

Therefore, a new remedy may be provided, and the remedy function for preventing the player from suffering a great disadvantage may be provided with variations.

<Flow of the game during the normal game state>

FIG. 128 is a diagram showing the flow of the game during the normal game state in this modified example. In comparison with the flow of the game during the normal game state in the present embodiment (FIG. 23), in the present embodiment, regarding the ART lottery, the main control board 71 performs the ART lottery based on the lottery flag A, and wins the ART lottery. In this case, the gaming state is then changed to the ART gaming state (via a precursor), whereas in this modified example, the ART gaming states are the first normal ART and the second normal ART. When the player wins the ART lottery, the game state is first changed from the normal game state to the first normal ART, and then the cherry (either weak cherry, strong cherry, or confirmed cherry) is won. In some cases, the game state is changed from the first normal ART to the second normal ART.

FIG. 129 is a diagram for explaining in more detail the flow of the game during the ART game state in this modified example.

The first normal ART includes a notification pattern A for 1000 games and a notification pattern B for 100 games. The notification pattern A is a section in which the notification of the stop operation information can hardly be executed, and is a section in which the player is hardly given a privilege. The notification pattern B is a section in which notification of stop operation information can be executed, and is a section in which a privilege is given to the player.

When the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the first normal ART, the main control board 71 executes 1000 games in the section of the notification pattern A, and then 100 games in the section of the notification pattern B.

Here, even during the execution of the section of the notification pattern A, if a cherry (either a weak cherry, a strong cherry, or a confirmed cherry) is hit, the game state shifts from the first normal ART to the second normal ART. Will be done. The second normal ART includes a notification pattern A for 32 games and a notification pattern B for 100 games. When the gaming state shifts from the first normal ART to the second normal ART, the section of the notification pattern A of the main control board 71 is changed to 32 games. Then, when the section of the notification pattern A is executed for 32 games, the section of the notification pattern B is executed for 100 games thereafter.

In this modified example, when the internal winning combination is cherry, the transition from the first normal ART to the second normal ART is performed without drawing lots, but the present invention is not limited to this. When some kind of lottery is performed and the lottery is won, the first normal ART may be changed to the second normal ART.

Alternatively, the probability of winning the transition from the first normal ART to the second normal ART may be changed depending on the type of cherry. For example, when the internally-winned cherry is a strong cherry, the internal-winned cherry is easier to win in the transition from the first normal ART to the second normal ART than when the internally-winned cherry is a weak cherry. When is a definite cherry, it may be easier to win the transition from the first normal ART to the second normal ART than when the internally won cherry is a strong cherry.

(ART lottery number determination table related to the modified example)
FIG. 130 is an ART lottery number determination table according to a modified example. The table shown in FIG. 130 is referred to when the current gaming state is the normal gaming state.

When the gaming state is the normal gaming state, in the present embodiment, different ART lottery numbers are defined according to the type of the lottery flag A and the set value (FIG. 26). However, in this modification, the same ART lottery number "10" is defined regardless of the type of the lottery flag A and the set value.

(ART lottery table related to the modified example)
FIG. 131 is an ART lottery table according to a modified example. The table shown in FIG. 131 is referred to when the ART lottery number is "10".

In the ART lottery table, information on the lottery value regarding the lottery result of the ART lottery is defined. In this modification, the lottery value "1" is assigned to the ART non-winning, and the lottery value "255" is assigned to the ART winning.

According to the table group shown in FIGS. 130 and 131, in the normal game state, the ART is drawn regardless of the type of the lottery flag A, and it can be said that the ART is won at a ratio of 255/256.

(Stop information notification flag lottery table)
FIG. 132 is a stop information notification flag lottery table.

In the stop information notification flag lottery table, information on the lottery value for determining the state of the stop information notification flag (whether to turn it on or off) is defined from the type of notification pattern. When the notification pattern is A, the ratio at which the stop information notification flag is determined to be "on" is 10/256. On the other hand, when the notification pattern is A, the ratio at which the stop information notification flag is determined to be "on" is 256/256.

Although the description of the detailed processing flow is omitted, if the stop information notification flag is on and the predetermined conditions are satisfied (in the case of this embodiment, if the gaming state is the RT2 gaming state). , It is possible to notify the information of the stop operation. On the other hand, when the stop information notification flag is off, even if a predetermined condition is satisfied (in the case of the present embodiment, even if the game state is the RT2 game state), information on the stop operation is notified. Is infeasible.

<Explanation of operation of main control circuit>
Next, the operation according to this modification of the main control circuit 91 will be described with reference to FIGS. 133 to 136.

(Normal processing at the start related to the modified example)
FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing a normal start-time process (FIG. 77 in this embodiment) executed by the CPU 93 of the main control circuit 91.

First, the main CPU 93 refers to the ART lottery number determination table (FIG. 130) according to the modified example, and determines the ART lottery number from the lottery flag A (S1111). In this modification, the ART lottery number "10" is determined regardless of the type of the lottery flag A.

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 refers to the ART lottery table (FIG. 131) according to the modified example, and performs the ART lottery based on the ART lottery number (S1112). In this modification, the ratio of winning ART is 255/256, and the ratio of non-winning is 1/256.

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the ART has been won (S1113). When the ART is won, the main CPU 93 sets the "first normal ART" as the next game (S1114), sets the notification pattern A remaining number counter to "1000" (S1115), and performs normal processing at the start. To finish.

On the other hand, if the ART is not won, the main CPU 93 ends the normal processing at the start.

(Processing during ART at start related to the modified example)
FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing a process during ART at the start (FIG. 83 in this embodiment) executed by the CPU 93 of the main control circuit 91.

First, the main CPU 93 refers to the stop information notification flag lottery table (FIG. 131) and draws the state of the stop information notification flag based on the notification pattern (S1131). In this process, when the value of the notification pattern A remaining number counter is 1 or more, the main CPU 93 executes the lottery assuming that the notification pattern is the notification pattern A. On the other hand, when the value of the notification pattern B remaining number counter is 1 or more, the main CPU 93 executes the lottery assuming that the notification pattern is the notification pattern B.

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the lottery of the stop information notification flag has been won (S1132). In the case of winning, the main CPU 93 sets the stop information notification flag to ON (S1133), and shifts the processing to S1135. If not won, the main CPU 93 sets the stop information notification flag to off (S1134) and shifts the processing to S1135.

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the gaming state is the first normal ART (S1135). When the gaming state is the first normal ART (YES), the main CPU 93 executes the first normal ART update process described later, and ends the process during the ART at the start. When the gaming state is not the first normal ART (NO), the main CPU 93 executes the second normal ART update process described later, and ends the process during the ART at the start.

(First normal ART update process)
FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing a first normal ART update process executed by the CPU 93 of the main control circuit 91.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the notification pattern A remaining number counter is greater than (1 or more) than 0 (S1151). When the notification pattern A remaining number counter is larger than 0 (YES), the main CPU 93 shifts the process to S1152. When the notification pattern A remaining number counter is 0 or less (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts the process to S1159.

In S1152, the main CPU 93 subtracts 1 from the notification pattern A remaining number counter. Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the notification pattern A remaining number counter is larger than 32 (S1153). When the notification pattern A remaining number counter is larger than 32 (YES), the main CPU 93 shifts the process to S1154. When the notification pattern A remaining number counter is 32 or less (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts the process to S1157.

In S1154, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the cherry has been won. The cherry here includes, but is not limited to, a weak cherry, a strong cherry, and a confirmed cherry, and may be a specific cherry. Alternatively, it may be another role that is relatively infrequently won, instead of the cherry. When the cherry is won (YES), the main CPU 93 shifts the process to S1155. If the cherry has not been won (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts the process to S1157.

In S1155, the main CPU 93 sets the "second normal ART" in the next game. Subsequently, the main CPU 93 updates the notification pattern A remaining number counter to “32” (S1156), and shifts the processing to S1157.

In S1157, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the notification pattern A remaining number counter is 0. When the notification pattern A remaining number counter is 0 (YES), the main CPU 93 sets the notification pattern B remaining number counter to “100” (S1158), and ends the first normal ART update process. When the notification pattern A remaining count counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the first normal ART update process.

In S1159, the main CPU 93 subtracts 1 from the notification pattern B remaining number counter. Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the notification pattern B remaining number counter is 0 (S1160). When the notification pattern B remaining number counter is 0 (YES), the main CPU 93 sets the "normal game state" in the next game (S1161), and ends the first normal ART update process. When the notification pattern B remaining count counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the first normal ART update process.

(Second normal ART update process)
FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing a second normal ART update process executed by the CPU 93 of the main control circuit 91.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the notification pattern A remaining number counter is greater than (1 or more) than 0 (S1171). When the notification pattern A remaining number counter is larger than 0 (YES), the main CPU 93 shifts the process to S1172. When the notification pattern A remaining number counter is 0 or less (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts the process to S1175.

In S1172, the main CPU 93 subtracts 1 from the notification pattern A remaining number counter. Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the notification pattern A remaining number counter is 0 (S1173). When the notification pattern A remaining number counter is 0 (YES), the main CPU 93 sets the notification pattern B remaining number counter to “100” (S1174), and ends the second normal ART update process. When the notification pattern A remaining count counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the second normal ART update process.

In S1175, the main CPU 93 subtracts 1 from the notification pattern B remaining number counter. Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the notification pattern B remaining number counter is 0 (S1176). When the notification pattern B remaining number counter is 0 (YES), the main CPU 93 sets the “normal game state” in the next game (S1177), and ends the second normal ART update process. When the notification pattern B remaining count counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the second normal ART update process.

According to the gaming machine described in this modification, in the normal gaming state (non-ART), the main CPU 93 has a type of internal winning combination (lottery flag A) for each unit game in the normal gaming state (non-ART). Regardless of, it is determined whether to shift from the normal gaming state (non-ART) to the first normal ART. As a result, the transition from the normal gaming state (non-ART) to the first normal ART can be executed with a relatively small number of unit games.

Then, in the first normal ART, the main CPU 93 determines from the first normal ART to the second when the internal winning combination (lottery flag A) is a cherry (either a weak cherry, a strong cherry, or a confirmed cherry). Decide whether to move to normal ART. Since the main CPU 93 makes the determination when the internal winning combination (lottery flag A) is cherry, it is relatively rare that the main CPU 93 decides to shift from the first normal ART to the second normal ART. Is. Then, when the first normal ART is shifted to the second normal ART, the number of times of the notification pattern A is reduced from 1000 times to 32 times, which is less, and if the unit game of the notification pattern A is performed 32 times, the notification is made. The unit game of the notification pattern B, which has a larger privilege than the pattern A, can be executed. As a result, when it is determined in the first normal ART to shift to the second normal ART, the number of games of the notification pattern A can be reduced and the unit game of the notification pattern B having a larger privilege can be executed. It will be possible.

On the other hand, since it is relatively rare for the main CPU 93 to decide to shift from the first normal ART to the second normal ART, the first is until the number of unit games of the notification pattern A reaches 1000 times. It may not be determined to move from the normal ART of the first to the second normal ART. Even in such a case, if the number of unit games of the notification pattern A reaches 1000, the unit game of the notification pattern B, which has a greater privilege than the unit game of the notification pattern A, is subsequently executed. .. As a result, when the unit game of the notification pattern B is not executed for a long time, the player can be given a feeling as if it is a relief function for forcibly executing the unit game having a privilege.

[Modification example 6: Link between medal insertion and production]
In recent years, the game operation from the insertion of the medal to the operation of the stop button is performed as a series of assembly line work, and in order to prevent it from becoming clerical, when the medal is inserted into the game machine, it is a symbol for the production of the sub reel. When the rotation of the game is started, the start lever is operated, and the start operation of the unit game is detected, a game machine that stops the rotation of the production symbol based on the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means has been proposed. There is.

According to this configuration, in the sub-reel, the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means is notified at the timing when the game operation is performed in a clerical manner without any conventional production. As a result, it becomes possible to notify the winning role that has an impact, and the player can enjoy the production on the sub reel with an unprecedented interest.

However, no production is performed from the insertion of the medal to the operation of the start lever, and even during such a period, some production related to the game is performed to provide unprecedented playability. It is required to provide a game machine with a game.

Therefore, even during the period from the insertion of the medal to the operation of the start lever, some effect related to the game may be executed.

<Medal hold production lottery table>
FIG. 137 is a medal holding effect lottery table. In this table, information on the lottery value for determining the mode of the medal displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 according to the credit operation (storage operation) of the medal is defined.

When the effect number "0" is determined, the effect content is "off", and even if the medal credit operation is performed, the medal symbol is not displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11.

When the effect number "1" is determined, the effect content is "blue medal hold effect", and the liquid crystal display device 11 executes an effect indicating that the medal has been held in response to the credit operation of the medal. .. At that time, the medal is shining blue.

When the effect number "2" is determined, the effect content is "yellow medal hold effect", and the liquid crystal display device 11 executes an effect indicating that the medal has been held in response to the credit operation of the medal. .. At that time, the medal is shining yellow.

When the effect number "3" is determined, the effect content is "red medal hold effect", and the liquid crystal display device 11 executes an effect indicating that the medal has been held in response to the credit operation of the medal. .. At that time, the medal is shining red.

According to the medal hold production lottery table, the production number "1" is determined at a ratio of 50/256, the production number "2" is determined at a ratio of 20/256, and the production number "3" is determined at a ratio of 10/256. It is determined by the ratio of. Therefore, the "blue medal holding effect" is a relatively frequent production, while the "yellow medal holding effect" and the "red medal holding effect" are compared to the frequency of the "blue medal holding effect". It can be positioned as a rare production.

<Medal hold production information storage area>
FIG. 138 shows a medal holding effect information storage area. This storage area is an area for storing information on the lottery result determined with reference to the medal holding effect lottery table (FIG. 137), and is provided in a part of the sub RAM 103.

The medal holding effect information storage area is configured to include the first to fourth areas.

The first area is an area in which information is first stored when information is not stored in any of the first to fourth areas. The first area corresponds to the medal holding effect of the most recent first game.

The second area is an area in which information is stored in the first area, but when the information is not stored in any of the second to fourth areas, the information is subsequently stored. The second area corresponds to the medal holding effect of the latest second game.

The third area is an area in which information is stored in the first area and the second area, but is subsequently stored when the information is not stored in the third area and the fourth area. The third area corresponds to the medal holding effect of the latest third game.

The fourth area is an area in which information is stored in the first to third areas, but information is subsequently stored when the information is not stored in the fourth area. The fourth area corresponds to the medal holding effect of the latest fourth game.

When the unit game of the most recent first game is completed, the information stored in the second to fourth regions is transferred from the first region to the third region, respectively. Then, the information stored in the fourth area is cleared. As a result, information regarding the mode of the medal displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 can be continuously stored according to the operation of inserting the medal.

<Character lottery table>
FIG. 139 is a character lottery table. In this table, lottery value information for deciding whether or not to execute the character effect according to the information (contents of the medal hold effect) stored in the first area of the medal hold effect information storage area is stored. It is stored.

When the information (contents of the medal holding effect) stored in the first area is the "blue medal holding effect", the probability that the character effect is performed is 1/256. Therefore, the "blue medal hold effect" corresponds to an effect in which the expectation that the character effect is performed is hardly obtained.

When the information (contents of the medal holding effect) stored in the first area is the "yellow medal holding effect", the probability that the character effect is performed is 56/256. Therefore, the "yellow medal hold production" corresponds to a production that can have a little expectation that the character production will be performed.

When the information (contents of the medal holding effect) stored in the first area is the "red medal holding effect", the probability that the character effect is performed is 156/256. Therefore, the "red medal hold effect" corresponds to an effect that can have a strong expectation that the character effect will be performed.

It is preferable that the character displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 by the character effect is the same as the character used in the notification suggesting that a privilege such as a bonus can be obtained by some other effect. By doing so, even though the medal hold effect in this modified example is not actually linked to the lottery flag such as the internal winning combination, the player is given a "red medal hold effect" in the medal hold effect. It is possible to give the player the feeling that it is a chance, even though it is not actually a chance that the character production is executed after the "red medal hold production". ..

<Explanation of operation of sub-control circuit>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 140 to 142, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101 by using the program will be described.

(Main board communication task)
FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the main board communication task in the sixth modification.

Compared with the main board communication task (FIG. 100) described in the present embodiment, in the present modification 6, the mode of processing at the time of receiving the medal insertion command and at the time of receiving the start command is specifically described. Different (S1211-S1214).

(Processing when receiving a medal insertion command)
FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing a medal insertion command reception processing executed by the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the medal is a credit operation (storage operation) (S1231). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the medal is a credit operation (storage operation), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S1232. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not a medal credit operation (storage operation), that is, a medal insertion operation for performing the latest unit game, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S1235.

In S1232, the sub CPU 102 refers to the medal holding effect lottery table (FIG. 137) and determines the content of the medal holding effect.

Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the determined effect number is any of "1" to "3" (S1233). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the determined effect number is any of "1" to "3", the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S1234. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determined effect number is not any one of "1" to "3" ("0"), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S1235.

In S1234, the sub CPU 102 registers the effect data in a predetermined area of the medal hold effect information storage area (FIG. 138).

Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 executes another process at the time of receiving the medal insertion command (S1235), and ends the process at the time of receiving the medal insertion command.

(Processing when a start command is received)
FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing a start command reception process executed by the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the first area of the medal hold effect information storage area is “with hold effect” (S1251). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines that the data stored in the first area of the medal hold effect information storage area is one of "blue medal hold effect", "yellow medal hold effect", and "red medal hold effect". Determine if it exists. When the sub CPU 102 determines that the first area is "with hold effect", the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S1252. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the first area is not "with hold effect", the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S1255.

In S1252, the sub CPU 102 refers to the character lottery table (FIG. 139) and determines the presence or absence of the character effect according to the content of the hold medal effect. Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 registers the effect data according to the determination result (S1253).

Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 updates the information in the medal holding effect information storage area (FIG. 138) (S1254). In this process, the sub CPU 102 transfers the information stored in the second to fourth regions from the first region to the third region, respectively. Then, the sub CPU 102 clears the information stored in the fourth area. As a result, information regarding the mode of the medal displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 can be continuously stored according to the operation of inserting the medal.

Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 executes another process at the time of receiving the start command (S1255), and ends the process at the time of receiving the start command.

<Example of medal hold production>
Next, an example of the medal holding effect in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 143.

When the player performs a medal credit operation (storage operation), the sub CPU 102 refers to the medal hold effect lottery table (FIG. 137) in the medal insertion command reception processing (FIG. 141), and displays the content of the medal hold effect. Determine (S1232). When the result is the effect number "1" (blue medal hold effect), the sub CPU 102 places "blue" as the medal hold effect data for the first game in the first area of the medal hold effect information storage area (FIG. 138). Register the information of "medal hold effect" (S1234). Then, when the effect is registered, the sub CPU 102 controls the liquid crystal display device 11, the speakers 65L, 65R, various LEDs, and the like to execute the registered effect.

Then, by repeatedly performing the medal credit operation (storage operation), the sub CPU 102 performs the "blue medal hold effect" as the medal hold effect data of the second game in the second area of the storage area at a certain timing. The information is registered, and the information of the "red medal hold effect" is registered as the medal hold effect data of the third game in the third area of the storage area. Similarly, when the effect is registered, the sub CPU 102 controls the liquid crystal display device 11, the speakers 65L, 65R, various LEDs, and the like to execute the registered effect.

FIG. 143 (A) is a display example of the liquid crystal display device 11 at that time. The liquid crystal display device 11 displays the characters "Save medals and hold them!", Which suggests that medals can be held. Then, under the letters, in order from the left, the symbol with the blue glowing medal as the latest first game is reserved, and the symbol with the blue glowing medal as the latest second game is reserved. The symbol with the red shining medal on hold as the latest third game is displayed. The design for the latest 4th game is blank.

Subsequently, when the player operates the start lever 23 and the start switch 79 detects this, the main CPU 93 performs internal lottery processing (S4 in FIG. 74) and additional zone lottery in the special chance zone (S151 in FIG. 81). ) Etc. are executed. Then, the main CPU 93 transmits a start command to the sub CPU 102. The start command contains information about the internal lottery process.

Then, when the sub CPU 102 receives the start command, the sub CPU 102 executes the process at the time of receiving the start command (FIG. 142). In the start command reception processing (FIG. 142), the sub CPU 102 executes a processing (S1252) or the like for determining the presence / absence of the character effect with reference to the character lottery table (FIG. 139).

For example, since the content of the hold medal effect of the latest first game is "blue medal hold effect", the sub CPU 102 refers to the character lottery table (FIG. 139), and the content of the medal hold effect is "blue medal hold effect". The lottery according to the "directing" is executed, and as a result, the character directing "none" is determined.

FIG. 143 (B) is a display example of the liquid crystal display device 11 at that time. The liquid crystal display device 11 does not produce any particular effect. Therefore, the "blue medal hold effect" corresponds to an effect in which the expectation that the character effect is performed is hardly obtained.

After that, the sub CPU 102 transfers the information stored in the second to fourth regions of the medal holding effect information storage region (FIG. 138) from the first region to the third region, respectively. Then, the sub CPU 102 clears the information stored in the fourth area (S1254 in FIG. 142).

In the subsequent unit game, by repeatedly performing the medal credit operation (storage operation), the sub CPU 102 sets the "blue medal hold effect" in the third area of the storage area (FIG. 138) at a certain timing. "Yellow medal hold effect" is set in the fourth area. Then, after the sub CPU 102 executes a process (S1252) or the like for determining the presence / absence of the character effect, the sub CPU 102 stores the information stored in the second to fourth areas of the medal hold effect information storage area (FIG. 138). , Each transferred from the first region to the third region. Then, the sub CPU 102 clears the information stored in the fourth area (S1254 in FIG. 142).

In the subsequent unit game, by repeatedly performing the medal credit operation (storage operation), the sub CPU 102 sets the "blue medal hold effect" in the fourth area of the storage area (FIG. 138) at a certain timing. ..

FIG. 143 (C) is a display example of the liquid crystal display device 11 at that time. The characters "medal hold status" are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. Then, under the letters, in order from the left, the symbol with the medal glowing red as the latest first game, the symbol with the medal glowing blue as the latest second game, and the symbol as the latest third game. The symbol with the medal glowing yellow and the symbol with the medal glowing blue as the latest third game are displayed.

Since the content of the hold medal effect of the latest first game is "red medal hold effect", the sub CPU 102 refers to the character lottery table (FIG. 139), and the content of the medal hold effect is "red medal hold". A lottery is executed according to the effect, and as a result, the character effect is determined to be present.

FIG. 143 (D) is a display example of the liquid crystal display device 11 at that time. The liquid crystal display device 11 displays a state in which fireworks are launched in the sky and the character makes a V sign. Therefore, the "red medal hold effect" corresponds to an effect that can have a strong expectation that the character effect will be performed.

According to the pachislot machine 1 described in this modification, the sub CPU 102 is composed of a plurality of types of medal images (blue medal image, yellow medal image, red medal image) that imitate medals according to a medal credit operation. , The medal image to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 is determined. Then, when the sub CPU 102 detects the credit operation of the medal, the sub CPU 102 controls the liquid crystal display device 11 so as to display the medal image of the color corresponding to the result of determining the medal image to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, and the medal. The effect following the effect of displaying the medal image is controlled according to the color of the image.

Until now, even if a medal credit operation (storage operation) is performed, a sound indicating that the medal has been credited (stored) is emitted, and the number of credited (stored) medals is displayed numerically. I was staying at. According to the pachislot machine 1 described in this modification, the medal is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 in response to the medal sensor detecting the credit operation of the medal, regardless of the detection of the operation of the start lever 23. The effect of displaying the medal image is executed. Then, following the effect of displaying the medal image, the effect is executed according to the color of the medal displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11.

For the player, even between the time when the medal is credited and the time when the start lever 23 is operated, the medal is not only stored in the predetermined storage area by the medal credit, but also. The liquid crystal display device 11 can also give the impression that medals are stored. Then, at the stage of storing medals, since the lottery such as the determination of the so-called internal winning combination is not performed, the lottery result cannot be notified, but the effect of displaying the image of the medal is followed by the character effect. A chance element that it is possible to perform an effect by a specific character, which is difficult to obtain depending on the color of the medal displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, by executing the effect according to the result of determining the presence or absence. Is given.

As a result, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 described in the present modification, even during the period from the start of inserting the medal to the operation of the start lever 23, the effect related to the game is executed, and the game performance is unprecedented. It is possible to provide a gaming machine with.

[Modification 7: Production function by waiting time]
Until now, the lottery of the winning combination has been mainly performed by detecting the start operation by the start switch. In addition, it is also proposed to provide a means for selecting one lottery timing from a plurality of preset lottery timings and a means for determining the internal state by the lottery performed at the selected lottery timings. For example, the control means of the game machine can extract random numbers, (a) when the wait timer reaches 4.1 seconds, (b) when a medal is inserted, (c) the start lever is effective, and Do this three times when the start lever is operated. Then, the control means selects at which timing the extracted random numbers are used, and determines the internal winning combination using the selected random numbers.

By providing a plurality of lottery timings, the timing of drawing (acquiring a random number value) for determining the internal state becomes unclear, and it is difficult for the player to aim and acquire the winning random number value. Become. However, it cannot be said that the variety of productions related to games, such as the notification of the internal winning role, is still increasing.

Therefore, in this modified example, by associating the timing for deciding whether to grant the privilege with the effect related to the game, the game in which the effect related to the decision result of the privilege grant including the notification of the internal winning combination is further diversified. The purpose is to provide an opportunity.

<Game lock time lottery table>
FIG. 144 is a game lock time lottery table. This table is provided for each gaming state.

FIG. 144 is a table used when the gaming state is a normal gaming state or a chance zone. In this table, information on the lottery value for determining the game lock time is defined according to the lottery flag B.

Although not shown, a game lock time lottery table is provided individually even when the game state is the normal ART and the game state is the additional zone. In these tables, information on the lottery value for determining the game lock time is defined according to the lottery flag C.

In this modification, the game lock time lottery table is configured so that the game lock time can be determined based on the combination (lottery flag), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the combination (lottery flag) is used. It may be configured so that the game lock time can be randomly determined without being based on it. In this case, the lottery value may be weighted for each game lock time, or the lottery value may be set evenly without weighting.

<Explanation of operation of main control circuit>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 145 to 150, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 93 of the main control circuit 91 by using the program will be described.

(Main operation processing of pachislot under the control of the main CPU)
First, the procedure of the main operation processing (processing after the power is turned on) of the pachi-slot machine 1 performed under the control of the main CPU 93 will be described with reference to the flowcharts (hereinafter referred to as the main flow) shown in FIGS. 145 and 146.

Compared with the main flow (FIG. 74) described in the present embodiment, in this modified example, (1) the medal reception / start check process (S3) is followed by the wait process (S1311) and the game start lock process (S1312). It is added, (2) the reel rotation start process (S11) is executed after the game start lock process (S1312), and (3) the information display process (S1313) is added after the start command generation process (S9). 4) The difference is that the next game game lock time lottery process (S1314) is added after the end state-based control process (S17).

(Wait processing)
Subsequently, the weight processing controlled by the main CPU 93 will be described with reference to FIG. 147.

In the wait process, first, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not 4.1 seconds have passed since the previous unit game (S1331). In this process, the main CPU 93 ends the wait process when it is determined that 4.1 seconds have passed since the previous unit game. On the other hand, when it is determined that 4.1 seconds have not passed since the previous unit game, the main CPU 93 repeats the process of S1331.

(Lock processing at the start of the game)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 148, the game start lock process controlled by the main CPU 93 will be described.

In the game start lock process, the main CPU 93 first determines whether or not the set time of the lock timer has elapsed (S1351). In this process, when it is determined that the set time of the lock timer has elapsed, the main CPU 93 ends the game start lock process. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the set time of the lock timer has not elapsed, the main CPU 93 repeats the process of S1351.

(Information display processing)
Subsequently, the information display process controlled by the main CPU 93 will be described with reference to FIG. 149.

In the information display processing, first, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the gaming state is the normal gaming state or the chance zone (S1371). In this process, when the main CPU 93 determines that the game state is the normal game state or the chance zone, the main CPU 93 shifts the process to S1372. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the gaming state is not the normal gaming state or the chance zone, the main CPU 93 ends the information display process.

In S1372, the main CPU 93 sets a value corresponding to the lottery flag B as the information display data to be displayed on the information display 14, and ends the information display process.

In S1373, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the gaming state is a normal ART. In this process, when the main CPU 93 determines that the gaming state is the normal ART, the main CPU 93 shifts the process to S1374. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the gaming state is not the normal ART, the main CPU 93 ends the information display process.

In S1374, the main CPU 93 sets a value corresponding to the lottery flag C as the information display data to be displayed on the information display 14, and ends the information display process.

In S1375, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the gaming state is an additional zone. In this process, when the main CPU 93 determines that the gaming state is the additional zone, the main CPU 93 shifts the process to S1376. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the gaming state is not in the additional zone, the main CPU 93 ends the information display process.

In S1376, the main CPU 93 sets a value corresponding to the lottery flag C as the information display data to be displayed on the information display 14, and ends the information display process.

(Next game game lock time lottery processing)
Subsequently, the next game game lock time lottery process will be described with reference to FIG. 150.

In the next game game lock time lottery process, the main CPU 93 first determines whether or not the game state is the normal game state or the chance zone (S1391). In this process, when the main CPU 93 determines that the game state is the normal game state or the chance zone, the main CPU 93 shifts the process to S1392. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the gaming state is not the normal gaming state or the chance zone, the main CPU 93 shifts the process to S1397.

In S1392, the main CPU 93 refers to the game lock time lottery table for the normal game state / chance zone (FIG. 144), determines the game lock time according to the lottery flag B, and shifts the process to S1397.

In S1393, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the gaming state is a normal ART. In this process, when the main CPU 93 determines that the gaming state is the normal ART, the main CPU 93 shifts the process to S1394. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the gaming state is not the normal ART, the main CPU 93 shifts the process to S1395.

In S1394, the main CPU 93 usually refers to the ART game lock time lottery table (not shown), determines the game lock time according to the lottery flag C, and shifts the process to S1397.

In S1395, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the gaming state is an additional zone. In this process, when the main CPU 93 determines that the gaming state is the additional zone, the main CPU 93 shifts the process to S1396. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the gaming state is not in the additional zone, the main CPU 93 shifts the process to S1397.

In S1396, the main CPU 93 refers to the game lock time lottery table for the additional zone (not shown), determines the game lock time according to the lottery flag C, and shifts the process to S1397.

In S1397, the main CPU 93 sets the lock timer at the game lock time determined by any of the processes S1392, S1394, and S1396, and ends the next game game lock time lottery process.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 described in this modification, the main CPU 93 is different from the case where the start lever 23 is operated, and further, wait processing (S1311 in FIG. 145) and lock processing at the start of the game (S1312 in FIG. 145). ) And the reel rotation start process (S11 in FIG. 145), and then the internal lottery process (S4 in FIG. 145) is executed.

When the timing at which the start lever 23 is operated is a timing before reaching a predetermined time from the timing at which the variable display of the symbol in the symbol display area 4 is started in the unit game before one unit game, the main The internal lottery process by the CPU 93 has not yet been executed. Therefore, it is not possible to notify the internal lottery result on the information display 14. On the other hand, when the timing at which the start lever 23 is operated is the timing after reaching the predetermined time, the internal lottery process by the main CPU 93 is executed. Therefore, the main CPU 93 can execute the notification of the internal lottery result (S1373, S1375, S1377 in FIG. 149) on the information display 14.

For the player, the internal lottery result determined at approximately the same time as the timing of operating the start lever 23 by waiting without operating the start lever 23 until the predetermined time elapses. The pattern of immediately receiving the notification of the above, and the start lever 23 is operated before the predetermined time elapses, and after the start lever 23 is operated, the internal lottery result is waited until the predetermined time elapses. It is possible to receive the playability of two patterns with the pattern that receives the notification of the above in a pseudo manner by the operation of the main control circuit 91.

According to such a pachi-slot machine 1, it is possible for the player to decide whether to wait without operating the start lever 23 or not until the predetermined time elapses, thereby. , A pattern in which the result of the decision by the privilege granting determination means is immediately notified, and a pattern in which the result of the determination by the privilege granting determination means is notified after the start operation is performed and a predetermined time elapses. Can be changed. Therefore, by associating the timing at which the main CPU 93 executes the internal lottery process with the timing at which the effect related to the game is executed, the operation of the main control circuit 91 further diversifies the effect related to the game including the notification of the internal lottery result. It is possible to provide a game machine that has been made.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 described in the present modification, the main CPU 93 determines the game lock time, and the predetermined time can be set to be longer or shorter (FIG. 144). Therefore, although I thought that I had waited until the above-mentioned predetermined time had passed, I did not actually wait, and I could not receive the notification of the internal lottery result immediately, or the above-mentioned predetermined time had passed. I couldn't wait and thought that the above-mentioned predetermined time had not actually passed, but in reality, I was waiting until the above-mentioned predetermined time had passed, and it was decided at about the same time as the timing to operate the start lever 23. It is possible that the notification of the internal winning combination that has been made can be received immediately. Therefore, it is possible to add more diversity to the game.

Further, even for an effect different from the notification of the internal lottery result on the information display 14, it is possible to provide an effect for a relatively long time or an effect for a relatively short time, so that the contents of the effect are also diverse. become.

[Modification example 8: Change in additional batting order]
So far, various measures have been taken to notify the number of additional games. However, at present, it is difficult to frequently notify the number of unit games that is far away from the number actually determined as the number of additional games as the number of additional games for notification, and the notification of the number of additional games is still improved. There is room for.

For example, the number of unit games larger than the actual number of additional games can be notified as the number of additional games for notification, and the difference between the actual number of additional games and the number of additional games for notification is reduced as the game progresses. A gaming machine that can be suppressed may be provided.

<Additional lottery number determination table in this modification>
FIG. 151 is a diagram showing an example of an additional lottery number determination table in this modification. This table corresponds to a modified example of the additional lottery number determination table shown in FIG. 37.

In the present embodiment, when the lottery flag C is "2" (pushing order bell), the additional lottery number is determined to be "0" (see the additional lottery number determination table in FIG. 37). In this case, the lottery that normally refers to the additional zone lottery table (FIG. 38) during ART is "non-winning". Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the lottery flag C is "2" (push order bell), the number of ART games is not added.

On the other hand, in this modification, when the lottery flag C is "2" (push order bell), the additional lottery number is determined to be "7" (see FIG. 151). In this case, in the lottery that normally refers to the additional zone lottery table (FIG. 38) during ART, the number of games of ART may be added.

This modification is different from the present embodiment in that when the lottery flag C is "2" (pushing order bell), there is a possibility of winning in addition to the number of ART games.

<Number determination table for lottery of additional games during ART in this modified example>
FIG. 152 is a diagram showing an example of a number determination table for drawing the number of additional games during ART in this modification. This table corresponds to a modified example of the additional lottery number determination table shown in FIG. 39.

In the present embodiment, when the lottery flag C is "2" (pushing order bell), the additional lottery number is determined to be "0" (see the additional lottery number determination table in FIG. 37). In this case, it is "0G" in the lottery that refers to the number determination table (FIG. 40) for the number of additional games added during ART. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the lottery flag C is "2" (push order bell), the number of ART games is not added.

On the other hand, in this modification, when the lottery flag C is "2" (push order bell), the additional lottery number is determined to be "7" (see FIG. 152). In this case, in the lottery that refers to the number determination table for the number of additional games during ART (FIG. 40), the period of ART may be the addition of 20 games, 30 games, 50 games, or 100 games.

This modification is different from the present embodiment in that when the lottery flag C is "2" (pushing order bell), there is a possibility of winning in addition to the number of ART games.

<Additional game number notification determination table in this modified example>
FIG. 153 is an additional game number notification determination table in this modified example. This table is referred to when the game state is the additional zone, the lottery flag C is "2" (pushing order bell), and the number of additional games is 30 or more.

In this modification, when the game state is the additional zone, the lottery flag C is "2" (pushing order bell), and the number of additional games is 30 or more, the sub CPU 103 refers to the liquid crystal display device 11 with respect to the liquid crystal display device 11. The left region 11L, the middle region 11C, and the right region 11R are displayed (see the upper diagram of FIG. 156). The numbers displayed in the left area 11L, the middle area 11C, and the right area 11R correspond to three-digit values suggesting the number of additional games. The left area 11L corresponds to the 100th place of the number of additional games, the middle area 11C corresponds to the 10th place of the number of additional games, and the right area 11R corresponds to the 1st place of the number of additional games.

As shown in (1) of FIG. 153, as an initial display, "0" is displayed in the left area 11L, "3" is displayed in the middle area 11C, and "1" is displayed in the right area 11R. To. This suggests that the number of additional games is 30 games.

Here, the sub CPU 103 causes the liquid crystal display device 11 to display the left region 11L, the middle region 11C, the right region 11R, and another region 11D (see the upper diagram of FIG. 156). The numbers displayed in the separate area 11D correspond to numbers for replacing any of the numbers displayed in the left area 11L, the middle area 11C, and the right area 11R.

The table of (2) of FIG. 153 defines information for determining the replacement mode of the numbers displayed in the separate area 11D according to the specific mode of the push order bell.

In this modification, "1" is displayed in the separate area 11D as the initial display. If the internal winning combination is "F_push-order bell 1-11st" or "F_push-order bell 1-11st", that is, if the first stop operation is the left stop button 19L and the push order is correct, it is displayed in another area 11D. The number "1" is replaced with the number "0" in the left region 11L. In this case, the numbers in the left region 11L, the middle region 11C, and the right region 11R are replaced with "1", "3", and "0" from "0", "3", and "0", respectively. This corresponds to an effect indicating that the number of additional games has increased from 30 games to 130 games.

If the internal winning combination is "F_push-order bell 2_1st" or "F_push-order bell 2_1st", that is, if the first stop operation is the middle stop button 19C and the push order is correct, it is displayed in another area 11D. The number "1" is replaced with the number "3" in the middle region 11c. In this case, the numbers in the left region 11L, the middle region 11C, and the right region 11R are replaced with "0", "1", and "0" from "0", "3", and "0", respectively. This corresponds to an effect indicating that the number of additional games has been reduced from 30 games to 10 games.

If the internal winning combination is "F_push-order bell 3_1st" or "F_push-order bell 3_1st", that is, if the first stop operation is the right stop button 19R and the push order is correct, it is displayed in another area 11D. The number "1" is replaced with the number "0" in the right region 11R. In this case, the numbers in the left region 11L, the middle region 11C, and the right region 11R are replaced with "0", "3", and "1" from "0", "3", and "0", respectively. This corresponds to an effect indicating that the number of additional games has increased from 30 games to 31 games.

<Relationship between the initial display and the expected value of the number of additional games>
FIG. 154 is a diagram showing the relationship between the initial display and the expected value of the number of additional games.

In this modification, when one of the push order combinations is determined as the internal winning combination following the determination of the period of the number of additional games, the effective line is on the effective line in the first stop operation among the plurality of areas 11L, 11C, 11R. The numbers displayed in the display areas 11L, 11C, 11R corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R provided corresponding to the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R for stopping the combination of predetermined symbols are displayed in another area 11D. It is characterized in that it is replaced with a predetermined number displayed by.

For example, in the first stop operation, the regions 11L, 11C, 11R corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R provided corresponding to the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R for stopping the combination of predetermined symbols on the effective line. Is an area 11L, 11C, 11R that displays a number corresponding to a digit larger than the initial value of the notification addition period, and corresponds to a digit larger than the initial value of the notification addition period. It is possible that the numbers will be replaced by numbers that are larger than the numbers that were originally displayed. Therefore, the player can have the expectation that the addition period may be significantly extended when the push order combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and in fact, in the areas 11L, 11C, 11R. By changing the notification mode of, it is possible to get the impression that the addition period has been greatly extended, and the interest of the game is enhanced.

In addition, it is preferable to prevent the number of additional games for notification from becoming significantly larger than the actual number of additional games.

FIG. 155 is a diagram showing the relationship between the initial display for preventing the number of additional games for notification from becoming significantly larger than the actual number of additional games and the expected value of the number of additional games.

As an example, as shown in FIG. 153, a case where the number of additional games is 30 or more will be described. In this case, as the initial display, "0", "3", and "0" are displayed in the left region 11L, the middle region 11C, and the right region 11R, respectively.

When the number displayed in the separate area 11D is "1", when the number in the left area 11L is replaced, the display mode of the number of additional games changes from "030" to "130". Similarly, when the number in the middle area 11C is replaced, the display mode of the number of additional games changes from "030" to "010", and when the number in the right area 11R is replaced, the display mode of the number of additional games is changed to "030". It changes from "030" to "031".

In this case, the expected value of the amount of change (increase / decrease) in the display mode by the left region 11L, the middle region 11C, and the right region 11R is 100 × 1/3 + (-20) × 1/3 + 1 × 1/3 = about 27. Yes, it is smaller than the actual increase amount of "30". Therefore, even if the numbers (number of additional games) displayed by the left area 11L, the middle area 11C, and the right area 11R increase significantly from "030" to "130", as the game progresses, it becomes the actual number of additional games. It is possible to prevent a large deviation from the number of additional games for notification.

FIG. 154 shows the expected value for each of the actual number of additional games. When the actual number of additional games is 10 games or more or 20 games or more and less than 30 games, it is expected in any display mode in the left area 11L, the middle area 11C, the right area 11R and the other area 11D. Deviation from the value can occur. Therefore, it shows the expected value. It is not preferable to apply this modification when the actual number of additional games is 10 games or more or 20 games or more and less than 30 games.

When the actual number of additional games is 30 or more, "0", "3", and "0" are displayed in the left area 11L, the middle area 11C, and the right area 11R, respectively, and "1" is displayed in another area 11D. can do.

When the actual number of additional games is 40 or more, "0", "4", and "0" are displayed in the left area 11L, the middle area 11C, and the right area 11R, respectively, and "1" is displayed in another area 11D. can do.

When the actual number of additional games is 50 or more, "0", "5", and "0" are displayed in the left area 11L, the middle area 11C, and the right area 11R, respectively, and "1" is displayed in another area 11D. can do.

When the actual number of additional games is 60 or more, "0", "6", and "0" are displayed in the left area 11L, the middle area 11C, and the right area 11R, respectively, and "1" or "1" or "0" is displayed in another area 11D. 2 ”can be displayed.

When the actual number of additional games is 70 or more, "0", "7", and "0" are displayed in the left area 11L, the middle area 11C, and the right area 11R, respectively, and "1" or "1" or "0" is displayed in another area 11D. 2 ”can be displayed.

When the actual number of additional games is 80 or more, "0", "8", and "0" are displayed in the left area 11L, the middle area 11C, and the right area 11R, respectively, and "1" or "1" or "0" is displayed in another area 11D. 2 ”can be displayed.

When the actual number of additional games is 90 or more, "0", "9", and "0" are displayed in the left area 11L, the middle area 11C, and the right area 11R, respectively, and "1" to "0" are displayed in another area 11D. It can be displayed as any of "3".

In this modification, referring to the table shown in FIG. 154, the sub CPU 102 notifies the period equal to or less than the actual number of additional games determined by the main CPU 93 on the liquid crystal display device 11 or the like as the initial value of the additional period for notification. It is preferable to determine as (the numerical value of the initial display). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the number of additional games for notification from becoming significantly larger than the actual number of additional games.

<Explanation of operation of sub-control circuit>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 155 and 156, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101 using the program will be described.

(Main board communication task)
FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the main board communication task in the present modification 8.

Compared with the main board communication task (FIG. 100) described in the present embodiment, the present modification 7 is different in that the mode of processing at the time of receiving the start command is specifically described (S1311, S1312).

(Processing when a start command is received)
FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing a start command reception process executed by the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state is in the additional zone (S1331). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state is in the additional zone, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S1332. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state is not in the additional zone, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S1334.

In S1332, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of additional games is 30 or more. When the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of additional games is 30 or more, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S1333. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of additional games is not 30 games or more, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S1334.

In S1333, the sub CPU 102 refers to the additional game number notification determination table (FIG. 153), and registers the effect data of the initial display and the replacement display according to the internal winning combination.

Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 executes another process at the time of receiving the start command (S1334), and ends the process at the time of receiving the start command.

<Example of production in the additional zone related to this modified example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 157, an example of the effect in the additional zone in this modified example will be described.

The main CPU 93 determines whether to execute ART. Then, the main CPU 93 includes an additional lottery number determination table (FIG. 151), a normal ART middle addition zone lottery table (FIG. 38), an ART middle addition game number lottery number table (FIG. 152), and an additional game number lottery table (FIG. 152). With reference to FIG. 40) and the like, an additional period indicating the degree of extension of the period in which ART is granted is determined (S215 to S218 in FIG. 64). Then, the sub CPU 102 refers to the additional game number notification determination table (FIG. 153), and determines the initial value of the notification additional period to be notified by the liquid crystal display device 11 or the like based on the additional period determined by the main CPU 93 (FIG. 153). S1333 in FIG. 156).

FIG. 157 shows a display example on the liquid crystal display device 11 at that time. The upper part is a display example when the start lever 23 is operated. When the addition period is determined, a plurality of display areas (left area 11L, middle area 11C, and right area 11R) capable of displaying numbers corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R in the liquid crystal display device 11 and the like are determined. ) Displays initial values (for example, “0”, “3”, “0” in the order of the left region 11L, the middle region 11C, and the right region 11R) determined by the sub CPU 102. Then, in a separate display area (separate area 11D) capable of displaying numbers separately from the display area (left area 11L, middle area 11C and right area 11R), a plurality of display areas (left area 11L, middle area 11C and right) are displayed. Area 11R), the number displayed in the display area (left area 11L) that displays the number corresponding to the digit (third digit) larger than the number of digits (2 digits) of the initial value "30" for the additional period for notification. Displayed in the display area (middle area 11C) that is larger than ("0") and displays a number corresponding to the same digit (second digit) as the number of digits (2 digits) of the initial value "30" for the additional period for notification. A number ("1") smaller than the number ("3") to be displayed is displayed.

Then, following the determination of the addition period by the main CPU 93, when the main CPU 93 determines "2" (push order bell) as the internal winning combination as the lottery flag C, the first stop operation among the plurality of display areas is performed. 19L, 19C stop buttons for stopping the combination of symbols corresponding to the case of the correct answer of the push order bell on the effective line (the combination of symbols corresponding to the "bell" in the symbol combination table (FIGS. 10 to 12)). , The numbers displayed in the display areas 11L, 11C, 11R corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R provided corresponding to 19R are replaced with the numbers displayed in another area 11D.

FIG. 157 (A) corresponds to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R provided corresponding to the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R for stopping the combination of predetermined symbols on the effective line in the first stop operation. An example is shown in the case where the display area is a display area (left area 11L) for displaying a number corresponding to a digit (third digit) larger than the number of digits (2 digits) of the initial value of the additional period for notification. In this case, the liquid crystal display device 11 displays "press left" and a number corresponding to a digit larger than the initial value of the additional period for notification ("0"). ) Is replaced with a number larger than ("1"). Therefore, the player can have the expectation that the additional period may be significantly extended when the push order combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and in fact, the notification mode by the notification means can be changed. By changing, you can get the impression that the addition period has been greatly extended, and the fun of the game will increase.

On the other hand, FIG. 157 (B) shows reels 3L, 3C, 3R provided corresponding to the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R for stopping the combination of predetermined symbols on the effective line in the first stop operation. An example is shown in the case where the display area corresponding to is a display area (middle area 11C) for displaying a number corresponding to the same number of digits (second digit) as the initial value of the notification addition period (two digits). .. In this case, the liquid crystal display device 11 originally displayed a number (“3”) corresponding to the same number of digits as the initial value of the additional period for notification, along with the display “Press inside”. It is replaced with a number smaller than the number ("1"). Therefore, as the game progresses, the discrepancy between the actual number of additional games and the number of additional games for notification can be suppressed to a low level.

In addition, in the liquid crystal display device 11, the effect of extending the addition period is performed by changing a number corresponding to a digit larger than the initial value of the notification addition period, so that the player can extend the addition period. I get the impression that it has extended significantly. On the other hand, in the liquid crystal display device 11, the effect of shortening the addition period is performed by changing the number corresponding to the same number of digits as the initial value of the notification addition period, so that the player can use the addition period. Compared to the extension of, the impression is that it is small compared to the degree of decrease in the additional period.

Note that FIG. 157 (C) shows reels 3L, 3C, 3R provided corresponding to the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R for stopping the combination of predetermined symbols on the effective line in the first stop operation. An example is shown in the case where the corresponding display area is a display area (right area 11C) for displaying a number corresponding to a digit (first digit) smaller than the number of digits (2 digits) of the initial value of the additional period for notification. .. In this case, the number corresponding to a digit smaller than the initial value of the additional period for notification is originally displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 together with the display "Press right" ("0"). ) Is replaced with a number larger than ("1"). Then, the liquid crystal display device 11 displays "Tohoho. It was only one game."

[Transformation example 9: Status confirmation function]
When the game store closes, if the game status stored inside is not updated and is left unchanged, the game status at that stage will be carried over to the next business day. For example, the game situation stored inside is advantageous for the player, such as between so-called bonus flags, during the omen, during the chance zone entry, and with a high probability that it is easy to win a specific internal winning role. , It will give a favorable situation to the player who plays immediately after the opening of the store on the next business day. For amusement stores, we would like to avoid the appearance of many players who enjoy the above-mentioned advantageous situations in terms of store management.

When the pachislot machine 1 recovers from a power failure for a predetermined time or longer (for example, when the game store is opened) in order to prevent the game information (number of digested games, etc.) from being deferred when the game store is opened. It has been proposed that the same initialization process as that performed when the setting change command is received is automatically performed when the power is turned on.

However, considering the operation of the store, it is desired to give the player the merit of playing the game immediately after the store opens and to operate the store with a high occupancy rate immediately after the store opens. In that sense, it is preferable to leave a manual element that allows the game store to select a game machine to be initialized and a game machine not to be initialized, instead of initializing all the game machines uniformly.

That said, the initialization process is a heavy burden for the staff of the amusement store, and it is desirable to reduce the burden on the initialization process as much as possible.

Therefore, when a specific operation including the operation of the door key provided on the door that can be opened and closed is performed, it is easy to win the internal winning role for a specific internal winning role, such as between bonus flags, during the omen, during the chance zone entry, etc. When the game information is not the initial value, a notification means for notifying that fact may be provided.

<Explanation of operation of main control circuit>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 158 to 160, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 93 of the main control circuit 91 by using the program will be described.

(Initialization process when the power is turned on)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 158, the initialization process at the time of turning on the power in this modified example will be described. This process corresponds to S1 in FIG. 74.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the backup is normal (S1411). In this determination process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the backup is normal by performing error detection using the checksum value.

For example, when the power is turned off, the set value of the pachislot machine 1 (the value set for one of the six predetermined ball output rates) and the checksum value calculated from the set value are the predetermined areas of the main RAM 95 as backup data. It is stored in. In the process of S1411, the main CPU 93 reads out the set value and the checksum value stored in the main RAM 95. Next, the main CPU 93 compares the checksum value calculated from the read set value with the backed up checksum value. Then, if the sum values of both are the same, the main CPU 93 determines that the backup is normal.

In S1411, when the main CPU 93 determines that the backup is not normal (when the determination in S1411 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S1413 described later. On the other hand, in S1411, when the main CPU 93 determines that the backup is normal (when the determination in S1411 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets the backed up set value in a predetermined area in the main RAM 95 (S1412). As a result, if the backup is normal, the set value before the power is turned off is set in the main RAM 95.

After the processing of S1412 or when the determination in S1411 is NO, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the setting change switch (not shown) is in the ON state (S1413). In S1413, when the main CPU 93 determines that the setting change switch is not in the ON state (when the determination in S1413 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S1418 described later.

On the other hand, in S1413, when the main CPU 93 determines that the setting change switch is in the ON state (when the determination in S1413 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs a predetermined initialization process at the time of setting change (S1414). In this process, the main CPU 93 clears, for example, the data stored in the internal winning combination storage area and the display combination storage area of the main RAM 95, and also clears the set value.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs an initialization command generation / storage process (S1415). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates data for an initialization command to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 101, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. Further, the initialization command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by the command data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 76. The initialization command data includes whether or not the set value has been changed, set value information, and the like.

After the process of S1415, the main CPU 93 executes the set value change process (S1416). In this process, the main CPU 93 selects a set value from predetermined 1 to 6 according to the operation result of the reset switch, and sets a value based on the operation result of the start lever 23 operated thereafter. To confirm.

After the process of S1416, the main CPU 93 turns off the setting change switch (S1417), and ends the initialization process at the time of turning on the power.

In S1418, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the backup is normal (S1418). In S1418, when the main CPU 93 determines that the backup is normal (when the determination in S1418 is YES), the main CPU 93 restores the set value to the state before the power failure based on the backup data (S1419). Then, after the processing of S1419, the main CPU 93 ends the power-on processing.

On the other hand, in S1418, when the main CPU 93 determines that the backup is not normal (when the determination in S1418 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs power-on error processing (S1420). In this process, the main CPU 93 displays that the backup is not normal by displaying an error or the like.

In this modified example, the error (backup error) that occurs when the backup is not normal is canceled by a new setting change or the like.

(Medal reception / start check processing)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 159, the medal acceptance / start check process in this modified example will be described. This process corresponds to S3 in FIG. 74.

Comparing the medal reception / start check process in this modification with the medal reception / start check process described with reference to FIG. 123, in the medal reception / start check process in this modification, the specific operation detection process is performed after the process in S1015. (S1431) is executed.

(Specific operation detection processing)
Subsequently, the specific operation detection process in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 160.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a specific operation has been performed (S1451). In this modification, the specific operation will be described as an operation of twisting the door key while pressing the MAX bet button 21, but the present invention is not limited to this. The specific operation may be any operation as long as it includes an operation that the player cannot touch (an operation of twisting the door key). Further, instead of pressing the MAX bet button 21, an operation of pressing the operation button 22 (corresponding to the effect button), an operation of the start lever 23, and the like may be performed.

When it is determined that the specific operation has been performed, the main CPU 93 executes the specific operation command generation / storage process (S1452), and ends the specific operation detection process. When it is determined that the specific operation has not been performed, the main CPU 93 ends the specific operation detection process.

<Explanation of operation of sub-control circuit>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 161 and 162, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101 using the program will be described.

(Main board communication task)
FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing the main board communication task in the present modification 9.

Compared with the main board communication task (FIG. 100) described in the present embodiment, the present modification 9 is different in that the mode of processing at the time of receiving a specific operation command is specifically described (S1471 to S1473). ..

(Processing when receiving a specific operation command)
FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing a process at the time of receiving a specific operation command executed by the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state is any of the chance zone, the ART gaming state, and the bonus state (S1491). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the game state is any of the chance zone, the ART game state, and the bonus state, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S1494. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the game state is not any of the chance zone, the ART game state, and the bonus state, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S1492.

In S1492, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the table mode is either high-speed short or high-speed long. When the sub CPU 102 determines that the table mode is either high-speed short or high-speed long, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S1494. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the table mode is neither high-speed short nor high-speed long, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S1493.

In S1493, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the back mode is one of small lottery, during lottery, large lottery, and special. When the sub CPU 102 determines that the back mode is any of small lottery, lottery, large lottery, and special, the process shifts to S1494. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the back mode is not any of small lottery, lottery, large lottery, and special, the sub CPU 102 ends the process at the time of receiving the specific operation command.

In S1494, the sub CPU 102 registers the setting change suggestion effect data and ends the processing at the time of receiving the specific operation command.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 described in this modification, when a specific operation (an operation of twisting the door key while pressing the MAX bet button 21) is performed in the liquid crystal display device 11, the speaker groups 65L, 65R, etc., predetermined game information is obtained. When it is not the initial value (when the game state is any of the chance zone, ART game state, and bonus state, when the front mode is either high-speed short or high-speed long, or when the back mode is lottery small or during lottery, When the lottery is large or special), the notification according to the setting change suggestion effect data is executed.

The specific operation includes an operation of a door key provided on a door that can be opened and closed. Since the player cannot operate the door key, the player cannot perform the above-mentioned specific operation and receive the notification according to the setting change suggestion effect data. This can prevent a particular player from gaining an advantage.

In addition, the clerk of the game store basically changes the set value of the pachi-slot machine 1 that has been notified by the liquid crystal display device 11 or the speaker groups 65L, 65R, etc., and the game information stored in the main RAM 95. It suffices to initialize the above and set it to the initial value, and since it is not necessary to initialize the game information for all the pachislot machines 1, the burden of the above initialization can be reduced.

In addition, instead of uniformly initializing the game information for all the pachislot machines 1 notified by the liquid crystal display device 11, the speaker groups 65L, 65R, etc., the pachislot machine 1 that initializes and the pachislot machine that does not initialize There is a manual element that allows the game store to select the machine 1 and the machine 1. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the merit of playing the game immediately after the store opens, and it is possible to increase the occupancy rate of the store immediately after the store opens.

[Modification example 10: Initial ART game number hiding function]
So far, various measures have been taken to notify the number of additional games of ART. For example, in the ART mode, there is a production method in which the number of additional games is notified for each additional opportunity of the number of games, and the number of additional games is not notified for each additional opportunity of the number of games, but collectively at the end of the ART mode. It has been proposed to provide an effect method for notifying and allow the player to arbitrarily select these effect methods.

Further, for example, in a unit game in a special game state, whether or not to execute a privilege granting effect that grants a privilege when the timing of the stop operation for the variable display of the symbol in the display column is within the corresponding predetermined time range. When the number of bonus-giving effect determining means that can determine the predetermined number of additional unit games of the notification game as a privilege and the predetermined number of additional unit games determined by the privilege-giving effect determining means are less than or equal to the specified number of additional unit games. In some cases, the specific information suggesting the predetermined number of additional unit games is not notified, and when the predetermined number of additional unit games is larger than the specified number of additional unit games, the predetermined number of additional unit games is suggested. A game machine including a means for executing an addition number suggestion effect for notifying specific information has been proposed.

However, if the "specified number of additional unit games", which is the standard for notification by the addition number suggestion effect execution means, is large, the notification by the addition number suggestion effect execution means is rarely performed, so that the interest of the game is not necessarily enhanced. I can't say. On the other hand, in order to increase the frequency of notification by the addition number suggestion effect execution means, if the "specified number of additional unit games" that is the standard of notification by the addition number suggestion effect execution means is reduced, the notification by the addition number suggestion effect execution means is made. The value of the game is reduced, and this also cannot be said to enhance the interest of the game. Therefore, after increasing the "specified number of additional unit games" that is the standard for notification by the addition number suggestion effect execution means, it is still possible to perform notification by the addition number suggestion effect execution means at a high frequency. Is required to be provided.

In order to solve this problem, for the first addition period determination section, the addition period determined by the addition determination means is added as the privilege state period and stored in the period storage means, while the notification means is used as the addition period. , The period shorter than the addition period determined by the addition determination means is notified, and the period notified as the addition period by the notification means is subtracted from the addition period actually determined by the addition period determination means to the non-notification period storage means. The difference may be stored as an unreported additional period.

Then, for the second and subsequent addition period determination sections, the addition period determined by the addition determination means is added as the privilege state period and stored in the period storage means, while it is determined by the addition determination means in a predetermined case. The added period may not be notified by the notification means, but may be stored in the non-notification period storage means as the unnotification addition period.

In this case, the notification means notifies that a predetermined period has been added to the privilege state period when the unnotification addition period stored in the non-notification period storage means reaches a predetermined period.

Hereinafter, specific aspects of this modification will be described in more detail.

<Flow of the game in the additional zone 3 in this modified example>
The flow of the game in the additional zone 3 in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 163.

In this modified example, when the additional zone 3 discloses, it will be described as assuming that "50" is usually added as the number of additional games of ART.

Further, the number of additional games will be described as being determined by lottery according to the lottery flag C.

Others are the same as the additional zone 3 described in the present embodiment.

<An example of the flow of notification of the number of additional games in this modified example>
Further, with reference to FIG. 163, an example of the flow of notification of the number of additional games in this modified example will be described.

(At the start of the first additional zone 3)
First, when the first addition zone 3 is started, it is notified that 50 games have been added to the normal ART regardless of the result of the lottery.

The number of additional games exceeding 50 games is hidden without notification.

(Continuing the first additional zone 3)
As for the continuation of the first addition zone 3, even if the number of games of ART is usually added, the number of games added is not notified. The fact that the number of games has been added is hidden.

(During normal ART after that)
When the number of games is added during the normal ART after that, the number of games added is notified.

(Additional zones 1 to 3 after the second time)
When the second and subsequent addition zones 1 to 3 are executed, the number of added games is not notified even if the number of games of the normal ART is added. The fact that the number of games has been added is hidden.

(Notification that 100 games have been added)
Through these, when the total number of hidden additional games reaches 100 games, it is collectively notified that 100 games have been added to the normal ART.

According to such a pachislot machine 1, at least at the first time when the addition of ART is determined, the number of additional games exceeding 50 games can be reliably stored as an unreported addition period. Therefore, even if the number of additional games used as the reference for notification is set to a relatively large number (“100” in this modified example), the unannounced additional period is surely stored at the first time when the addition of ART is determined. Compared to the conventional pachislot machine 1, which cannot be said to be, the frequency of unreported addition period of 100 games increases. As a result, even if the number of additional games used as the reference for notification is set to a relatively large number (“100” in this modified example), it is possible to frequently notify that ART has been added 100 games. It is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

<Explanation of operation of main control circuit>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 164 and 165, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 93 of the main control circuit 91 by using the program will be described.

(Additional zone 3 processing)
First, the additional zone 3 processing in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 164. This process corresponds to FIG. 88.

Comparing the additional zone 3 processing in the present modification with the additional zone 3 processing described with reference to FIG. 88, in the additional zone 3 processing in the present modification, the main CPU 93 performs the processing of S1511 to S1513 prior to the processing of S291. It differs in that it is executed. Hereinafter, the processes of S1511 to S1513 will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the additional zone 3 activated flag is off (S1511). When the main CPU 93 determines that the additional zone 3 activated flag is off, the main CPU 93 shifts the process to S1512. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the additional zone 3 activated flag is not off (on), the main CPU 93 shifts the process to S291.

In S1512, the main CPU 93 adds "50" as the number of ART games. Subsequently, the main CPU 93 turns on the additional zone 3 activated flag (S1513), and shifts the processing to S291.

The processing after S291 is the same as that described with reference to FIG. 88 in this embodiment.

(RT operation check process)
First, the RT operation check process in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 165. This process corresponds to FIG. 94.

Comparing the RT operation check process in this modification with the RT operation check process described with reference to FIG. 94, in the RT operation check process in this modification, the main CPU 93 adds the zone 3 already activated flag after the process of S423. It differs in that the process of turning it off (S1531) is executed.

<Explanation of operation of sub-control circuit>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 166 to 171, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101 by using the program will be described.

(Main board communication task)
FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing the main board communication task in the present modification 10.

Compared with the main board communication task (FIG. 100) described in the present embodiment, in the present modification 10, the mode of processing at the time of receiving the start command and the mode of processing at the time of receiving the unit game end command are concrete. It differs in that it is described in (S1551 to S1554).

(Processing when a start command is received)
FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing a start command reception process executed by the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state is the ART gaming state (S1571). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state is the ART gaming state, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S1572. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state is not the ART gaming state, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S1573.

In S1572, the sub CPU 102 executes the ART in-process (sub) described with reference to FIG. 168, and shifts the process to S1573.

In S1573, the sub CPU 102 executes another process at the time of receiving the start command, and ends the process at the time of receiving the start command.

(Processing during ART (sub))
FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing a process (sub) during ART executed by the sub CPU 102.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state is normally in ART (S1591). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the game state is in the normal ART, the sub CPU 102 executes the normal ART process (sub) (S1592), and shifts the process to S1597.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the gaming state is not in the normal ART, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state is in the additional zones 1 and 2 (S1593). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state is in the additional zones 1 and 2, the sub CPU 102 executes the additional zones 1 and 2 processing (sub) described later with reference to FIG. 169 (S1594), and shifts the processing to S1595. ..

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state is not in the addition zones 1 and 2, it determines whether or not the gaming state is in the addition zone 3 (S1595). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state is in the additional zone 3, the sub CPU 102 executes the additional zone 3 process (sub) described later with reference to FIG. 170 (S1596), and shifts the process to S1597.

In S1597, the sub CPU 102 executes other processing and ends the processing (sub) during ART.

(Additional zones 1 and 2 processing (sub))
FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing the additional zones 1 and 2 processing (sub) executed by the sub CPU 102.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of games has been added (S1611). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of games has been added, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S1612. When the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of games has not been added, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S1619.

In S1612, the sub CPU 102 adds the number of the lottered additional games to the ART game number counter. Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the additional game number special notification flag is on (S1613). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional game number special notification flag is on, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S1614. When the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional game number special notification flag is not on (off), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S1618.

In S1614, the sub CPU 102 adds the lottered number of additional games to the ART game number unreported counter. Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the ART game number unreported counter is 100 or more (S1615). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the ART game number unannounced counter is 100 or more, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S1616. When the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the ART game number unannounced counter is not 100 or more (99 or less), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S1619.

In S1616, the sub CPU 102 registers the additional game number special notification effect data. Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 subtracts "100" from the ART game number unreported counter (S1617), and shifts the processing to S1619.

In S1618, the sub CPU 102 registers the notification effect data of the number of additional games drawn. Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 executes other processing (S1619), and ends the addition zones 1 and 2 processing (sub).

(Additional zone 3 processing (sub))
FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing an additional zone 3 process (sub) executed by the sub CPU 102.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the additional game number special notification flag is off (S1631). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional game number special notification flag is off, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S1632. When the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional game number special notification flag is not off (on), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S1635.

In S1632, the sub CPU 102 adds "50" to the ART game number counter. Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 turns on the additional game number special notification flag (S1633). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 registers the notification effect data of 50 games added (S1634).

Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the winning is added to the number of games (S1635). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of games has been added, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S1636. When the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of games has not been added, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S1641.

In S1636, the sub CPU 102 adds the number of the lottered additional games to the ART game number counter. Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 adds the number of the lottered additional games to the ART game number unreported counter (S1637).

Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the ART game number unreported counter is 100 or more (S1638). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the ART game number unannounced counter is 100 or more, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S1639. When the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the ART game number unannounced counter is not 100 or more (99 or less), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S1641.

In S1639, the sub CPU 102 registers the additional game number special notification effect data. Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 subtracts "100" from the ART game number unreported counter (S1640), and shifts the processing to S1641.

Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 executes other processing (S1641), and ends the additional zone 3 processing (sub).

(Processing when receiving a unit game end command)
FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing a processing at the time of receiving a unit game end command executed by the sub CPU 102.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the ART has ended (S1651). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART has ended, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S1652. When the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART has not ended, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S1656.

In S1652, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the additional game number special notification flag is on. When the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional game number special notification flag is on, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S1653. When the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional game number special notification flag is not on (off), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S1655.

In S1653, the sub CPU 102 clears the ART game number unreported counter. Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 turns off the additional game number special notification flag (S1654).

Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 clears the ART game number unreported counter. Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 turns off the additional game number special notification flag (S1654).

Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 executes the ART end processing (sub) (S1655). Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 executes another process at the time of receiving the unit game end command (S1656), and ends the process at the time of receiving the unit game end command.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 described in this modification, the main CPU 93 determines whether to grant ART, and if determined, can shift to an ART gaming state in which ART can be granted. Then, in the ART gaming state, an additional period indicating the degree of extension of the ART period is determined, and when determined, additional zones 1 to 3 for extending the ART period are provided.

Here, for the first addition zone 3, the addition period determined by the main CPU 93 (the "50" game added by the processing of S1512 in FIG. 164 and the number of addition games determined by the lottery of S291) is added. While being added as a number and stored in the ART game number counter provided in the sub RAM 103, the liquid crystal display device 11 and the like have an additional period of 50 games, which is shorter than the additional period determined by the main CPU 93. An effect is executed according to the additional notification effect data (S1634 in FIG. 170), and the ART game number unannounced counter provided in the sub RAM 103 is displayed by the liquid crystal display device 11 from the addition period actually determined by the main CPU 93. The difference obtained by subtracting the period notified as the additional period (“50 games” in this modification) is stored as the unannounced additional period.

For the second and subsequent additional zones, regardless of the type of additional zone, the additional period determined by the main CPU 93 is added and stored in the ART game number counter provided in the sub RAM 103, while the number of additional games is stored. When the special notification flag is on, the additional period determined by the main CPU 93 is not notified by the liquid crystal display device 11 or the like, and is stored in the ART game number unnotified counter as an unnotified additional period (S1614 in FIG. 169, S1637 in FIG. 170).

Then, the liquid crystal display device 11 or the like notifies that 100 games have been added for the ART period when the unnotified addition period stored in the ART game number unnotified counter reaches 100 games or more (FIG. 169). S1616, S1639 in FIG. 170).

According to such a pachislot machine 1, at least at the first time when the addition zone is set, the unnotification addition period can be reliably stored in the ART game number unnotification counter. Therefore, even if the reference period for notification in the liquid crystal display device 11 or the like is set to a relatively long period of 100 games, the unnotified addition period is added to the ART game number unnotified counter at the first time when the addition zone is set. Compared to conventional pachislot machines that cannot be said to be reliably memorized, the frequency of unreported addition periods of 100 games increases. Even if the reference period for notification on the liquid crystal display device 11 or the like is set to a relatively long period, it is possible to frequently notify that the ART period has been added, which enhances the interest of the game. Is possible.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 described in the present modification, for the first addition period zone 3, the liquid crystal display device 11 and the like set the minimum period (50 games in this modification) determined by the CPU 93 as the addition period. Notify. Then, from the addition period actually determined by the main CPU 93 (the "50" game added by the processing of S1512 in FIG. 164 and the number of addition games determined by the lottery of S291) to the ART game number unreported counter. , It is preferable that the difference obtained by subtracting the above minimum period is stored as an unreported additional period.

According to such a pachislot machine 1, at the first time when the addition zone 3 is set, the ART game number unannounced counter is at least determined by the main CPU 93 from the addition period actually determined by the main CPU 93 as the unnotification addition period. The difference obtained by subtracting the minimum period to be played (substantially, the number of additional games determined by the lottery of S291 in FIG. 164) is stored. Therefore, at the first time when the addition zone 3 is set, the unnotification addition period stored in the ART game number unnotification counter can be further increased, and as a result, the frequency of the unnotification addition period of 100 games or more becomes even higher. Increase.

On the other hand, since the liquid crystal display device 11 or the like notifies at least the minimum period (“50” game in this modification) determined by the main CPU 93 as the addition period, the player can surely add the minimum period. You can proceed with the game with a sense of security.

According to such a pachislot machine 1, even if the reference period for notification in the liquid crystal display device 11 or the like is set to a relatively long period of 100 games or the like, the ART period is added. Notification can be performed at a high frequency, and it becomes possible to further enhance the interest of the game.

[Modification 11: Game after ART]
For a game machine having an ART function, at the time of setting change and the end of the ART game by the limiter, the mode selection lottery means uses the mode selection lottery table composed of the same type of data to select the ART transition lottery of the notification lottery means. It is proposed to select a mode. According to such a pachislot machine, after an advantageous state for the player such as the end of the AT game by the limiter occurs, the AT transition lottery mode is selected by the same process as when the setting is changed. Therefore, for example, when the setting is changed. A more advantageous ART transition lottery mode is selected at the end of the AT game, and the player is given an excessive expectation that the right of the ART game will be re-granted by the notification lottery means in a short period of time after the ART game is completed. It is possible to prevent it from burning.

However, with such a pachislot machine, there is a possibility that the interest of the game after the end of the ART game will be diminished.

Therefore, in this modified example, while preventing the player from being overly expected that the privilege will be re-granted in a short period of time, the interest of the game will be maintained even after the end of the game in which the privilege is granted. The purpose is to provide a pachislot machine that can be continued.

<Dedicated table mode transition when limiter is activated Lottery number determination table>
FIG. 172 is a table mode transition lottery number determination table dedicated to the limiter operation.

When determining the table mode transition lottery number, in the present embodiment, the table mode transition lottery number is determined with reference to the table shown in FIG. FIG. 172 is a table that is referred to only when the limiter is activated, and when the limiter is not activated, the table shown in FIG. 21 is referred to as in the present embodiment.

The table shown in FIG. 21 is defined so that different lottery numbers are determined according to the type of the lottery flag B and the current table mode (low accuracy, high accuracy short, high accuracy long).

On the other hand, the table shown in FIG. 172 is defined so that the same lottery number "9" is determined regardless of the type of the lottery flag B.

Then, when "9" is determined as the lottery number, in the subsequent table mode transition lottery, the "high accuracy short" is won at the ratio of 64/256, and the "high accuracy long" is won at the ratio of 192/256. (See (A) in FIG. 22). In the table mode transition lottery, there is no chance of winning "low accuracy".

<Explanation of operation of main control circuit>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 173 to 175, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 93 of the main control circuit 91 by using the program will be described.

(Table mode transition processing)
First, the table mode transition process in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 173. This process corresponds to the modification of FIG. 76.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the limiter operation flag is on (S1711). When the main CPU 93 determines that the limiter operation flag is on, the main CPU 93 shifts the process to S1712. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the limiter operation flag is not on (off), the main CPU 93 shifts the process to S1714.

In S1712, the main CPU 93 refers to the table mode transition lottery number determination table (FIG. 172) dedicated to the limiter operation, and determines the table mode transition lottery number from the lottery flag B. Subsequently, the main CPU 93 sets the limiter operation flag to off (S1713), and moves to S52.

In S1714, the main CPU 93 refers to the table mode transition lottery number determination table (FIG. 21), determines the table mode transition lottery number from the lottery flag B and the current table mode, and shifts to S52.

Subsequently, in S52, the table mode transition lottery table (FIG. 22) is referred to, the table mode of the transition destination is determined and set based on the table mode transition lottery number, and the table mode transition process is completed.

(Prize winning medal payout process)
Next, with reference to FIG. 174, the winning determination medal payout process in this modified example will be described. This process corresponds to S13 in FIG. 74.

First, the main CPU 93 grants a profit according to the combination of the symbols based on the combination of the symbols displayed along the effective line (S1731).

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the gaming state is the ART gaming state (S1732). When the main CPU 93 determines that the gaming state is the ART gaming state, the main CPU 93 shifts the process to S1733. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the gaming state is not the ART gaming state, the main CPU 93 ends the winning determination medal payout process.

In S1733, the main CPU 93 adds the amount of the granted profit to the ART profit granting counter. Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the ART profit granting counter is 3000 or more (S1734). When the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the ART profit granting counter is 3000 or more, the limiter operation flag is set to ON (S1735), and the winning determination medal payout process is completed. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the ART profit granting counter is not 3000 or more, the main CPU 93 ends the winning determination medal payout process.

(Control processing by state at the end)
Next, with reference to FIG. 175, the end state-based control process in this modification will be described. This process corresponds to the modification of FIG. 95.

The end state-based control process in this modification is different in that the processes S1751 to S1753 are added following the process S440 in FIG. 95. Hereinafter, the processes of S1751 to S1753 will be described.

In S1751, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the limiter operation flag is on. When the main CPU 93 determines that the limiter operation flag is on, the main CPU 93 shifts the process to S1752. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the limiter operation flag is not on (off), the main CPU 93 shifts the process to S441.

In S1752, the main CPU 93 performs an initialization process when the limiter is activated. In this process, the main CPU 93 updates the gaming state from the ART gaming state to the normal gaming state, and updates the mode information to the "low probability" mode, which has the lowest expectation of transition to ART.

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 clears the ART profit granting counter (S1753) and shifts the processing to S441. The processing after S441 is the same as the content described with reference to FIG. 95.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 described in this modification, a plurality of modes (low accuracy, high accuracy short, high accuracy long) having different expectations for transition to ART are provided, and the main CPU 93 is an ART profit giving counter. When the value of is 3000 or more (YES in the process of S1734 in FIG. 174), the limiter operation flag is set to on (S1735 in FIG. 174), and the mode information is expected to be transferred to ART at the lowest degree. Update to "low accuracy" mode (S1752 in FIG. 175). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being overly expected to shift to ART again in a short period of time in the game after the profit given in ART reaches 3000 medals.

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 refers to the table mode transition lottery number determination table (FIGS. 21 and 172) and the table mode transition lottery table (FIG. 22) from the current mode (low probability mode) to another mode (FIG. 21). Decide whether to update to high accuracy short or high accuracy long). At that time, in the table mode transition lottery number determination table (FIG. 172) referred to when the limiter is activated, unlike other table mode transition lottery number determination tables (FIG. 21), the table mode transition lottery number " 9 ”is selected. Then, in the table mode transition lottery table (FIG. 22), the table mode transition lottery number "9" is another table mode transition lottery number "0" to "2", "5" to "8", Compared to "10" and "11", the update expectation for updating to the expectation mode (high accuracy short, high accuracy long) in which the transition expectation from the normal gaming state to the ART gaming state is large is set higher. Therefore, the main CPU 93 determines to update from the low accuracy mode with low update expectation to the high mode (expected mode: high accuracy short, high accuracy long) with high frequency. If the mode is updated to the expected mode, the transition expectation that the game state shifts to the ART game state will increase, and as a result, it is possible to continue to maintain the interest of the game even after the end of granting the privilege by ART. It becomes.

Therefore, according to such a pachislot machine 1, the game is prevented from giving the player an excessive expectation that the privilege will be re-granted in a short period of time, and even after the game in which the privilege is given is completed. It is possible to provide a pachislot machine 1 capable of maintaining the interest of.

In this modified example, when the value of the ART profit granting counter becomes 3000 or more, the limiter operation flag is set to on, and the mode information is updated to the "low accuracy" mode, which has the lowest expectation of transition to ART. However, the mode information is not limited to this, and the mode information is also provided when an upper limit is set on the number of unit games in which ART can be continuously executed and the ART section reaches the upper limit. It may be updated to the "low accuracy" mode, which has the lowest expectation of transition to ART.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 described in this modification, the main CPU 93 uses a predetermined operation including an operation of a door key provided on a door that can be opened and closed (initialization operation for changing settings, see S1413 to S1417 in FIG. 158). ) Is also made, it is preferable that the mode information can be updated to the lowest mode (low probability mode). In this case, as the table mode transition lottery number determination table, the one shown in FIG. 21 is referred to (S1714 in FIG. 173). In FIG. 21, when the table mode is “low accuracy”, the table mode transition lottery number may be any of “2”, “5”, “6”, “7”, “10”, and “11”. is there. Then, as described above, in the table mode transition lottery table (FIG. 22), the value of the ART profit granting counter reaches "3000", and as a result, the table mode is selected when the table mode becomes the "low accuracy" mode. The table mode transition lottery number "9" is selected when the table mode becomes the "low accuracy" mode as a result of the initialization operation for changing the settings. The table mode transition lottery numbers "2" and " Update to the expected mode (high-accuracy short, high-accuracy long) with a higher expectation of transition from the normal gaming state to the ART gaming state compared to 5 ”,“ 6 ”,“ 7 ”,“ 10 ”, and“ 11 ”. The update expectation is set high.

According to such a pachislot machine 1, it is excessively expected that the benefits will be re-granted in a short period of time to the player who intends to proceed with the game after the benefits granted in the ART have reached a predetermined amount. It is possible to maintain the interest of the game even after the end of the game in which the privilege is given, while preventing the player from feeling the feeling. On the other hand, it is possible to prevent a situation in which an excessively large privilege is given to a player who plays a game immediately after the store opens on the next business day.

The mode information is set to the lowest mode (low accuracy) by performing a predetermined operation (initialization operation for changing the setting, see S1413 to S1417 in FIG. 159) including the operation of the door key provided on the door that can be opened and closed. When the mode is updated, the dedicated table mode transition lottery number determination table may be referred to. In this case, the table mode transition lottery number determination table corresponding to the low probability mode is referred to when the value of the ART profit granting counter reaches 3000 or more, or when the number of ARTs reaches the upper limit. Table and a second table that is referred to when an initialization operation for changing settings is performed, and a minimum mode (low probability mode) is provided between the first table and the second table. ) To the expected mode (high accuracy short, high accuracy long), it is desirable that the update expectation is different.

[Modification 12: Other transformations]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of the above embodiment has a pullback zone as one aspect of the ART state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pullback zone may not be in the ART state (advantageous section).

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, when one cycle of the game is performed during the normal state, the pachi-slot machine 1 shifts to a precursor state (various ghost precursors or various present precursors), and if it is a present precursor, After the end of the omen, the game state is shifted to the corresponding game state. Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the game in the precursory state is included in the normal state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game in the precursory state may be an advantageous section. For example, it has an advantageous section A that continues for a period corresponding to the number of precursor games and an advantageous section B that continues beyond the period corresponding to the number of precursor games, and during the advantageous section A, one navigation is performed for the player. On the other hand, during the advantageous section B, the player is navigated once during the period corresponding to the number of precursor games (for example, the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified once). During the period exceeding the period, all navigation is performed (for example, all modes of the stop operation advantageous to the player are notified). As an example, when the period corresponding to the number of precursor games is 15 games and the period exceeding the period is 50 games, the main control circuit 91 shifts to the advantageous section A and is between 15 games. The navigation is performed once, and the advantageous section A ends when 15 games have passed. On the other hand, when the main control circuit 91 shifts to the advantageous section B, it performs one navigation during 15 games, and after 15 games, performs all navigation during the following 50 games. By doing so, the game in the advantageous section A can be realized in the advantageous section A, and the game from the present omen to the ART state can be realized in the advantageous section B.

Further, the playability of each gaming state of the pachislot machine 1 of the above embodiment can be applied to other gaming states. For example, the playability in the chance zone can be diverted to the addition in the ART state or the transition to the chance zone or the ART state in the normal state, and the playability in the ART state can be diverted to the ART in the chance zone. It can be diverted to a lottery or a transition to a chance zone or ART state during the normal state.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, various benefits are given, but the benefits given to the player are arbitrary. For example, not only the benefits related to the payout given to the player (for example, transition to the ART state, addition of the duration of the ART state, transition to the CZ, addition of the duration of the CZ), but also benefits other than the payout. (For example, release of privilege video, custom release of pachislot machine 1, custom release of premier production (lottery probability, stage, character, etc.), interlocking function with mobile terminal (right to obtain images and game information on mobile terminal) ) Etc.).

Further, the content of the notification performed during the ART state is not limited to the above-mentioned example, and is arbitrary. For example, the order of stop operations (pushing order) in which a special symbol combination that is advantageous to the player is displayed may be notified, or the timing of the stop operation required for displaying the symbol combination ( The symbol to be aimed at) may be notified.

As an advantageous state for the player, the winning probability of the internal winning combination related to the re-game does not change (or changes within a range that does not affect the game playability), but the mode of the stop operation that is advantageous for the player. It may be in a gaming state in which the notification function, that is, the AT function is activated. Further, as an advantageous state for the player, a re-game high probability state (replay time) in which the winning probability of the internal winning combination related to the re-game is high is activated, and a mode of the stop operation advantageous for the player is notified. It may be in a gaming state in which the function is activated, that is, the ART function is activated.

In addition, the method of managing the duration of the ART state is also arbitrary. For example, the duration may be managed by the number of games, the duration may be managed by the number of sets, and the duration may be managed by the number of medals paid out during the ART state or the difference number. It may be possible to manage the duration by the number of notifications (number of navigations) that affect the payout of medals during the ART state, and the continuation performed at any timing during the ART state. The duration may be managed by the determination, or the ART state may be terminated when a specific symbol combination is displayed during the ART state.
In this case, the target of addition is appropriately adjusted according to the management method of the duration of the ART state, such as the number of games, the number of sets, the number of navigations, and the number of differences.

In addition, management of the duration of CZ is also optional. The duration may be managed by the number of games, the duration may be managed by the number of sets, or the duration may be managed by the continuation judgment performed at an arbitrary timing in the CZ. Further, the CZ may be terminated when a specific symbol combination is displayed in the CZ, the duration may be managed by the number of ART lottery performed during the CZ, and the duration may be managed during the CZ. The duration may be managed according to the number of transitions to the ART state.
In this case, the target of addition is appropriately adjusted according to the management method of the duration of CZ such as the number of games, the number of sets, and the number of lottery.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the above embodiment, the notification (ART) function is operated under the control of the main (main control board 71) side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub (secondary) is not limited to this. The notification (ART) function may be operated by the control on the control board 72) side.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the CZ or ART state is shifted to the CZ or ART state by winning the transition lottery performed during the normal state. Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, it is possible to give a setting difference to the transition lottery, but this transition lottery may be performed based on "information having no difference in the set value". .. In addition, "information with no difference in set values" means a combination that is determined as an internal winning combination with the same probability in all the set values in the internal lottery process (setting unquestioned combination), and all settings when all reels are stopped. It includes at least a symbol combination (a symbol combination with no setting difference) that will be displayed with the same probability in the value.

That is, in the pachislot machine 1 of the modified example, when the setting unquestioned combination is determined as the internal winning combination, a lottery for transition to the CZ or ART state is performed, and the combination with the setting difference (setting difference combination) is determined as the internal winning combination. If so, the lottery for transition to the CZ or ART state is not performed. Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when a symbol combination having no setting difference is displayed when all reels are stopped, a lottery for transition to the CZ or ART state is performed, and when a symbol combination having a setting difference is displayed, a symbol combination having a setting difference is displayed. Transition to CZ or ART state No lottery is performed.
In addition, in this specification, not performing lottery includes not only not performing lottery itself, but also including lottery but always being non-winning.

Further, the lottery for transition to the CZ or ART state may be performed based on a predetermined probability of perfection that does not fluctuate at all. The "predetermined perfect probability that does not fluctuate at all" means at least the probability that the probability does not fluctuate based on the set value (that is, the probability that the winning probability is the same regardless of the set value).
It should be noted that the "perfect probability that is predetermined and does not fluctuate at all" may be further included as the probability that is uniquely determined for "information that does not differ in the set value". In recent game machines, a state in which it is easy to win a transition lottery and a state in which it is difficult to win may be provided. In such a case, when the transition lottery is performed with the "probability uniquely determined for the information having no difference in the set value", for example, at the time of winning the setting unquestioned role, regardless of the gaming state. The transition lottery that wins with the same probability will be performed. On the contrary, when the transition lottery is performed with a "probability that is not a uniquely determined probability (that is, a probability that fluctuates) for information that does not have a difference in the set value", for example, when the setting unquestioned role is won, A transition lottery that wins with a probability according to the current gaming state, that is, if the current gaming state is a high probability state, a transition lottery that wins with a high probability is performed, and the current gaming state is a low probability state. In that case, a transition lottery, which wins with a low probability, will be performed.

By performing the transition lottery based on "information with no difference in the set value" with the same probability of winning regardless of the set value, the pachislot machine 1 of the modified example will be in the CZ or ART state. The degree of expectation regarding the transition can be made the same for each set value, and the difference in ball ejection performance can be suppressed to the winning probability of the setting difference combination with the setting difference.

In addition, the lottery for shifting to the CZ or ART state includes (1) an internal lottery for determining the internal winning combination, (2) a transition lottery for whether or not to perform the transition, and (3) a transition for the transition. Three lottery of advantageous section type lottery for determining destination can be considered. In the pachi-slot machine 1, these three lottery may be performed by using individual random numbers, all the lottery may be performed by using a common random number value, and two lottery may be performed. A common random number value may be used, and the remaining one lottery may be performed using individual random number values. It should be noted that using a common random number value means, for example, (1) when a predetermined set unquestioned combination is determined in the random number range of "0 to 128" in the internal lottery, (2) "0 to 64" is shifted. Non-winning random number range for lottery, "65-128" is the transition random number range for lottery, and (3) "65-83" is the random number range where the migration destination is CZ1, "83-99" is migrated. The destination is a random number range with CZ2, "99 to 115" is a random number range with a transfer destination of CZ3, and "115 to 128" is a random number range with a transfer destination in the ART state. In other words, the lottery results of other lottery are assigned to a part of the random number range that is won in one lottery.

Further, in the above-described embodiment and various modifications, the pachi-slot machine has been described as an example, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Features other than the features peculiar to the pachislot machine 1, such as the features related to reel control and the features related to setting change and confirmation of the present invention, can be applied to a gaming machine called "pachinko", and the same effect can be obtained. .. For example, checksum generation and determination processing, various processing using the main CPU93 dedicated instruction code (address specification processing using the Q register, soft timer update processing, 7-segment LED drive processing, communication data generation and storage processing, etc. ), Various processes using the non-standard ROM area and the non-standard RAM area, and the like can also be applied to "pachinko".

Further, the set value may be set to only one step. At this time, the setting change process may be left behind or may be eliminated. When the setting change process is left, only the same setting can be retyped, so that the process is substantially for clearing the RAM. Even when the set value is set to only one step, a mode related to lottery (first hit and / or addition, etc.) of an advantageous state (ART state, etc.) is provided, and the number of times a predetermined winning combination is won with a predetermined probability is counted. However, by switching this mode when the number of times reaches a specified value, it is possible to cause undulations in the ball output.

In this case, the value obtained by multiplying the denominator of the predetermined probability by the specified value is one wave of balls. If it is specified that the value is switched by the number of games corresponding to one day, even if the set value is one step, it can be made comparable to a plurality of game machines provided. For example, if the business hours of a day are 11 hours, 11h = 39600 seconds, so if the shortest time required for one game is 4.1 seconds according to the rules, the maximum number of games per day is 39600/4. 1 = about 9695 times. Since it is not realistic to have no breaks (meals and toilets), the number of games per day is considered to be about 8000. By setting the predetermined probability to 1/32 and the specified value to 256, 32 × 256 = 8192, so that the wave of the ball output can be switched in about one day.

Furthermore, if the mode that is advantageous to the player and the mode that is disadvantageous to the player are switched alternately each time the number of times the predetermined combination is won reaches the specified value, the profit will be stable in a two-day cycle. It can contribute to the business of the store. Although the case where the set value is set to one step has been described, the setting value is not limited to one step and can be diverted. More specifically, if the number of set values is not changed, it is possible to make the wave of balls to be ejected more complicated without increasing the number of set values. Also, by reducing the number of set values, it is possible to compensate for the decrease in the set values and the monotony.

Moreover, if the number of set values can be reduced, the data capacity can be reduced accordingly. If the set value of 6 steps can be changed to the set value of 1 step, the data can be reduced to 1/6. In addition, the development cost for designing the desired ball output rate at each stage is also reduced to 1/6. Furthermore, since only game machines that meet the test are permitted to be used for business, the time required for the test can be shortened.

[Extensibility of other game machines according to the present embodiment]
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a player's medal insertion operation (that is, an operation of inserting a hand-held medal into the medal insertion slot 20 or a credited medal is inserted into the MAX bet button 15a or the 1-bet button. If the game is started by (operation of operating 15b to insert) and the medal is paid out when the game is finished, the hopper device 51 is driven to pay out the medal from the medal payout outlet 24, or The form of credit has been described, but it is not limited to this.

For example, the present invention is applied to all forms in which a game medium necessary for a game is input by a player, a game is performed based on the game, and a privilege is given (for example, a medal is paid out) based on the result of the game. be able to. That is, not only the form in which the game medium is input (hanged) and the game medium is paid out by the physical movement of the player, but also the main control circuit 91 (main control board 71) itself is the game medium owned by the player. May be electronically managed to enable the game without medals. Further, it may be a game medium management device that is mounted (connected) to the main control circuit 91 (main control board 71) and manages the game medium to electromagnetically manage the game medium owned by the player. ..

In this case, the game media management device is a device having a ROM and an RWM (or RAM) and provided in the game machine, and is bidirectionally communicated with an external game medium handling device (not shown) via a predetermined interface. It is connected so that it can be connected, and a prize is awarded for the operation of lending the game medium (that is, the operation of providing the game medium necessary for the player to perform the operation of inserting the game medium) or the role of paying out the game medium (that is, the operation of providing the game medium). When the combination is established), the game medium payout operation (that is, the action of making the player acquire the game medium necessary for paying out the game medium), or the game medium to be used for the game. It suffices that the operation of recording electromagnetically can be performed. Further, the game media management device not only manages the actual number of game media, but also displays the number of game media possessed on the front surface of the pachislot machine 1 based on, for example, the management result of the number of game media. A medium number display device (not shown) may be provided, and the number of game media displayed on the possessed game medium number display device may be managed. That is, the game media management device may be capable of recording and displaying the total number of game media that the player can use for the game by an electromagnetic method.

Further, in this case, the game medium management device has a performance that allows the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to an external game medium handling device, and the player. In addition to the case of direct operation, when the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and when an external connection terminal plate (not shown) is provided between the device and an external game medium handling device. It is desirable that the player has the ability to transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media only through the external connection terminal plate.

In addition to the above, the game machine is provided with a lending operation means, a return (payment) operation means, and an external connection terminal plate that can be operated by the player, and the game medium handling device is provided with a slot for valuable value such as banknotes and a recording medium. (For example, IC card) insertion slot, non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money etc. from mobile terminals, other various operation means such as lending operation means, return operation means, external connection terminal board on the game media handling device side It may be provided (neither is shown).

As a flow of the game at that time, for example, the player deposits valuable value to the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of any of the above lending operation means. Then, the number of game media corresponding to the valuable value subtracted from the game media handling device to the game media management device is increased. Then, the player plays a game, and if a game medium is required, the above operation is repeated. After that, a predetermined number of game media are acquired as a result of the game, and when the game is finished, the number of game media is transmitted from the game media management device to the game media handling device by operating one of the return operation means, and the game is played. The medium handling device discharges a recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded. The game media management device clears the number of game media stored by itself when the number of game media is transmitted. The player takes the discharged recording medium to a prize counter or the like for exchanging prizes, or moves the game table to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another table.

In the above example, all the game media are transmitted to the game medium handling device, but only the number of game media desired by the player is transmitted on the game machine or the game medium handling device side, and the game medium possessed by the player is transmitted. It may be divided and processed. Further, not only the recording medium is discharged, but cash or a cash equivalent may be discharged, or the recording medium may be stored in a mobile terminal or the like. Further, the game medium handling device may be capable of inserting a member recording medium of the game hall and storing the member recording medium in the member recording medium so that the game can be replayed at a later date.

Further, in the game machine or the game medium handling device, a lock operation for locking the game medium or valuable value data communication can be executed on the game medium handling device or the game medium management device by operating a predetermined operating means (not shown). May be good. In that case, the player may be stored by setting information such as a one-time password that only the player can know, or by an imaging means provided in the game machine or the game medium handling device.

As described above, the game medium management device may be capable of playing games only without medals, or the game medium is inserted (hanged) by the physical movement of the player, and the game medium is played. It may be a form in which the game is paid out, a form in which the game is possible without a medal, or a form in which the game is possible in both forms. In this case, the game medium management device may adopt a method of directly controlling the selector 66 and the hopper device 51 described above, or these are controlled by the main control circuit 91 (main control board 71). Based on the transmission of the control result, a method is adopted that enables control in which the total number of game media that the player can use for the game is recorded by an electromagnetic method and displayed. You can also.

Further, in the above, the case where the game medium management device is applied to the pachi-slot machine 1 has been described. However, in the slot machine and the enclosed game machine using the game ball described above, the game medium management device is also provided in the same manner for the game. It is also possible to manage the game medium of the person.

As described above, by providing the game medium management device described above, it is possible to reduce the number of selectors 66, hopper devices 51, etc. inside the game machine as compared with the case where the game medium is physically used for the game. Not only can the cost and manufacturing cost of the game be reduced, but also the player can be prevented from coming into direct contact with the game medium, the game environment can be improved, noise can be reduced, and the number of devices can be reduced. It also reduces the power consumption of. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts through the game medium and the slot and payout port of the game medium. That is, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of improving various environments surrounding the game machine.

[Effect of pachislot machine]
The pachislot machine 1 according to the present invention has been described above. According to such a pachislot machine 1, the following effects can be expected.

<Games in the additional zone 1>
In the addition zone, the main control board 71 (main CPU 93) selects one event cell from a plurality of event cells having different rewards associated with each other for five games from the current game to the game four games ahead. It is set for each game, and when the grant condition is satisfied in the game in which this event mass is set, a reward corresponding to the event mass set for the game is granted. For example, the main control board 71 (main CPU 93) usually adds the duration of ART when a bell or more wins in a game in which the event mass “blue 1” is set.

Further, the main control board 71 (main CPU 93) subtracts 1 life when the replay or less wins in the game in which the event mass "red" is set, and ends the additional zone 1 when the life becomes 0 from this subtraction. .. At this time, the main control board 71 (main CPU 93) assigns the guaranteed number of games for 5 games at the start of the additional zone 1, and the event mass “red” is set while the guaranteed number of games remains. Even if the replay or less wins in the game being played, the additional zone 1 is continued without subtracting 1 life.

Further, the main control board 71 (main CPU 93) adds 1 to the resurrection stock when a bell or more wins in a game in which the event mass "character 4" is set. In the situation where this resurrection stock is given, the main control board 71 (main CPU 93) restarts the additional zone 1 even when the life becomes 0 due to the event mass “red” and the additional zone 1 ends. To do.

In addition, the main control board 71 (main CPU 93) grants the right to shift from the additional zone 1 to the additional zone 2 when a bell or more wins in a game in which the event mass “back” is set, and the main control board 71 (main CPU 93). The 71 (main CPU 93) shifts the gaming state from the additional zone 1 to the additional zone 2 when the right to shift to the additional zone 2 is granted.

Further, in the main control board 71 (main CPU 93), when a bell or more wins in a game in which the event mass "battle" is set, the number of back mass conversions set for the event mass "battle" in the next game or later is set. Rewrite the event square set for the minute game to the event square "back". The main control board 71 (main CPU 93) periodically (every 20 games) sets this event mass “battle” in the additional zone 1.

(Display / non-display of event space)
In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present invention, the event mass set for each of the games for five games is displayed in a predetermined mode. Specifically, on the rom cartridge board 86, the display cells "treasure box" and "enemy" provided in association with each of the event cells and the display cells "unknown" provided in common with all the event cells. A plurality of images including and are stored, and when the event mass is set on the main side of the sub control board 72 (sub CPU 102), the images associated with each of the event masses (display mass "treasure box" and "enemy") are stored. ) Or an image (display mass "unknown") provided in common to all event cells is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11.

Specifically, when a predetermined operation is not performed, the sub control board 72 (sub CPU 102) displays an image peculiar to the event mass set on the main side on the liquid crystal display device 11 and performs a predetermined operation. Is performed, a common image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 regardless of the event mass set on the main side.

By making it possible to switch the display / non-display of the event mass (reward) set in this way according to the operation of the player, the game playability can be changed according to the player's preference. That is, for example, in a situation where an event mass that is not so preferable for the player is set internally (main side), it is possible that some players do not want to display the event mass. Even in such a case, if the player chooses to hide the event mass, the content of the set event mass (reward) will not be known, so the player will be able to play each game. You will play the game with expectations.

The sub control board 72 (sub CPU 102) may hide all the cells for 5 games (display cells "unknown"), or hide some cells and some cells. The square may be displayed. For example, the sub control board 72 (sub CPU 102) displays the display mass “unknown” for the next game and subsequent games, and displays the images associated with each of the event cells for the current game. In this case, when the display mass "unknown" displayed on the sub control board 72 (sub CPU 102) for the next game slides as the game progresses and corresponds to the current game, the display mass "Unknown" is displayed. "Unknown" is switched to the image associated with this game and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. The timing of switching the display is arbitrary. For example, the sub control board 72 (sub CPU 102) is used at the end of the previous game, the start of the current game, and the stop operation of the current game (first to third stops). The display of the liquid crystal display device 11 is switched to any of the operations).

By doing so, the player does not know the content of the reward set for the next and subsequent games, but can grasp the content of the reward set for this game. Therefore, the player will play the game with a strong interest in this game, and the interest of the game will be improved.

(Continuation / discontinuation of additional zone 1)
Further, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present invention, when the life becomes 0 due to the event mass "red", the additional zone 1 is terminated, but the life is not subtracted while the guaranteed number of games remains. As a result, the additional zone 1 does not end while the guaranteed number of games remains. In this way, in the pachislot machine 1, even if many event masses that are disadvantageous to the player are set, the additional zone 1 does not end while the guaranteed number of games remains, so that the additional zone 1 is immediately set. There is no end, and a certain level of interest is guaranteed. Further, even after the guaranteed number of games has been exhausted, if the player has the resurrection stock, the additional zone 1 is restarted at the end of the game, so that the interest of the game can be further enhanced.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 (main CPU 93) sets the additional zone level at the start of the additional zone 1. This additional zone level is a mode in which the expected degree of selection of the event mass is different. For example, in the additional zone level 3, the probability of selecting the event mass "red" is higher than when the additional zone level 1 is set. Low. The main control board 71 (main CPU 93) draws the additional zone level with a predetermined probability at the start of the normal additional zone 1, but when the additional zone 1 is restarted by the resurrection stock, the additional zone level 3 is always added. To determine. As a result, if the revival stock has been granted, not only the additional zone 1 is restarted at the end of the additional zone 1, but also the restarted additional zone 1 itself becomes difficult to end, which further enhances the interest of the game. Can be enhanced.

(Transition from additional zone 1 to additional zone 2)
Further, in the pachislot machine 1, when a bell or more wins in a game in which the event mass "back" is set, the pachislot machine 1 shifts to a more advantageous additional zone 2. Here, the event mass "back" is set by the number of back mass conversions when a bell or more wins in a game in which the event mass "battle" is set, so the event mass "battle" is set. In that case, the degree of expectation of transition to the additional zone 2 which is more advantageous in the subsequent game will increase. As a result, for example, even if the event mass set for the next and subsequent games is disadvantageous to the player, if the event mass "battle" is set in this game, the event Since it is possible to avoid a disadvantageous situation by getting a reward according to the mass "battle", the interest of the game is guaranteed. At this time, in order to get the reward according to the event mass "back" and "battle", it is necessary to win more than the bell, so the frequency of rewriting can be increased compared to the case where the reward can always be obtained. It can be done, and the fun of the game can be further enhanced.

Further, in the pachislot machine 1, since the event mass "battle" is set at regular intervals in the additional zone 1, there is a chance to rewrite the event mass "back" on a regular basis. If the reward according to the event mass "battle" can be obtained in this regular chance, the expectation for the transition to the more advantageous additional zone 2 will increase in the subsequent game, so that the interest of the game will be further enhanced. Can be enhanced.

<Game of additional zone 2>
During the addition zone 2, the main control board 71 (main CPU 93) adds the number of games and ART games for each game. Specifically, in the addition zone 2, the main control board 71 (main CPU 93) always adds the number of ART games when a bell or more at which medals are paid out wins, and the replay or less without medals being paid out is If the winning is won, the number of ART games will be added unless it ends in the end lottery of the addition zone 2 (see the "back" column of FIG. 47 and FIG. 40). Further, when the bonus state starts in the additional zone 2, the main control board 71 (main CPU 93) continues without ending the additional zone 2.

Specifically, in the pachislot machine 1 (main control board 71, sub-control board 72), when the bonus state starts in the additional zone 2, a special BB having continuity with the additional zone 2 in terms of playability and production is provided. Start. More specifically, the main control board 71 (main CPU 93) adds the number of ART games during the special BB, and the winning role is to pay out medals during the special BB (note that during the special BB). When the winning combination of medals is paid out), the number of ART games is always added (see FIG. 57), thereby realizing continuity in terms of playability between the additional zone 2 and the special BB. .. Further, the sub control board 72 (sub CPU 102) realizes playability from the effect side by displaying the same effect screen as in the additional zone 2 during the special BB.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present invention, even if the bonus state is started in the additional zone 2, the additional zone 2 is continued without ending. Here, during the bonus state (special BB), since the replay or less is not won, the end lottery itself is not performed and the additional zone 2 is not ended. In addition, during the bonus state, the winning combination of medals is always won, so that the number of ART games can be easily added, which is even more advantageous than the additional zone 2. By making the bonus state in the additional zone 2 more advantageous in this way, unlike the conventional pachislot machine that ends the additional zone due to the bonus in the additional zone, the interest in the additional zone 2 is further enhanced. be able to.

In addition, during the special BB, the addition zone 2 is connected in an dramatic manner, and not the number of medals that can be paid out, but the remaining number of games in which the number of medals that can be paid out is to be paid out is displayed. From the player's point of view, since the playability and the continuity from the production side are ensured, it is possible to give the player the playability as if the additional zone 2 is continuous. In addition, by replacing the end timing of the bonus state with an intuitively easy-to-understand display of the number of remaining games, it is possible to give the player a feeling as if the additional zone 2 is guaranteed for 30 games. It is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

<Back mode production>
Further, the main control board 71 (main CPU 93) accumulates the back mode when the result of the game becomes a disadvantageous result for the player, and when the accumulated back mode becomes 50 or more, the ART game state at the time of bonus winning. (See FIG. 54). In the pachi-slot machine 1, when the back mode absorption effect suggesting that the back mode is accumulated is executed, the main control board 71 (main CPU 93) accumulates the back mode and the sub control board 72 (sub CPU 102). Partly overlaps and partly different from the opportunity to execute the back mode absorption effect.

By making the timing of performing the back mode absorption effect different from the timing of accumulating the back mode in this way, the effect is executed at various timings different from the timing of actually accumulating the back mode. It is possible to give diversity to the production. In addition, since it is possible to increase the chances of executing the production while suppressing the chances of accumulating the back mode, various moments while suppressing the capacity of the main side that manages the ball ejection (the chance of accumulating the back mode). It is possible to execute the production with, and it is possible to give diversity to the production.

Further, since the sub control board 72 (sub CPU 102) performs the back mode absorption effect based on the back mode (value of the main back mode counter-value of the sub back mode counter) accumulated from the time of the previous effect execution, it is accumulated. It is possible to appropriately suggest the back mode.

<Character customization>
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present invention, it is possible to customize the character used for the production. Specifically, in the pachislot machine 1, in addition to the selection of the character, the costume of the character, the accessories of the character, and the pose of the character can be selected as the display mode of the character.

In the pachislot machine 1, the range that can be combined for each of the costume, the accessory, and the pose is defined (see FIG. 64), and the character can be customized only within the defined range. Then, when the player selects a part for which only one part is specified as a combination that can be combined, the sub-control board 72 (sub-CPU 102) automatically selects a part that can be combined with the part. decide. For example, when an accessory that can be combined only with a specific costume is selected, the specific costume is automatically selected and selection of another costume is prohibited.

As a result, combinations that may damage the image of the game machine or the character can be made non-selectable, and the character can be customized without damaging the unique image. In addition, since the parts that can be combined are automatically determined, it is possible to customize the character without damaging the unique image without taking the trouble of the player.

<Touch operation mode and button operation mode>
Further, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present invention, by providing the touch sensor 111 on the liquid crystal display device 11, the entire surface of the liquid crystal display device 11 is used as a touch panel, and the input related to the display of the pachislot machine 1 is input via the touch panel. It is accepted by the touch operation mode and the button operation mode via the operation button 22.

The touch operation mode and the button operation mode can be switched only by the player performing the corresponding operation. For example, the sub control board 72 (sub CPU 102) switches from the touch operation mode to the button operation mode when the operation button 22 is operated in the touch operation mode, and from the button operation mode when the touch panel is operated in the button operation mode. Switch to touch operation mode. As a result, the player can freely select the operation mode he / she prefers, and can switch to the operation mode he / she desires by a simple method.

(Difference between touch operation mode and button operation mode (unopened icon))
Further, in the pachislot machine 1, it is clarified that the unopened icon cannot be determined from a plurality of icons by making it impossible to select the unopened icon (it does not respond even if touched) in the touch operation mode. be able to. Further, in the button operation mode, by making the unopened icon selectable with the selection cursor, it becomes clear that this unopened icon cannot be determined at present but can be determined by being released in the future.

(Difference between touch operation mode and button operation mode (display selected))
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the display mode of the selected icon is different between the touch operation mode and the button operation mode. Specifically, in the touch operation mode, the selected icon is displayed with a touch-on effect, and in the button operation mode, the selected icon is displayed with a selection cursor to clarify the difference between the two operations. be able to.

<History display at easy start>
In addition, in the pachislot machine 1, the player who has officially logged in is registered by taking the formal procedure by displaying the second page of the game history including the number of winnings of the rare role. It is possible to give a player a privilege (display of the number of winnings of a rare role) that does not directly affect the game. As a result, it is possible to encourage the player who wants to display the number of winnings of the rare role to use the formal registration, and as a result, the player can be attached to the game machine and the operation of the game machine can be increased.

In addition, since the pachislot machine 1 does not display the second page of the game history including the number of winnings of the rare role for the player who logged in by the simple procedure, the simple login procedure is used. By logging in only, it is possible to prevent the act of snooping on the result of the other person's game after the other person has played the game.

<Insurance processing at the time of navigation error>
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when the information received from the main side includes the information of the main side navigation, the sub side determines whether or not the determined effect is the effect corresponding to the main side navigation. However, if it is not the corresponding effect, the effect determined by lottery is forcibly rewritten to the effect corresponding to the main navigation. As a result, even if the effect suitable for the main navigation is not drawn for some reason, the effect on the sub side can be rewritten to the effect suitable for the main navigation and executed. The notification can be reliably performed on both sides, and as a result, the player can reliably enjoy the notification.

<Reel production using medal insertion>
In recent years, the game operation from the insertion of the medal to the operation of the stop button is performed as a series of assembly line work, and in order to prevent it from becoming clerical, when the medal is inserted into the game machine, it is a symbol for the production of the sub reel. When the rotation of the game is started, the start lever is operated, and the start operation of the unit game is detected, a game machine that stops the rotation of the production symbol based on the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means has been proposed. There is. However, it is required to provide a game machine having unprecedented playability, in which the symbol is rotated and stopped by an operation different from the operation of the player to make the winning combination predictable. ..

Therefore, the main control circuit 91 controls the effect using the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and the main CPU 93 has the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R when the medals are stored (credited) in the credit number counter. Of these, the result of the presence or absence of privilege grant determined by the main control circuit 91 by controlling the specific effect of changing and stopping the symbol on at least one reel 3L, 3C, 3R by a specific amount and changing the symbol by a specific amount. Suggest.

By doing so, it is possible to provide a game machine with unprecedented playability by rotating and stopping the symbol and making it possible to predict the winning combination, triggered by the medal storage operation (credit operation). it can.

<Providing an opportunity to mute the voice of your favorite character using Unimemo>
In recent years, a service that links a mobile phone with a dedicated site on the Internet and provides the player with the game content (game history) from the start of the game to a certain point in time by the dedicated site (hereinafter, "Unimemo"). ") Is known. Using this service, for example, the sub CPU 102 creates a game record QR code when a progress acquisition operation is performed, a recording end operation is performed, or the like, and the player uses a mobile phone to play a game. By reading the record QR code and inputting the read information into a dedicated site on the Internet, it is possible to manage the game history of the player on the dedicated site.

By the way, when the production on the game machine is switched to the next production based on a predetermined trigger such as a medal betting operation, a start lever operation, or a third stop operation, the character's dialogue sound is in the middle of the dialogue. It may be forcibly terminated. Vocal sounds and music sounds have a large meaning as sound effects and BGM when displaying images, and since it is a relatively long time, it is unavoidable to forcibly end in the middle of vocal sounds and music sounds. There is also. On the other hand, the character's dialogue sound is relatively short, and if it is forcibly terminated even though it is in the middle of the dialogue, the dialogue sound is cut off in the middle of the dialogue for the player. It can give the impression that it has been done.

Therefore, when the character selection operation is performed within a predetermined time after the uni-memo menu is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 (S831 and S832 in FIG. 116), and the special password is correctly input within the predetermined time. (S833, S834 in FIG. 116), the special effect flag is set to on (S835 in FIG. 116). Then, when a new effect is registered (S851 in FIG. 117), the effect update flag is set to on (S852 in FIG. 117), and the sound data set process is executed (S872 in FIG. 118). In the sound data set processing, the sub CPU 102 mutes sounds that are different from the sounds of the target character related to the selection operation (S895 in FIG. 119 and S902 in FIG. 120). On the other hand, at least for the effect of producing the sound of the target character, the sub CPU 102 continues to output the sound without muting it even if a new effect is registered (S895 in FIG. 119 and S902 in FIG. 120). You may do so.

As a result, regarding the voice of the character that the player likes, even if the production on the pachislot machine 1 is switched to the next production by registering a new production, the sound is not ended in the middle and is the last. Is sounded up to. Therefore, it is possible to provide the pachi-slot machine 1 that further enhances the interest of the game.

<Production effect by inserting medals>
So far, a gaming machine has been proposed that can grasp that the player has shifted to the ART state by repeatedly hitting the bet button by the player himself / herself. However, no gaming machine has been proposed that enables a so-called continuous striking effect to be executed not only by operating a physical button but also by operating in another form, which leads to a state advantageous for the player.

Therefore, when the main control circuit 91 detects the stored signal of the medal while executing the predetermined effect, the sub-control circuit 101 produces a notification effect regarding the granting of the privilege in the liquid crystal display device 11 or the like according to the detected stored signal. It may be possible to control it. For example, the continuous hit effect flag is set to on (S1056 in FIG. 125), and while the battle effect is being executed, the medal sensor (not shown) detects the medal credit operation (S1017 in FIG. 123), and the sub When the CPU 102 receives the medal insertion command (YES in S1035 of FIG. 124), the sub CPU 102 controls the effect of notification regarding the granting of ART in the liquid crystal display device 11 or the like in response to the medal insertion command (S1095 or the like in FIG. 127). ). Therefore, not only the physical button operation but also the credit operation of the medal, which is another form of operation, makes it possible to execute the so-called continuous hitting effect, which leads to an advantageous state for the player. It is possible to provide a pachislot machine 1 having no new playability.

<New relief function>
So far, a game machine having a relief function for forcibly shifting to an advantageous state when the advantageous state is not performed for a long period of time has been known. However, the conventional device for the relief function is relief by shifting the state of the game from the normal state to the advantageous state when the normal state, which is not the advantageous state, continues for a long time. Therefore, it is required to provide a new remedy and to have a variation in the treatment for preventing the player from suffering a great disadvantage.

Therefore, a new remedy may be provided, and the remedy function for preventing the player from suffering a great disadvantage may be provided with variations.

For example, in the normal game state (non-ART), the main CPU 93 is in the normal game state (non-ART) for each unit game in the normal game state (non-ART), regardless of the type of the internal winning combination (lottery flag A). May decide whether to move from to the first normal ART. As a result, the transition from the normal gaming state (non-ART) to the first normal ART can be executed with a relatively small number of unit games.

Then, in the first normal ART, the main CPU 93 determines from the first normal ART to the second when the internal winning combination (lottery flag A) is a cherry (either a weak cherry, a strong cherry, or a confirmed cherry). You may decide whether to move to the normal ART of. Since the main CPU 93 makes the determination when the internal winning combination (lottery flag A) is cherry, it is relatively rare that the main CPU 93 decides to shift from the first normal ART to the second normal ART. Is. Then, when the first normal ART is shifted to the second normal ART, the number of times of the notification pattern A is reduced from 1000 times to 32 times, which is less, and if the unit game of the notification pattern A is performed 32 times, the notification is made. The unit game of the notification pattern B, which has a larger privilege than the pattern A, can be executed. As a result, when it is determined in the first normal ART to shift to the second normal ART, the number of games of the notification pattern A can be reduced and the unit game of the notification pattern B having a larger privilege can be executed. It will be possible.

On the other hand, since it is relatively rare for the main CPU 93 to decide to shift from the first normal ART to the second normal ART, the first is until the number of unit games of the notification pattern A reaches 1000 times. It may not be determined to move from the normal ART of the first to the second normal ART. Even in such a case, if the number of unit games of the notification pattern A reaches 1000, the unit game of the notification pattern B, which has a greater privilege than the unit game of the notification pattern A, is subsequently executed. .. As a result, when the unit game of the notification pattern B is not executed for a long time, the player can be given a feeling as if it is a relief function for forcibly executing the unit game having a privilege.

<Link between medal insertion and production>
In recent years, the game operation from the insertion of the medal to the operation of the stop button is performed as a series of assembly line work, and in order to prevent it from becoming clerical, when the medal is inserted into the game machine, it is a symbol for the production of the sub reel. When the rotation of the game is started, the start lever is operated, and the start operation of the unit game is detected, a game machine that stops the rotation of the production symbol based on the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means has been proposed. There is.

According to this configuration, in the sub-reel, the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means is notified at the timing when the game operation is performed in a clerical manner without any conventional production. As a result, it becomes possible to notify the winning role that has an impact, and the player can enjoy the production on the sub reel with an unprecedented interest.

However, no production is performed from the insertion of the medal to the operation of the start lever, and even during such a period, some production related to the game is performed to provide unprecedented playability. It is required to provide a game machine with a game.

Therefore, even during the period from the insertion of the medal to the operation of the start lever, some effect related to the game may be executed.

For example, when a medal credit operation is performed and the start lever 23 is operated, the sub CPU 102 uses a plurality of types of medal images (blue medal image, yellow medal image, red medal image) that imitate medals. , The medal image to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 may be determined. Then, when the sub CPU 102 detects the credit operation of the medal, the sub CPU 102 controls the liquid crystal display device 11 so as to display the medal image of the color corresponding to the result of determining the medal image to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, and the medal. Depending on the color of the image, the effect following the effect of displaying the medal image may be controlled.

Until now, even if a medal credit operation (storage operation) is performed, a sound indicating that the medal has been credited (stored) is emitted, and the number of credited (stored) medals is displayed numerically. I was staying at. According to the pachislot machine 1 described in this modification, the medal is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 in response to the medal sensor detecting the credit operation of the medal, regardless of the detection of the operation of the start lever 23. The effect of displaying the medal image is executed. Then, following the effect of displaying the medal image, the effect is executed according to the color of the medal displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11.

For the player, even between the time when the medal is credited and the time when the start lever 23 is operated, the medal is not only stored in the predetermined storage area by the medal credit, but also. The liquid crystal display device 11 can also give the impression that medals are stored. Then, at the stage of storing medals, since the lottery such as the determination of the so-called internal winning combination is not performed, the lottery result cannot be notified, but the effect of displaying the image of the medal is followed by the character effect. A chance element that it is possible to perform an effect by a specific character, which is difficult to obtain depending on the color of the medal displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, by executing the effect according to the result of determining the presence or absence. Is given.

As a result, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 described in the present modification, even during the period from the start of inserting the medal to the operation of the start lever 23, the effect related to the game is executed, and the game performance is unprecedented. It is possible to provide a gaming machine with.

<Direction function by waiting time>
Until now, the lottery of the winning combination has been mainly performed by detecting the start operation by the start switch. In addition, it is also proposed to provide a means for selecting one lottery timing from a plurality of preset lottery timings and a means for determining the internal state by the lottery performed at the selected lottery timings. For example, the control means of the game machine can extract random numbers, (a) when the wait timer reaches 4.1 seconds, (b) when a medal is inserted, (c) the start lever is effective, and Do this three times when the start lever is operated. Then, the control means selects at which timing the extracted random numbers are used, and determines the internal winning combination using the selected random numbers.

By providing a plurality of lottery timings, the timing of drawing (acquiring a random number value) for determining the internal state becomes unclear, and it is difficult for the player to aim and acquire the winning random number value. Become. However, it cannot be said that the variety of productions related to games, such as the notification of the internal winning role, is still increasing.

Therefore, by associating the timing of deciding whether to give a privilege with the effect related to the game, we provide a game machine that has a wider variety of effects related to the result of the decision to give the privilege, including the notification of the internal winning combination. May be good.

For example, the main CPU 93 is different from the case where the start lever 23 is operated, and further, a wait process (S1311 in FIG. 145), a game start lock process (S1312 in FIG. 145), and a reel rotation start process (FIG. 145). After executing S11), the internal lottery process (S4 in FIG. 145) is executed.

When the timing at which the start lever 23 is operated is a timing before reaching a predetermined time from the timing at which the variable display of the symbol in the symbol display area 4 is started in the unit game before one unit game, the main The internal lottery process by the CPU 93 has not yet been executed. When the timing at which the start lever 23 is operated is a timing before reaching a predetermined time from the timing at which the variable display of the symbol in the symbol display area 4 is started in the unit game before one unit game, the main The internal lottery process by the CPU 93 has not yet been executed. Therefore, it is not possible to notify the internal lottery result on the information display 14. On the other hand, when the timing at which the start lever 23 is operated is the timing after reaching the predetermined time, the internal lottery process by the main CPU 93 is executed. Therefore, the main CPU 93 can execute the notification of the internal lottery result (S1373, S1375, S1377 in FIG. 149) on the information display 14.

For the player, the internal lottery result determined at approximately the same time as the timing of operating the start lever 23 by waiting without operating the start lever 23 until the predetermined time elapses. The pattern of immediately receiving the notification of the above, and the start lever 23 is operated before the predetermined time elapses, and after the start lever 23 is operated, the internal lottery result is waited until the predetermined time elapses. It is possible to receive two patterns of playability with the pattern that receives the notification of.

According to such a pachi-slot machine 1, it is possible for the player to decide whether to wait without operating the start lever 23 or not until the predetermined time elapses, thereby. , A pattern in which the result of the decision by the privilege granting determination means is immediately notified, and a pattern in which the result of the determination by the privilege granting determination means is notified after the start operation is performed and a predetermined time elapses. Can be changed. Therefore, by associating the timing at which the main CPU 93 executes the internal lottery process with the timing at which the effect related to the game is executed, it is possible to provide a game machine in which the effect related to the game including the notification of the internal lottery result is further diversified. be able to.

Further, the main CPU 93 may determine the game lock time so that the predetermined time can be set to be longer or shorter (FIG. 144). Then, although I thought that I had waited until the above-mentioned predetermined time had passed, I was not actually waiting, and I could not receive the notification of the internal lottery result immediately, or the above-mentioned predetermined time had passed. I couldn't wait and thought that the above-mentioned predetermined time had not actually passed, but in reality, I was waiting until the above-mentioned predetermined time had passed, and it was decided at about the same time as the timing to operate the start lever 23. It is possible that the notification of the internal winning combination that has been made can be received immediately. Therefore, it is possible to add more diversity to the game.

Further, even for an effect different from the notification of the internal lottery result on the information display 14, it is possible to provide an effect for a relatively long time or an effect for a relatively short time, so that the contents of the effect are also diverse. become.

<Change in batting order>
So far, various measures have been taken to notify the number of additional games. However, at present, it is difficult to frequently notify the number of unit games that is far away from the number actually determined as the number of additional games as the number of additional games for notification, and the notification of the number of additional games is still improved. There is room for.

For example, the number of unit games larger than the actual number of additional games can be notified as the number of additional games for notification, and the difference between the actual number of additional games and the number of additional games for notification is reduced as the game progresses. A gaming machine that can be suppressed may be provided.

For example, the main CPU 93 determines whether to execute ART. Then, the main CPU 93 includes an additional lottery number determination table (FIG. 151), a normal ART middle addition zone lottery table (FIG. 38), an ART middle addition game number lottery number table (FIG. 152), and an additional game number lottery table (FIG. 152). With reference to FIG. 40) and the like, an additional period indicating the degree of extension of the period in which ART is granted is determined (S215 to S218 in FIG. 64). Then, the sub CPU 102 refers to the additional game number notification determination table (FIG. 153), and determines the initial value of the notification additional period to be notified by the liquid crystal display device 11 or the like based on the additional period determined by the main CPU 93 (FIG. 153). S1333 in FIG. 156).

As shown in FIG. 157, when the addition period is determined, a plurality of display areas (left area 11L, left area 11L,) capable of displaying numbers corresponding to each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R in the liquid crystal display device 11 or the like. In the middle area 11C and the right area 11R), initial values determined by the sub CPU 102 (for example, "0", "3", "0" in the order of the left area 11L, the middle area 11C, and the right area 11R) are displayed. The reel. Then, in a separate display area (separate area 11D) capable of displaying numbers separately from the display area (left area 11L, middle area 11C and right area 11R), a plurality of display areas (left area 11L, middle area 11C and right) are displayed. Area 11R), the number displayed in the display area (left area 11L) that displays the number corresponding to the digit (third digit) larger than the number of digits (2 digits) of the initial value "30" for the additional period for notification. Displayed in the display area (middle area 11C) that is larger than ("0") and displays a number corresponding to the same digit (second digit) as the number of digits (2 digits) of the initial value "30" for the additional period for notification. A number ("1") smaller than the number ("3") to be displayed is displayed.

Then, following the determination of the addition period by the main CPU 93, when the main CPU 93 determines "2" (push order bell) as the internal winning combination as the lottery flag C, the first stop operation among the plurality of display areas is performed. 19L, 19C stop buttons for stopping the combination of symbols corresponding to the case of the correct answer of the push order bell on the effective line (the combination of symbols corresponding to the "bell" in the symbol combination table (FIGS. 10 to 12)). , The numbers displayed in the display areas 11L, 11C, 11R corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R provided corresponding to 19R are replaced with the numbers displayed in another area 11D.

In the first stop operation, the display area corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R provided corresponding to the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R for stopping the combination of predetermined symbols on the effective line is the additional period for notification. When the display area (left area 11L) displays a number corresponding to a digit (third digit) larger than the number of digits (2 digits) of the initial value of, it is larger than the number of digits of the initial value of the additional period for notification. The number corresponding to the digit is replaced with a number ("1") larger than the originally displayed number ("0"). Therefore, the player can have the expectation that the additional period may be significantly extended when the push order combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and in fact, the notification mode by the notification means can be changed. By changing, you can get the impression that the addition period has been greatly extended, and the fun of the game will increase.

On the other hand, in the first stop operation, the display area corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R provided corresponding to the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R for stopping the combination of predetermined symbols on the effective line is notified. When the display area (middle area 11C) displays a number corresponding to the same number of digits (second digit) as the initial value of the additional period (2 digits), the liquid crystal display device 11 is displayed with "inside". Along with the display of "press", the number ("3") corresponding to the same number of digits as the initial value of the additional period for notification is replaced with a number ("1") smaller than the originally displayed number. Therefore, as the game progresses, the discrepancy between the actual number of additional games and the number of additional games for notification can be suppressed to a low level.

In addition, in the liquid crystal display device 11, the effect of extending the addition period is performed by changing a number corresponding to a digit larger than the initial value of the notification addition period, so that the player can extend the addition period. I get the impression that it has extended significantly. On the other hand, in the liquid crystal display device 11, the effect of shortening the addition period is performed by changing the number corresponding to the same number of digits as the initial value of the notification addition period, so that the player can use the addition period. Compared to the extension of, the impression is that it is small compared to the degree of decrease in the additional period.

<Status confirmation function>
When the game store closes, if the game status stored inside is not updated and is left unchanged, the game status at that stage will be carried over to the next business day. For example, the game situation stored inside is advantageous for the player, such as between so-called bonus flags, during the omen, during the chance zone entry, and with a high probability that it is easy to win a specific internal winning role. , It will give a favorable situation to the player who plays immediately after the opening of the store on the next business day. For amusement stores, we would like to avoid the appearance of many players who enjoy the above-mentioned advantageous situations in terms of store management.

When the pachislot machine 1 recovers from a power failure for a predetermined time or longer (for example, when the game store is opened) in order to prevent the game information (number of digested games, etc.) from being deferred when the game store is opened. It has been proposed that the same initialization process as that performed when the setting change command is received is automatically performed when the power is turned on.

However, considering the operation of the store, it is desired to give the player the merit of playing the game immediately after the store opens and to operate the store with a high occupancy rate immediately after the store opens. In that sense, it is preferable to leave a manual element that allows the game store to select a game machine to be initialized and a game machine not to be initialized, instead of initializing all the game machines uniformly.

That said, the initialization process is a heavy burden for the staff of the amusement store, and it is desirable to reduce the burden on the initialization process as much as possible.

Therefore, when a specific operation including the operation of the door key provided on the door that can be opened and closed is performed, it is easy to win the internal winning role for a specific internal winning role, such as between bonus flags, during the omen, during the chance zone entry, etc. When the game information is not the initial value, a notification means for notifying that fact may be provided.

For example, in the liquid crystal display device 11, the speaker groups 65L, 65R, etc., when a specific operation (an operation of twisting the door key while pressing the MAX bet button 21) is performed, when the predetermined game information is not the initial value (the game state is the chance zone). , ART game state, or bonus state, when the front mode is either high-speed short or high-speed long, or when the back mode is either small lottery, lottery, large lottery, or special. ), Notification according to the setting change suggestion effect data is executed (see FIG. 162).

The specific operation includes an operation of a door key provided on a door that can be opened and closed (see FIG. 160). Since the player cannot operate the door key, the player cannot perform the above-mentioned specific operation and receive the notification according to the setting change suggestion effect data. This can prevent a particular player from gaining an advantage.

In addition, the clerk of the game store basically changes the set value of the pachi-slot machine 1 that has been notified by the liquid crystal display device 11 or the speaker groups 65L, 65R, etc., and the game information stored in the main RAM 95. It suffices to initialize the above and set it to the initial value, and since it is not necessary to initialize the game information for all the pachislot machines 1, the burden of the above initialization can be reduced.

In addition, instead of uniformly initializing the game information for all the pachislot machines 1 notified by the liquid crystal display device 11, the speaker groups 65L, 65R, etc., the pachislot machine 1 that initializes and the pachislot machine that does not initialize There is a manual element that allows the game store to select the machine 1 and the machine 1. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the merit of playing the game immediately after the store opens, and it is possible to increase the occupancy rate of the store immediately after the store opens.

<Initial ART game number hiding function>
So far, various measures have been taken to notify the number of additional games of ART. For example, in the ART mode, there is a production method in which the number of additional games is notified for each additional opportunity of the number of games, and the number of additional games is not notified for each additional opportunity of the number of games, but collectively at the end of the ART mode. It has been proposed to provide an effect method for notifying and allow the player to arbitrarily select these effect methods.

Further, for example, in a unit game in a special game state, whether or not to execute a privilege granting effect that grants a privilege when the timing of the stop operation for the variable display of the symbol in the display column is within the corresponding predetermined time range. When the number of bonus-giving effect determining means that can determine the predetermined number of additional unit games of the notification game as a privilege and the predetermined number of additional unit games determined by the privilege-giving effect determining means are less than or equal to the specified number of additional unit games. In some cases, the specific information suggesting the predetermined number of additional unit games is not notified, and when the predetermined number of additional unit games is larger than the specified number of additional unit games, the predetermined number of additional unit games is suggested. A game machine including a means for executing an addition number suggestion effect for notifying specific information has been proposed.

However, if the "specified number of additional unit games", which is the standard for notification by the addition number suggestion effect execution means, is large, the notification by the addition number suggestion effect execution means is rarely performed, so that the interest of the game is not necessarily enhanced. I can't say. On the other hand, in order to increase the frequency of notification by the addition number suggestion effect execution means, if the "specified number of additional unit games" that is the standard of notification by the addition number suggestion effect execution means is reduced, the notification by the addition number suggestion effect execution means is made. The value of the game is reduced, and this also cannot be said to enhance the interest of the game. Therefore, after increasing the "specified number of additional unit games" that is the standard for notification by the addition number suggestion effect execution means, it is still possible to perform notification by the addition number suggestion effect execution means at a high frequency. Is required to be provided.

In order to solve this problem, the main CPU 93 of the pachi-slot machine 1 determines whether to grant ART, and if determined, makes it possible to shift to an ART gaming state in which ART can be granted. Then, in the ART gaming state, an additional period indicating the degree of extension of the ART period is determined, and when determined, additional zones 1 to 3 for extending the ART period are provided.

Here, for the first addition zone 3, the addition period determined by the main CPU 93 (the "50" game added by the processing of S1512 in FIG. 164 and the number of addition games determined by the lottery of S291) is added. While being added as a number and stored in the ART game number counter provided in the sub RAM 103, the liquid crystal display device 11 and the like have an additional period of 50 games, which is shorter than the additional period determined by the main CPU 93. An effect is executed according to the additional notification effect data (S1634 in FIG. 170), and the ART game number unnotified counter provided in the sub RAM 103 is displayed by the liquid crystal display device 11 from the addition period actually determined by the main CPU 93. The difference obtained by subtracting the period notified as the additional period (“50 games” in the modified example 10) is stored as the unannounced additional period.

For the second and subsequent additional zones, regardless of the type of additional zone, the additional period determined by the main CPU 93 is added and stored in the ART game number counter provided in the sub RAM 103, while the number of additional games is stored. When the special notification flag is on, the additional period determined by the main CPU 93 is not notified by the liquid crystal display device 11 or the like, and is stored in the ART game number unnotified counter as an unnotified additional period (S1614 in FIG. 169, S1637 in FIG. 170).

Then, the liquid crystal display device 11 or the like notifies that 100 games have been added for the ART period when the unnotified addition period stored in the ART game number unnotified counter reaches 100 games or more (FIG. 169). S1616, S1639 in FIG. 170).

According to such a pachislot machine 1, at least at the first time when the addition zone is set, the unnotification addition period can be reliably stored in the ART game number unnotification counter. Therefore, even if the reference period for notification in the liquid crystal display device 11 or the like is set to a relatively long period of 100 games, the unnotified addition period is added to the ART game number unnotified counter at the first time when the addition zone is set. Compared to conventional pachislot machines that cannot be said to be reliably memorized, the frequency of unreported addition periods of 100 games increases. Even if the reference period for notification on the liquid crystal display device 11 or the like is set to a relatively long period, it is possible to frequently notify that the ART period has been added, which enhances the interest of the game. Is possible.

<Game after ART>
For a game machine having an ART function, at the time of setting change and the end of the ART game by the limiter, the mode selection lottery means uses the mode selection lottery table composed of the same type of data to select the ART transition lottery of the notification lottery means. It is proposed to select a mode. According to such a pachislot machine, after an advantageous state for the player such as the end of the AT game by the limiter occurs, the AT transition lottery mode is selected by the same process as when the setting is changed. Therefore, for example, when the setting is changed. A more advantageous ART transition lottery mode is selected at the end of the AT game, and the player is given an excessive expectation that the right of the ART game will be re-granted by the notification lottery means in a short period of time after the ART game is completed. It is possible to prevent it from burning.

However, with such a pachislot machine, there is a possibility that the interest of the game after the end of the ART game will be diminished.

Therefore, when a plurality of modes (low accuracy, high accuracy short, high accuracy long) having different expectations for transition to ART are provided and the value of the ART profit granting counter becomes 3000 or more in the main CPU 93 (S1734 in FIG. 174). (If YES in the process of), set the limiter operation flag to on (S1735 in FIG. 174), and update the mode information to the "low accuracy" mode with the lowest expectation of transition to ART (S1752 in FIG. 175). .. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being overly expected to shift to ART again in a short period of time in the game after the profit given in ART reaches 3000 medals.

Subsequently, the main CPU 93 refers to the table mode transition lottery number determination table (FIGS. 21 and 172) and the table mode transition lottery table (FIG. 22) from the current mode (low probability mode) to another mode (FIG. 21). Decide whether to update to high accuracy short or high accuracy long). At that time, in the table mode transition lottery number determination table (FIG. 172) referred to when the limiter is activated, unlike other table mode transition lottery number determination tables (FIG. 21), the table mode transition lottery number " 9 ”is selected. Then, in the table mode transition lottery table (FIG. 22), the table mode transition lottery number "9" is another table mode transition lottery number "0" to "2", "5" to "8", Compared to "10" and "11", the update expectation for updating to the expectation mode (high accuracy short, high accuracy long) in which the transition expectation from the normal gaming state to the ART gaming state is large is set higher. Therefore, the main CPU 93 determines to update from the low accuracy mode with low update expectation to the high mode (expected mode: high accuracy short, high accuracy long) with high frequency. If the mode is updated to the expected mode, the transition expectation that the game state shifts to the ART game state will increase, and as a result, it is possible to continue to maintain the interest of the game even after the end of granting the privilege by ART. It becomes.

Therefore, according to such a pachislot machine 1, the game is prevented from giving the player an excessive expectation that the privilege will be re-granted in a short period of time, and even after the game in which the privilege is given is completed. It is possible to provide a pachislot machine 1 capable of maintaining the interest of.

[Appendix 1]
The pachislot machine 1 of Appendix 1 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") by a player and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-178510, in recent years, a plurality of cells are provided to give a predetermined effect to each of the plurality of cells, and an image corresponding to the effect given to the cells is provided. Is known as a game machine that gives a game like sugoroku by displaying on the square.

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
According to such a game machine, since it is possible to imagine the subsequent development of the game from the image displayed on the square, it is possible to improve the interest of the game, but the displayed image is not suitable for the player. If it was profitable, there was a risk that the interest of the game would decline, and further improvement was required.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having game performance that does not impair the interest of the game.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a symbol display means) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. , The reel display window 4), the start operation detecting means for detecting the start operation by the player (for example, the main control circuit 91, the start switch 79), and the reel based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Based on the symbol changing means (for example, main control circuit 91, stepping motor) that changes the symbol by rotating and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, the internal winning is a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control circuit 91) for determining a combination, and a stop operation detecting means (for example, a main control circuit 91) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel. The rotation of the reel is stopped based on the control circuit 91, the stop switch board 80), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. When the reel stop control means (for example, main control circuit 91, stepping motor) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means and the reel stop control means stop the fluctuation of the symbol. , A winning determination means for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won, based on the combination of symbols stopped on the effective line provided on the symbol display means (for example, One reward information from the main control circuit 91) and a plurality of reward information (for example, event mass) having different rewards associated with each other, each of a plurality of games from the current game to the game a predetermined number of times ahead. When the grant condition is satisfied in the reward information setting means (for example, the main control circuit 91) set for the game and the game in which the reward information is set, the reward according to the reward information set for the game is given. The reward giving means to be given (for example, the main control circuit 91), the individual images provided in association with each of the plurality of reward information (for example, the display mass "enemy", etc.), and all of the plurality of reward information. A storage means (for example, a rom cartridge board 86) for storing a plurality of images including a common image (for example, a display mass “unknown”) commonly provided in the reels, and the reward information setting means are used for the plurality of games. Display that displays a predetermined image based on multiple reward information set for The display means includes means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11, a sub-control circuit 101) and an operation receiving means (for example, an operation button 22) for receiving a predetermined operation, and the display means uses the operation receiving means to perform the predetermined operation. Is not accepted, an individual image corresponding to the reward information set by the reward information setting means is displayed in association with each of the plurality of times of the game, and the predetermined operation is performed by the operation reception means. When accepted, the common image is displayed in association with each of the plurality of times of the game regardless of the reward information set by the reward information setting means.

According to such a game machine, when reward information is set for a plurality of times of games by the reward information setting means, basically, individual images corresponding to the set rewards are displayed. By displaying such an individual image, the player can imagine the subsequent development of the game, which is preferable. Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when a predetermined operation is accepted, a common image that is common regardless of the reward is displayed instead of an individual image according to the reward to be given. As a result, even if reward information that is not advantageous to the player is set for the subsequent game, the player cannot imagine the subsequent game from the displayed common image. .. As described above, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the reward information is set, it is possible to switch between an individual image in which the set reward can be easily grasped and a common image in which the set reward is difficult to grasp. It is possible to display a display that suits the player's taste, and it is possible to realize a playability that does not impair the interest of the game.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the predetermined operation is received by the operation receiving means, the display means displays in association with the current game among the plurality of times of the game. The common image is switched to an individual image corresponding to the reward information set for the current game and displayed.

According to such a game machine, for games after the current game, it is difficult to grasp the reward given by displaying the common image, while for the current game, the common image is used as an individual image. By switching to and displaying, it is easy to grasp the reward to be given. In this way, the reward content can be hidden by the common image until immediately before, and the reward content can be grasped by the individual image immediately before, so that the playability of the current game can be enhanced. As a result, even if the subsequent development of the game is not preferable for the player, the gameability as a whole can be enhanced without the player grasping the subsequent development of the game.

[Appendix 2]
The pachislot machine 1 of Appendix 2 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") by a player and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-178510, in recent years, a plurality of cells are provided to give a predetermined effect to each of the plurality of cells, and an image corresponding to the effect given to the cells is provided. Is known as a game machine that gives a game like sugoroku by displaying on the square.

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
According to such a game machine, since it is possible to imagine the subsequent development of the game from the image displayed on the square, it is possible to improve the interest of the game, but the displayed image is not suitable for the player. If it was profitable, there was a risk that the interest of the game would decline, and further improvement was required.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having game performance that does not impair the interest of the game.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a normal gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state as a state for playing a game. There are a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a reel display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. ), The start operation detecting means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the start switch 79) for detecting the start operation by the player, and the reel is rotated based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Based on the symbol changing means (for example, main control circuit 91, stepping motor) that changes the symbol and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, the internal winning combination is determined with a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations. Winning combination determining means (for example, main control circuit 91) and stop operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 91, stop) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel. The symbol display by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the switch board 80), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. The reel stop control means (for example, main control circuit 91, stepping motor) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the means, and the symbol display means when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means. Winning determination means (for example, main control circuit 91) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won a prize based on the combination of symbols stopped on the effective line provided on the reels. And, in the advantageous state, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the reward game starting means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for starting the reward game (for example, the additional zone 1) for giving a reward, and the reward game during the reward game , One game control information from the game control information (for example, event mass) including a plurality of reward information having different rewards associated with each other, each of a plurality of games from the current game to the game a predetermined number of times ahead. When the setting means (for example, the main control circuit 91) set for the game and the game in which the game control information is set satisfy the granting conditions, the game is played based on the game control information set for the game. With the reward game control means to control (for example, the main control circuit 91) , And the reward game control means is a game in which the first game control information (for example, the event mass “red”) is set, a specific number of times (for example, the number of guaranteed games) after the start of the reward game. When a predetermined combination (for example, a replay or less winning combination) is determined as an internal winning combination after the game is played, the reward game is terminated, while a specific number of games are performed after the reward game is started. Even if a predetermined combination is previously determined as an internal winning combination, the reward game is continued without ending, and the grant condition (for example, the event mass "blue 1") is set in the game. For example, if the winning condition of bell or more is satisfied, the duration of the ongoing advantageous state is extended, and the grant condition (for example, bell or more) is given in the game in which the second reward information (for example, event mass “Character 4”) is set. When the winning) is satisfied, the reset right of the reward game (for example, resurrection stock) is granted, and the reward game starting means is in a situation where the reset right is granted, and the first game control information reward information. When the reward game is completed based on the above, the reward game is restarted.

According to such a game machine, since the game control information is set for a plurality of games during the reward game, the player can imagine the subsequent development of the game, which is preferable. Further, in the game machine according to the present invention, even if the game is set with the first game control information that triggers the end of the reward game, from the start of the reward game to the play of a specific number of games. The reward game continues without ending. As a result, even when disadvantageous game control information (first game control information) is set, the reward game will continue during a specific number of games (that is, the guarantee period). Even in a situation where the later game becomes a disadvantageous development, the disadvantageous development can be avoided within the warranty period, and a certain degree of interest can be guaranteed. In addition, even after the warranty period has expired, if the reset right, which is the reward according to the second reward information, has been granted, the reward game will be restarted at the end, so that the interest of the game will be enhanced. It can be further enhanced.

Further, in the game machine according to the present invention, at the start of the reward game, a plurality of mode information (for example, an additional zone level) having different selection expectations of the game control information set for each of the plurality of games. The reward information setting means further includes a mode setting means for setting one of the mode information, and the reward information setting means provides a second mode information (for example, an additional zone level 3) when the first mode information (for example, an additional zone level 3) is set. The first game control information is selected as the one game control information with a lower probability than when the additional zone level 1) is set, and the mode setting means is the reward game based on the reset right. When resuming, the first mode information is set as the one mode information with a higher probability than when the reward game is started based on the predetermined start condition.

According to such a game machine, when the reward game is restarted based on the reset right, the first mode information is set with a higher probability than when the reward game is started based on a predetermined start condition. Since this first mode information is mode information having a low probability of selecting the first game control information that triggers the end of the reward game, when the reward game is restarted based on the reset right, the predetermined start condition is met. It becomes more difficult (easier to continue) to end the reward game than when the reward game is started based on the above. As a result, if the reset right has been granted, not only will the reward game be restarted at the end, but the reward game itself to be restarted will be easier to continue than usual, further enhancing the interest of the game. Can be done.

[Appendix 3]
The pachislot machine 1 of Appendix 3 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") by a player and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-178510, in recent years, a plurality of cells are provided to give a predetermined effect to each of the plurality of cells, and an image corresponding to the effect given to the cells is provided. Is known as a game machine that gives a game like sugoroku by displaying on the square.

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
According to such a game machine, since it is possible to imagine the subsequent development of the game from the image displayed on the square, it is possible to improve the interest of the game, but the displayed image is not suitable for the player. If it was profitable, there was a risk that the interest of the game would decline, and further improvement was required.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having game performance that does not impair the interest of the game.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a normal gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state as a state for playing a game. There are a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a reel display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. ), The start operation detecting means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the start switch 79) for detecting the start operation by the player, and the reel is rotated based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Based on the symbol changing means (for example, main control circuit 91, stepping motor) that changes the symbol and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, the internal winning combination is determined with a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations. Winning combination determining means (for example, main control circuit 91) and stop operation detecting means (for example, main control circuit 91, stop) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel. The symbol display by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the switch board 80), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. The reel stop control means (for example, main control circuit 91, stepping motor) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the means, and the symbol display means when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means. Winning determination means (for example, main control circuit 91) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won a prize based on the combination of symbols stopped on the effective line provided on the reels. And, when the first start condition (for example, the stock of the additional zone 1) is satisfied, the first reward game starting means (for example, the main control circuit) for starting the first reward game (for example, the additional zone 1) for giving a reward is started. 91) and the second start condition (for example, the stock of the additional zone 2) are satisfied, and the second reward game (for example, the additional zone 2) in which a larger amount of reward is given as compared with the first reward game is started. One from a plurality of reward information (event mass) having different rewards associated with the second reward game starting means (for example, the main control circuit 91) and the first reward game or the second reward game. Reward information for each of multiple games from the current game to the first game ahead When the reward information setting means (for example, the main control circuit 91) and the game in which the reward information is set satisfy the granting conditions, the reward according to the reward information set for the game is granted. The reward giving means (for example, the main control circuit 91) is provided, and the reward giving means has a predetermined combination (for example, a bell) in a game in which the first reward information (for example, the event mass “back”) is set. When the above) is determined as the internal winning combination, the transfer right (for example, the stock of the additional zone 2) for shifting from the first reward game to the second reward game is granted, and the second reward information is set. When a predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination in the game being played, a rewriting right to rewrite the set reward information to the first reward information (for example, a right to rewrite to the back mass according to the number of back mass conversions) is granted. When the rewriting right is granted, the reward information setting means rewrites the reward information set for the second number of games after the next game to the first reward information, and the second reward. The game starting means is characterized in that the second reward game is started when the transition right is granted.

According to such a game machine, reward information is set for a plurality of games during the reward game, so that the player can imagine the subsequent development of the game, which is preferable. Here, in the game machine according to the present invention, when the grant condition is satisfied in the game in which the second reward information is set, the reward information set for the subsequent second number of games is used as the first reward information. When the grant condition is satisfied in the game in which the first reward information is set, the second reward game in which more rewards can be expected is started. Therefore, if the reward according to the second reward information can be obtained, the degree of expectation for transition to the second reward game, in which a larger reward can be expected, will increase in the subsequent second number of games. Become. As a result, even if the subsequent development of the game is disadvantageous for the player, the disadvantageous situation can be avoided by obtaining the reward according to the second reward information, so that the interest of the game is guaranteed. Will be done. At this time, since the granting condition for obtaining the reward according to the reward information is that the predetermined winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the reward according to the reward information can always be obtained as compared with the case where the reward can be obtained according to the reward information. The frequency of rewriting (frequency of appearance of the second reward information) can be increased, and the interest of the game can be further enhanced.

Further, in the game machine according to the present invention, the reward information setting means sets the second reward information for each third number of games in the first notification game.

According to such a game machine, the second reward information is set at a predetermined interval (every third number of times) during the first notification game, so that the first reward information is periodically sent during the first notification game. Opportunity to rewrite. If a reward according to the second reward information can be obtained in this regular chance, the expectation of transition to the second reward game in which a larger reward can be expected will increase in the subsequent games. Therefore, the fun of the game can be further enhanced.

[Appendix 4]
The pachislot machine 1 of Appendix 4 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") by a player and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

Further, in recent years, there are known game machines that notify information that is advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so as not to miss the role determined as the internal winning combination. It should be noted that the notification of information that gives the player an advantage in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is called AT (assist time), and has an AT function. Game machines are called AT machines and ART machines. Regarding such an AT machine (ART machine), Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-050611 discloses a gaming machine provided with an additional special zone for adding the duration of AT.

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
In a game machine equipped with such an additional special zone, the duration of AT can be extended during the additional special zone, so that the interest during AT can be improved, but during the additional special zone. When other advantageous states such as bonuses start, the additional special zone may be interrupted, and there is a problem that the situation where the interest is improving is overwhelmed.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine that does not impair the interest during the additional game.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a notification game state (for example, an ART game state) for notifying information on a stop operation advantageous to the player and a normal state (for example, a normal game state) for not notifying, as a state for playing a game. A game machine having a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a symbol display means) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. The reel is rotated based on the reel display window 4), the start operation detecting means for detecting the start operation by the player (for example, the main control circuit 91, the start switch 79), and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Based on the symbol changing means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the stepping motor) that changes the symbol by causing the symbol and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, an internal winning combination is performed with a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control circuit 91) for determining the above, and a stop operation detecting means (for example, a main control) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel. The rotation of the reel is stopped based on the circuit 91, the stop switch board 80), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. When the reel stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the stepping motor) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means and the reel stop control means stop the fluctuation of the symbol. A winning determination means (for example, a main winning combination) for determining whether or not an internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won a prize based on a combination of symbols stopped on an effective line provided in the symbol display means. When it is determined by the control circuit 91) and the winning determination means that a predetermined combination (for example, a combination related to the bonus) has won a prize, the bonus starting means (for example, the main control circuit 91) that starts the bonus state and the bonus. When the number of game media exceeding the specified number is given during the state, the bonus ending means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for ending the bonus state and the predetermined start condition (for example, the stock of the additional zone 2) are set. When satisfied, the addition start means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for starting the addition state (for example, the addition zone 2) for extending the duration of the notification gaming state and the bonus state are started during the addition state. And to end the additional state When the additional control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) that continues without any additional control and the medal-giving combination to which the game medium is given during the additional state are determined as the internal winning combination, the duration of the notified gaming state is extended. The internal winning combination determining means is provided with an additional control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) and a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11 and a sub control circuit 101) for displaying an effect screen according to the current state. Determines the medal-giving combination as an internal winning combination with a higher probability than in a state other than the bonus state during the bonus state, and the display means is in the bonus state started in a state other than the additional state. , A bonus effect screen according to the bonus state, displaying a bonus effect screen displaying the remaining number of payouts obtained by subtracting the number of game media given during the bonus state from the specified number, and during the additional state, The additional effect screen according to the additional state is displayed, and during the bonus state started during the additional state, the specified number of game media are given while maintaining the additional effect screen displayed during the additional state. It is characterized by displaying the number of games required to be played.

According to such a game machine, even if the bonus state is started during the addition state, the addition state is continued without ending. Here, in the bonus state, the medal-giving role that triggers the extension of the duration during the addition state is determined as the internal winning combination with a high probability, so the bonus state that starts during the addition state is changed from the normal addition state. Can also be used as a special additional state in which the duration is easily extended. As a result, the bonus state in the added state can be made into a more advantageous state, so that it is possible to further enhance the interest in the added state without pouring water into the situation as in the past.
Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the bonus effect screen peculiar to the bonus state is displayed during the bonus state started in the state other than the addition state, while the bonus state started during the addition state is displayed. In order to maintain the additional effect screen according to the additional state, it is possible to grasp at a glance that the additional state is continuing. At this time, the bonus effect screen displays the remaining number of payouts up to the specified number that triggers the end of the bonus state, while the additional effect screen displays the number of games required for the specified number of game media to be granted. indicate. In this way, not only the effect screen is made different between the bonus effect screen and the additional effect screen, but also the display of the end condition of the bonus state is made different from the normal bonus state, so that the bonus in the normal bonus state and the added state is different. It is possible to differentiate the display from the state and give a special playability to the bonus state in the added state, and as a result, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, in a state other than the additional state, the progress of the game is temporarily stopped at the start and end of the bonus state, while the bonus state is started in the additional state. A game control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) that does not stop the progress of the game at the end of the game is further provided.

According to such a game machine, in a state other than the additional state, the progress of the game is temporarily stopped at the start and end of the bonus state, so that a period of the start effect and the end effect of the bonus state can be provided. Diversity of production can be ensured. On the other hand, at the start and end of the bonus state during the bonus state, the progress of the game is not stopped, so that the continuity of the added state before and after the bonus state can be ensured. By controlling the progress of the game according to the situation in which the bonus state starts in this way, various game characteristics can be realized.

[Appendix 5]
The pachislot machine 1 of Appendix 5 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") by a player and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

Further, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-261547 discloses a gaming machine having a plurality of continuous effects for notifying whether or not a transition to a state advantageous to the player and a privilege to be advantageous to the player are given. Has been done. In such a game machine, a ratio to be selected for a plurality of continuous effects is predetermined, and based on this ratio, a continuous effect with a high degree of expectation and a continuous effect with a low degree of expectation can be provided. It is expected that the interest of the game will improve.

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in such a game machine, continuous production tends to be performed as the experience of the game increases, so that it is possible to distinguish between continuous production with high expectation and continuous production with low expectation to some extent. Therefore, when the continuous production with low expectation is executed, the player not only plays the game without any expectation, but also when the continuous production with high expectation is executed, the player plays the game without any expectation. Contrary to the expectation, when advantageous benefits are not given, there is a problem that the interest of the game is greatly reduced.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing a decrease in interest when a result is disadvantageous to a player.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a symbol display means) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. , The reel display window 4), the start operation detecting means for detecting the start operation by the player (for example, the main control circuit 91, the start switch 79), and the reel based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Based on the symbol changing means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the stepping motor) that changes the symbol by rotating and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, the internal winning is performed with a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control circuit 91) for determining a combination, and a stop operation detecting means (for example, a main control circuit 91) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel. The rotation of the reel is stopped based on the control circuit 91, the stop switch board 80), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. When the reel stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the stepping motor) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means and the reel stop control means stop the fluctuation of the symbol. , A winning determination means (for example,) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won a prize based on the combination of symbols stopped on the effective line provided in the symbol display means. The main control circuit 91), a point accumulating means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for accumulating internal points (for example, the back mode) when the result of the game becomes a disadvantageous result for the player, and the point accumulating When the internal points accumulated in the means reach a predetermined value, the privilege giving means (for example, the main control circuit 91) that gives a privilege advantageous to the player (for example, winning the ART lottery at the time of winning the bonus) and the points. The effect executing means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11, the sub-control circuit 101) for executing the effect (for example, the back mode absorption effect) suggesting that the internal points are accumulated in the storage means is provided. Can execute the effect when the result of the game becomes at least a part of the results that triggers the point accumulating means to accumulate the internal points, and the result of the game is the point. Accumulation means accumulates internal points It is characterized in that the effect can be executed when the result is different from the result that triggers the effect (for example, when the continuous effect fails).

According to such a game machine, when the internal points accumulated when the result is disadvantageous to the player reaches a predetermined value, a privilege advantageous to the player is given. At this time, when the internal points are accumulated, the effect suggesting that effect is executed. Therefore, even if the unfavorable results are continuous, depending on the accumulated amount of the internal points suggested by the effect, after that. It is possible to have a sense of expectation for the game, and it is possible to reduce the decline in the interest of the game due to the unfavorable result. In particular, by executing the effect that suggests that the internal points have been accumulated at a timing different from the opportunity for accumulating the internal points, the effect is executed at various timings different from the timing at which the internal points are actually accumulated. It is possible to give diversity to the production. This point can be particularly expected in recent game machines, in which the main side must strictly manage the payout. In other words, when the internal points reach a predetermined value, a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given. Therefore, the accumulation of internal points is related to the payout and must be managed by the main side, but the capacity of the main side is limited. Therefore, it is necessary to suppress the opportunity to accumulate internal points. In this respect, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, since the effect can be executed at a different opportunity from the opportunity for accumulating internal points, the capacity on the main side (that is, the opportunity for accumulating internal points) can be suppressed while suppressing the effect. The production can be executed at various occasions, and the production can be made diverse.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the effect executing means does not perform the effect even though the point accumulating means has accumulated the internal points, the accumulated internal points are accumulated and calculated as a difference point. The difference calculating means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) is further provided, and the effect executing means is based on the difference point calculated by the difference calculating means when the result of the game becomes a result that can execute the effect. The effect is executed, and the difference calculation means clears the difference point when the effect is executed by the effect executing means.

In such a game machine, when the effect is not executed even though the internal points are accumulated, the internal points are accumulated, so that the internal points accumulated between the effects can be calculated as the difference points. .. When executing the production at a different opportunity than the opportunity for accumulating internal points as described above, if the internal points of the previous game and the internal points of this game are compared, the internal points accumulated so far can be compared. Cannot be properly suggested. In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, since the effect suggesting that the internal points have been accumulated is executed based on the accumulated internal points accumulated since the previous effect execution, it has been accumulated so far. The internal point can be suggested appropriately.

[Appendix 6]
The pachislot machine 1 of Appendix 6 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") by a player and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

Further, in recent years, a game machine in which a player selects a character appearing in a production from a plurality of characters and performs a production using the selected character has also been proposed. , A game machine in which a character and a costume of the character can be selected according to the operation of the player is disclosed.

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
According to such a game machine, the characters that appear can be set (customized) according to the player's taste, so that the interest of the game can be improved and the game can be made hard to get bored. However, if the player is allowed to freely select the costume of the character, there is a risk that settings that do not match the specifications of the game machine or the motif of the character may be made, which may damage the image of the game machine or the character. ..

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine in which a character can be customized without damaging a unique image.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a symbol display means (for example, a reel display window 4) for displaying a part of a plurality of symbols and a symbol changing means (for example, a main control) for changing the symbol based on the establishment of a start condition. Circuit 91, stepping motor), internal lottery means (for example, main control circuit 91) that performs internal lottery based on the establishment of the start condition, and stop the fluctuation of the symbol based on the lottery result of the internal lottery means. Based on the combination of the stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the stepping motor) to be caused, and the symbol displayed on the symbol display means when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the stop control means, the game A game control means for controlling the progress (for example, a main control circuit 91), a character determination means for determining one character from a plurality of types of characters (for example, a sub control circuit 101), and a plurality of characters related to a display mode of the characters. First display mode determining means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) for determining one first display mode information from the first display mode information (for example, accessories) based on a selection operation, and a character display mode. A second display mode in which one second display mode information is automatically determined based on or automatically from a plurality of second display mode information (for example, costumes) different from the first display mode information according to the above. The determining means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) and the character determined by the character determining means are subjected to the first display mode information and the second display mode determined by the first display mode determining means and the second display mode determining means. A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11, a sub-control circuit 101) for displaying in a mode corresponding to a combination with information, and the first display mode information can be selected in combination with the first display mode information. The combination defining means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) that defines the type of the second display mode information is provided, and the combination defining means is limited to the specific second display mode information among the plurality of second display mode information. Is defined as the second display mode information that can be combined with the specific first display mode information, and the second display mode determining means uses the first display mode determining means to provide the specific first display mode information. Once determined, the specific second display mode information is automatically determined as the first second display mode information.

According to such a game machine, the player can select a combination of the first display mode information (accessory) and the second display mode information (costume) with respect to the display mode of the character, so that the character to appear can be selected. It can be customized to suit the player's taste. At this time, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the second display mode information that can be combined with the first display mode information is defined in advance, and only the specific second display mode information is defined as information that can be combined. When the first display mode information (specific first display mode information) is selected by the player, the only specific second display mode information that can be combined is automatically determined. As a result, combinations that may damage the image of the game machine or the character can be made non-selectable, and the character can be customized without damaging the unique image. Further, when the specific first display mode information is selected by the player, the only specific second display mode information that can be combined is automatically determined, so that the player does not have to take time and effort and is unique. It is possible to customize the character without damaging the image of.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, in the second display mode determining means, the predetermined second display mode information different from the specific second display mode information is the first second display mode based on the selection operation. When the specific first display mode information is determined by the first display mode determining means when the information is determined, the specific second display mode information is automatically used as the first second display mode information. It is characterized by making a decision.

According to such a game machine, even if the second display mode information has already been determined by the player, the first display mode information (specific first display mode information) is subsequently selected by the player. If so, the only specific second display mode information that can be combined is automatically determined. Even if the player's selection is accepted in this way, the display mode information that can be combined is automatically switched to, so that the character can be customized without taking the trouble of the player and without damaging the unique image. Becomes possible.

[Appendix 7]
The pachislot machine 1 of Appendix 7 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") by a player and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

Further, in recent years, a game machine in which a player selects a character appearing in a production from a plurality of characters and performs a production using the selected character has also been proposed. , A game machine in which a character and a costume of the character can be selected according to the operation of the player is disclosed. According to such a game machine, the characters that appear can be set (customized) according to the player's taste, so that the interest of the game can be improved and the game can be made hard to get bored.

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, in order to further enhance the effect of customization, it is preferable to provide more options such as increasing the items that can be selected and increasing the types that can be selected within each item. In this regard, in the above-mentioned game machine, the player's selection operation is accepted via the operation buttons such as the cross key and the enter button, but in the game machine, the cross key and the enter button are additional operation units. Basically, the operability is poor, and there is a problem that the selection operation becomes troublesome as the number of choices increases.

Further, in recent years, in order to enable intuitive operation, a touch panel capable of touch operation may be provided in the game machine, but some players do not like such intuitive operation. There are many people, and because it is intuitive, there is a problem that it is difficult to convey the operation method by video or the like when the operation method cannot be understood intuitively.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of performing a selection operation by a method suitable for a player.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a symbol display means for displaying a part of a plurality of symbols (for example, a reel display window 4) and a symbol changing means for changing the symbol based on the establishment of a start condition (for example, a main control). Circuit 91, stepping motor), internal lottery means (for example, main control circuit 91) that performs internal lottery based on the establishment of the start condition, and stop the fluctuation of the icon based on the lottery result of the internal lottery means. Based on the combination of the stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the stepping motor) to be caused, and the symbol displayed on the symbol display means when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the stop control means, the game is played. A game control means for controlling the progress (for example, a main control circuit 91), a touch panel for receiving a touch operation for an icon (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11, a touch sensor 111), a movement operation for a selection cursor, and a selection of the selection cursor. An operation button (for example, an operation button 22) that accepts a decision operation for determining an icon to be displayed is provided, and an opened icon among a plurality of icons can be selected by the operation via the touch panel, but is not opened. The icon cannot be selected, and in the operation via the operation button, the selection cursor that moves based on the movement operation can select both the opened icon and the unopened icon.

According to such a game machine, the selection operation can be performed by both the operation via the touch panel and the operation via the operation buttons, so that the player performs the selection operation by the method preferred by himself / herself. be able to. In addition, it is possible to clarify that the unopened icon cannot be selected from a plurality of icons by making it impossible to select the unopened icon in the operation via the touch panel, that is, not responding even if the touch is made. it can. In addition, in the operation via the selection button, the unopened icon can also be selected with the selection cursor, that is, the selection cursor can be aligned, so that this unopened icon cannot be determined now but will be released in the future. It becomes clear that it can be decided.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, movement is performed based on a touch operation mode for determining one icon selected by a touch operation via the touch panel from a plurality of icons and a movement operation via the operation buttons. In a situation where the selection cursor selects one icon, the button operation mode for determining the one icon from a plurality of icons based on the determination operation via the operation button and the one operation mode for determining the one icon are determined. The operation mode determining means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) is further provided, and the operation mode determining means performs a movement operation or a determination operation via the operation buttons in a situation where the touch operation mode is determined as the operation mode. When the touch operation is accepted, the operation mode is switched from the touch operation mode to the button operation mode, and when the touch operation is received via the touch panel in a situation where the button operation mode is determined as the operation mode, the operation mode is changed. It is characterized by switching from the button operation mode to the touch operation mode.

According to such a game machine, the operation mode includes a touch operation mode in which one icon is determined by a touch operation on an icon, and a button operation mode in which one icon is determined by moving a selection cursor. Since these operation modes are automatically switched by accepting the operation corresponding to each operation mode (specifically, when a touch operation is received in the button operation mode, the button operation mode is switched to the touch operation mode, and the touch operation mode is selected. Sometimes when a button operation is accepted, the touch operation mode is switched to the button operation mode), and the operation mode can be easily switched, and the player can freely select the operation mode he / she prefers.

[Appendix 8]
The pachislot machine 1 of Appendix 8 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") by a player and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

Further, in recent years, a game machine in which a player selects a character appearing in a production from a plurality of characters and performs a production using the selected character has also been proposed. , A game machine in which a character and a costume of the character can be selected according to the operation of the player is disclosed. According to such a game machine, the characters that appear can be set (customized) according to the player's taste, so that the interest of the game can be improved and the game can be made hard to get bored.

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, in order to further enhance the effect of customization, it is preferable to provide more options such as increasing the items that can be selected and increasing the types that can be selected within each item. In this regard, in the above-mentioned game machine, the player's selection operation is accepted via the operation buttons such as the cross key and the enter button, but in the game machine, the cross key and the enter button are additional operation units. Basically, the operability is poor, and there is a problem that the selection operation becomes troublesome as the number of choices increases.

Further, in recent years, in order to enable intuitive operation, a touch panel capable of touch operation may be provided in the game machine, but some players do not like such intuitive operation. There are many people, and because it is intuitive, there is a problem that it is difficult to convey the operation method by video or the like when the operation method cannot be understood intuitively.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of performing a selection operation by a method suitable for a player.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a symbol display means for displaying a part of a plurality of symbols (for example, a reel display window 4) and a symbol changing means for changing the symbol based on the establishment of a start condition (for example, a main control). (Circuit 91, stepping motor), internal lottery means (for example, main control circuit 91) that performs internal lottery based on the establishment of the start condition, and stop the fluctuation of the icon based on the lottery result of the internal lottery means. Based on the combination of the stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the stepping motor) to be caused, and the symbol displayed on the symbol display means when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the stop control means, the game is played. A game control means for controlling the progress (for example, a main control circuit 91), a touch panel for receiving a touch operation for an icon (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11, a touch sensor 111), a movement operation for a selection cursor, and a selection of the selection cursor. An operation button (for example, an operation button 22) that accepts a decision operation for determining an icon to be selected is displayed in the first mode by a touch operation via the touch panel, and the icon selected by the selection cursor is displayed in the first mode. A display control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for displaying in a second aspect different from the first aspect is provided.

According to such a game machine, the selection operation can be performed by both the operation via the touch panel and the operation via the operation buttons, so that the player performs the selection operation by the method preferred by himself / herself. be able to. Further, by making the display mode of the selected icon different between the touch operation and the button operation, specifically, during the touch operation, the selected icon is displayed in the first mode (for example, with a touch ON effect). In the button operation mode, the selected icon is displayed in the second mode (for example, with a selection cursor), so that the difference between the two operations can be clarified.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, movement is performed based on a touch operation mode for determining one icon selected by a touch operation via the touch panel from a plurality of icons and a movement operation via the operation buttons. In a situation where the selection cursor selects one icon, the button operation mode for determining the one icon from a plurality of icons based on the determination operation via the operation button and the one operation mode for determining the one icon are determined. The operation mode determining means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) is further provided, and the operation mode determining means performs a movement operation or a determination operation via the operation buttons in a situation where the touch operation mode is determined as the operation mode. When the touch operation is accepted, the operation mode is switched from the touch operation mode to the button operation mode, and when the touch operation is received via the touch panel in a situation where the button operation mode is determined as the operation mode, the operation mode is changed. It is characterized by switching from the button operation mode to the touch operation mode.

According to such a game machine, the operation mode includes a touch operation mode in which one icon is determined by a touch operation on an icon, and a button operation mode in which one icon is determined by moving a selection cursor. Since these operation modes are automatically switched by accepting the operation corresponding to each operation mode (specifically, when a touch operation is received in the button operation mode, the button operation mode is switched to the touch operation mode, and the touch operation mode is selected. Sometimes when a button operation is accepted, the touch operation mode is switched to the button operation mode), and the operation mode can be easily switched, and the player can freely select the operation mode he / she prefers.

[Appendix 9]
The pachislot machine 1 of Appendix 9 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") by a player and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

Further, in recent years, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-207997, a gaming machine that cooperates with a mobile phone or a smartphone owned by a player is also known. In such a game machine, the result of the game is coded and displayed, and when the code is read by a mobile phone or the like, the read result of the game is stored in the server via the mobile phone. Then, when the next game is played, a password corresponding to the accumulated game result is issued from the server, and by inputting the password into the game machine, information such as the production history of the previous game is restored and continued. You can play the game from.

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, some players are not interested in taking over the production history from the previous game, and may be interested only in the result of the game in this game, and such a player does not need to take over. I find it bothersome to ask for the issuance and input of a password for the production history. Therefore, in recent years, for players who only aim to accumulate the results of this game without taking over the production history from the previous game, the password input is omitted and the accumulation of the results of the game is started. A game machine having a function of easy start has also been proposed.

However, if the password is omitted, the server does not need to be authenticated, so that anyone can easily start the password, which may be an unfavorable situation. Specifically, it is possible to set a simple start for a game machine that one does not play a game, and after another person plays a game on the game machine, the history of the game can be stolen later. , Further improvement was required for easy start.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of preventing an act of stealing the game history of another person.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a symbol display means for displaying a part of a plurality of symbols (for example, a reel display window 4) and a symbol changing means for changing the symbol based on the establishment of a start condition (for example, a main control). Circuit 91, stepping motor), internal lottery means (for example, main control circuit 91) that performs internal lottery based on the establishment of the start condition, and the movement of the symbol is stopped based on the lottery result of the internal lottery means. Based on the combination of the stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the stepping motor) to be caused, and the symbol displayed on the symbol display means when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the stop control means, the game is played. A game control means for controlling the progress (for example, the main control circuit 91), a history management means for managing the game history indicating the result of the game (for example, the sub control circuit 101), and the game history managed by the history management means. A first history screen (for example, the first page of the game history) that displays the first game history that is a part of the first game history, and a second history screen that displays a second game history that is different from the first game history (for example, the first page of the game history). A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11) for displaying a plurality of display screens including (the second page of the game history), a display control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for controlling the display of the display means, and the first Registration that accepts registration of a player who plays a game by the registration procedure of 1 (for example, a formal registration procedure) or a second registration procedure (for example, a simple registration procedure) that is simpler than the first registration procedure. A reception means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) is provided, and the display control means has both the first game history and the second game history when registration is received by the first registration procedure. While controlling the display of the display means so that the display means can be displayed, when registration is accepted by the second registration procedure, the first game history can be displayed and the second game history cannot be displayed. It is characterized in that the display of the display means is controlled as possible.

According to such a game machine, in order to accept the registration of the player who plays the game by the first registration procedure and the second registration procedure, which is simpler than the first registration procedure, the player officially takes the procedure. You can select and perform simple registration and simple registration that requires a simple procedure. In this case, if registration is accepted by the first registration procedure, both the first game history and the second game history can be displayed, while registration is accepted by the second registration procedure. Although the first game history can be displayed, the second game history cannot be displayed. As a result, when the simple registration is used, only a part of the game history can be viewed, so that it is possible to prevent the act of stealing the game results of another person by using the simple registration. In addition, for players who have taken the trouble to register by following the formal procedure, we will promote the use of formal registration by giving a privilege (display of the second game history) that does not directly affect the game. As a result, it is possible to attach to the game machine and promote the operation of the game machine.

[Appendix 10]
The pachislot machine 1 of Appendix 10 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") by a player and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057732, information advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing the internal winning combination, so as not to miss the role determined as the internal winning combination in recent years. Is known to the player. It should be noted that the notification of information that gives the player an advantage in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is called AT (assist time), and has an AT function. Game machines are called AT machines and ART machines.

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
According to such a game machine, superiority or inferiority occurs in the game with or without navigation, so that it is possible to realize a game property that cannot be obtained only by a simple lottery, but the player is premised on adopting the AT function. It is necessary to design so that you can enjoy the navigation without fail. However, it may not be possible to properly navigate when some kind of error occurs, and countermeasures for such cases are required.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine in which a player can surely enjoy navigation.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a symbol display means) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. , The reel display window 4), the main control unit (for example, the main control circuit 91) that controls the progress of the game, the sub-control unit (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) that controls the effect related to the game, and the effect related to the game. An effect executing means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11) to be executed, and the main control unit includes a start operation detecting means (for example, a main control circuit 91, a start switch 79) for detecting a start operation by a player. Based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, the symbol change means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the stepping motor) that changes the symbol by rotating the reel, and the start operation by the start operation detection means. Based on the detection, when the internal winning combination is determined, a plurality of symbol combinations including the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination can be stopped and displayed according to the order of the stop operation. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control circuit 91) that determines an internal winning combination from among the combinations with a predetermined probability, and a stop operation provided corresponding to the plurality of reels to stop each reel. The stop operation detecting means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the stop switch board 80) to be detected, the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. Based on this, the reel stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 91, the stepping motor) that stops the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel, and the reel stop control means. Whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won a prize based on the combination of the stopped symbols on the effective line provided in the symbol display means when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped. When the push order combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the winning determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) and the internal winning combination determining means, the first symbol combination is placed on the effective line. The instruction information determining means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for determining the instruction information (for example, the content of the main navigation) that uniquely indicates the order of the stop operations for displaying the stop display, and the instruction information determining means have been determined. To the instruction information notification means (for example, the information display 14) for notifying the instruction information and the sub-control unit. When the instruction information is the game information related to the progress result of the game and the instruction information is given by the instruction information determining means, the notification means (for example, the main control circuit 91) for notifying the game information including the instruction information. The sub-control unit includes, and the effect determining means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) that determines the effect to be executed by the effect executing means by lottery based on the game information acquired from the main control unit. The effect determination when the effect control means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) for executing the effect determined by the effect execution means and the instruction information are acquired from the main control unit. The effect determining means includes a determination means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) for determining whether or not the effect determined by the means is an effect corresponding to the instruction information acquired from the main control unit. When the determination means determines that the effect does not correspond to the instruction information, the determined effect is rewritten into an effect that notifies the order of the stop operations uniquely indicated by the instruction information. It is characterized by.

According to such a game machine, when the main (main control unit) side notifies the order of stop operations, the main control unit includes instruction information in the game information notified to the sub side (sub control unit). Notify game information. Since the sub-control unit determines the effect to be executed based on the game information acquired from the main side by lottery, if the game information includes instruction information, it basically matches the notification on the main side. The effect will be decided, but there may be cases where the effect that matches the notification on the main side is not determined due to some error. Therefore, in the game machine according to the present invention, if the game information received from the main side includes instruction information (notification content on the main side), is the determined effect corresponding to the instruction information? Whether or not it is determined, and if it is not the corresponding effect, the effect determined by lottery is forcibly rewritten to the effect corresponding to the instruction information. As a result, even if the effect that matches the notification on the main side is not drawn for some reason, the effect on the sub side can be rewritten to the effect that matches the notification on the main side and executed. Notification can be reliably performed on both sides of the sub, and as a result, the player can reliably enjoy the notification.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the instruction information uniquely indicates the effect corresponding to the instruction information, including the first push order combination and the second push order combination as the push order combination. It is an effect of notifying the order of the stop operation with a color corresponding to the type of the push order combination, and the effect determining means of the sub-control unit is not an effect in which the effect corresponds to the instruction information by the determination means. When it is determined that the effect is determined, the order of the stop operations uniquely indicated by the instruction information is the first color corresponding to the first push order combination and the second push order combination. It is characterized in that it is rewritten into an effect of notifying with a third color different from any of the second colors according to the above.

According to such a game machine, when an effect matching the notification on the main side is drawn, the sub side determines the order of stop operations uniquely indicated by the instruction information according to the type of push order combination. Although the notification is made in a different color, if for some reason the production that matches the notification on the main side is not drawn, the order of the stop operations that the instruction information uniquely indicates corresponds to any of the push order combinations. Notify with no color (third color). As a result, when an error occurs (when an effect matching the notification on the main side is not drawn for some reason), it is possible to prevent the type of push order combination from being erroneously notified.

[Appendix 11]
The pachislot machine 1 of Appendix 11 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") by a player and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-153759, in recent years, in order to prevent the game operation from inserting the medal to operating the stop button as a series of assembly line work and becoming clerical, the game is performed. When a medal is inserted into the machine, the rotation of the production symbol of the sub reel is started, the start lever is operated, and when the start operation of the unit game is detected, based on the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means. A game machine that stops the rotation of the production symbol has been proposed. In the sub-reel, the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means is notified at the timing when the game operation is performed in a clerical manner without any production being performed in the past.

According to this configuration, in the sub-reel, the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means is notified at the timing when the game operation is performed in a clerical manner without any conventional production. As a result, it becomes possible to notify the winning role that has an impact, and the player can enjoy the production on the sub reel with an unprecedented interest.

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
In the configuration described in JP-A-2009-153759, after the rotation of the effect symbol on the sub reel is started, the rotating effect symbol is stopped at once by the operation of the start lever. Therefore, regardless of the timing of operating the start lever, the symbol is rotated and stopped each time the player performs any operation during the game, so that the winning combination can be predicted sequentially, which is an unprecedented game. It is required to provide a game machine having sex.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having a new game property.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention
A betting means capable of betting the game value in response to detecting a betting signal of the game value (for example, a main control circuit 91, a BET switch),
A plurality of symbol display units capable of variable display and stop display of a plurality of symbols (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R, reel display window 4),
When the first quantity of game value is bet by the betting means, the symbol changing means for displaying the symbol in a variable manner (for example, the main control circuit 91, the start switch 79), and the like.
A privilege granting determination means for determining whether to grant a privilege (for example, a main control circuit 91),
An effect means provided in the same body as or separately from the symbol display unit and capable of performing an effect according to the result of determination by the privilege giving means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R, reel display window 4, liquid crystal display device). 11),
An effect control means for controlling the effect of the effect means (for example, a main control circuit 91 and a sub control circuit 101).
A storage means capable of storing the game value in response to detecting the game value storage signal (for example, a main control circuit 91, a credit number counter), and the like.
With
When the second quantity of the game value is stored in the storage means, the effect control means changes and stops a symbol in at least one symbol display unit among the plurality of symbol display units by a specific amount. Control the specific production,
The symbol obtained by varying the specific amount suggests the result of the determination by the privilege grant determination means.
It is characterized by that.

According to such a game machine, the effect control means for controlling the effect in the effect means is at least one of the plurality of symbol display units when a second quantity of game value is stored in the storage means. A specific effect is controlled in which the symbol in the symbol display unit is changed by a specific amount to stop, and the result of the determination by the privilege granting determination means is suggested by the symbol whose specific amount is changed.

As a result, it is possible to provide a game machine having unprecedented playability, in which the symbol is rotated and stopped by the operation of storing the game value, and the result of the decision by the privilege granting decision means can be predicted. Can be done.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
In the specific effect, the second quantity of the game value is stored in the storage means until the symbols suggesting the result of the determination by the privilege granting determination means are stopped and displayed on the plurality of symbol display units. Is executed every time
It is characterized by that.

According to such a game machine, as an effect to be executed by the effect means, first, among the plurality of symbol display units, the operation of changing and stopping the symbol by a specific amount in at least one display unit is stored in the game value. Each time, the game value is accumulated until the symbol suggesting the result of the decision by the privilege granting determination means is stopped and displayed, and then the operation of changing and stopping the symbol on the other display unit by a specific amount is accumulated. Each time it is done, it is performed until a symbol suggesting the result of the decision by the privilege granting decision means is stopped and displayed. Therefore, it has an unprecedented game property that the symbol is rotated and stopped in a plurality of times, and the result of the decision by the privilege granting decision means can be predicted step by step, triggered by the operation of storing the game value. It is possible to provide a game machine.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
A betting means capable of betting the game value in response to detecting a betting signal of the game value (for example, a main control circuit 91, a BET switch),
A plurality of symbol display units capable of variable display and stop display of a plurality of symbols (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R, reel display window 4),
When a predetermined operation including betting a first quantity of game value is performed by the betting means, a symbol changing means for displaying the symbol in a variable manner (for example, main control circuit 91, start switch 79). ,
A privilege granting determination means for determining whether to grant a privilege (for example, a main control circuit 91),
An effect means provided in the same body as or separately from the symbol display unit and capable of performing an effect according to the result of determination by the privilege giving means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R, reel display window 4, liquid crystal display device). 11),
An effect control means for controlling the effect of the effect means (for example, a main control circuit 91 and a sub control circuit 101).
A storage means capable of storing the game value in response to detecting the game value storage signal (for example, a main control circuit 91, a credit number counter), and the like.
With
When the second quantity of the game value is stored in the storage means, the effect control means controls a specific effect according to the result of determination by the privilege grant determination means.
It is characterized by that.

According to such a game machine, the effect control means for controlling the effect in the effect means responds to the result of the determination by the privilege granting determination means when the second quantity of the game value is stored in the storage means. Controls a specific effect.

As a result, it is possible to provide a game machine having unprecedented playability, which makes it possible to predict the result of determination by the privilege granting determination means, triggered by the operation of storing the game value.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine having unprecedented game performance, which makes it possible to predict the result of determination by the privilege granting determination means, triggered by the operation of storing the game value.

[Appendix 12]
The pachislot machine 1 of Appendix 12 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") by a player and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-047152, in recent years, in a game that can be notified, a music sound output that outputs a music sound composed of a vocal sound and an accompaniment sound, which are sung sounds, from a sound output means. A game machine including means and a line sound output means for outputting a line sound, which is a voice containing a character's line, from the sound output means in a game within a predetermined period that enables notification by the notification means has been proposed. ing. In this gaming machine, the sound output control means outputs the sound signals of the vocal sound, the accompaniment sound, and the dialogue sound to the sound output means via separate channels when the music sound is output and the dialogue sound is output at the same time. However, the volume of the vocal sound is set to be lower than the volume when the output of the music sound and the output of the dialogue sound are not performed at the same time.

In this game machine, for example, the volume of the navigation voice sound output from the upper left speaker and the upper right speaker is set to be lower than the predetermined volume, so that the volume of the navigation voice sound is set to the predetermined volume. In comparison, the music sound becomes easier to hear. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect of the sound and enhance the interest of the game.

Further, the sound localization can be different from the case where the volume of the navigation voice sound output from the left speaker and the upper right speaker is set to a predetermined volume. Therefore, both the navigation voice sound output from the lower left speaker and the lower right speaker and the music sound output from each speaker can be easily heard.

Further, for example, the sounds of vocal sounds, accompaniment sounds, dialogue sounds, and SE sounds (Sound Effect sounds, sound effects appropriately output in the production of a game) included in the sound data acquired during a specific pseudo-bonus. The data is input to different channels, and the vocal sound, accompaniment sound, dialogue sound, and SE sound are set to be output from different speakers.

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
In the configuration described in JP-A-2016-047152, it is possible to prevent the vocal sound from making it difficult to hear the sound of the music and the dialogue sound, thereby enhancing the effect of the production by the sound and enhancing the interest of the game. Can be done. However, when the production on the game machine is switched to the next production based on a predetermined trigger such as a so-called medal betting operation, a start lever operation, or a third stop operation, the character's dialogue sound is in the middle of the dialogue. Nevertheless, it may be forcibly terminated.

Vocal sounds and music sounds have a large meaning as sound effects and BGM when displaying images, and since it is a relatively long time, it is unavoidable to forcibly end in the middle of vocal sounds and music sounds. There is also. On the other hand, the character's dialogue sound is relatively short, and if it is forcibly terminated even though it is in the middle of the dialogue, the dialogue sound is cut off in the middle of the dialogue for the player. It can give the impression that it has been done. Therefore, there has been a demand for further improvement in the dialogue sound of the character when switching the production on the game machine to the next production based on a predetermined opportunity.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and when switching the production on the game machine to the next production based on a predetermined opportunity, it is necessary to avoid the dialogue sound of the character being cut off in the middle. Therefore, the purpose is to provide a game machine that further enhances the interest of the game.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention
A gaming machine including a plurality of symbol changing means capable of variablely displaying a plurality of symbols and a game control means for controlling the progress of a game using the symbol changing means.
An effect means for executing an effect during a game (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11, speaker groups 65L, 65R),
An effect control means for controlling the effect of the effect means (for example, sub CPU 102),
A selected character information storage means capable of storing information on at least one target character selected from a plurality of types of characters used in the effect (for example, subRAM 103).
With
The effect control means
At a predetermined opportunity, while controlling the effect means to end the effect different from the effect of the target character and the effect of displaying the image of the target character, while controlling the effect.
At least, with respect to the effect of producing the sound of the target character, the effect means is controlled so as to continue to execute the effect even if the predetermined trigger is reached.
It is characterized by that.

According to such a game machine, the effect control means for controlling the effect by the effect means is different from the effect of at least one target character selected from a plurality of types of characters at a predetermined opportunity. And for the effect of displaying the image of the target character, the effect means is controlled so as to end. On the other hand, at least for the effect of producing the sound of the target character, the effect control means controls the effect means to continue to execute the effect even if a predetermined trigger occurs.

As a result, the voice of the character that the player likes is output to the end without ending in the middle even if the production on the game machine is switched to the next production based on a predetermined opportunity. To. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine that further enhances the interest of the game.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The predetermined trigger includes a case where a second effect start command signal for commanding the start of the second effect following the first effect being executed by the effect means is detected.
Based on the predetermined opportunity, the effect control means
The effect means is controlled so as to start the execution of the second effect.
At least, with respect to the effect of producing the sound of the target character, even if the execution of the second effect is started, the effect means is controlled so as to continue to execute the effect.
It is characterized by that.

When it is possible to output the voices of all the characters according to a predetermined trigger, various voices (not limited to the voices of the characters but also vocal sounds and musical music sounds) in the next production that starts with the trigger are all voices. ), And on the contrary, it may not be possible to identify the voice. According to such a game machine, since the voice that continues to execute the production even when a predetermined trigger is reached is narrowed down to the voice of the favorite character selected by the player, various voices are confused and each voice is confused. It is possible to prevent the situation where the character cannot be identified.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The effect means has sound output means (for example, speaker groups 65L, 65R) for outputting sound.
The effect control means has a plurality of channels for outputting a sound signal to the sound output means (for example, sound data transmission channel A and sound data transmission channel B).
A plurality of the plurality of channels are provided for each of the first character, the second character, and the music different from the voice of the character (for example, a plurality of types of channels provided in the sound data transmission channel A and the sound data transmission channel B). Multiple types of channels provided),
The predetermined trigger includes a case where a second effect start command signal for commanding the start of the second effect following the first effect being executed by the effect means is detected.
In the first effect, the effect control means outputs the sound signals of the first character, the second character, and the music in the first effect to the sound output means via separate first channels. And
Based on the predetermined opportunity, the effect control means
The output of the sound signal in the first production of the character other than the target character and the music is stopped.
The sound signal of the target character in the first effect is continuously output to the sound output means via the first channel provided for the target character.
The sound signals of the first character, the second character, and the second effect of the music are started to be output to the sound output means via separate second channels.
It is characterized by that.

When it is possible to output the voices of all the characters according to a predetermined trigger, various voices (not limited to the voices of the characters but also vocal sounds and musical music sounds) in the next production that starts with the trigger are all voices. ), And on the contrary, it may not be possible to identify the voice. According to such a game machine, the channels that continue to output the sound even when a predetermined trigger occurs are narrowed down to the channels for outputting the sound of the favorite character selected by the player, so that there are various types. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the voices are confused and each voice cannot be identified.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, when switching the production on the game machine to the next production based on a predetermined opportunity, it is possible to avoid the character's dialogue sound being cut off in the middle, and as a result, the interest of the game is further enhanced. It is possible to provide a game machine.

[Appendix 13]
The pachislot machine 1 of Appendix 13 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") by a player and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-028193, in recent years, when the transition to the ART gaming state is determined, the liquid crystal display device prompts the player to repeatedly hit the bet button within a predetermined time. When the display is performed and the number of repeated hits of the bet button by the player is 20 or more, a special identification signal indicating that the state has shifted to the ART state is output to the outside via the external terminal board, while the player outputs the bet button to the outside. It is proposed that the special identification signal is not output when the number of repeated hits of the bet button is less than 20 times.

According to this configuration, it is possible to grasp that the player has shifted to the ART state by repeatedly hitting the bet button by the player himself / herself, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, no gaming machine has been proposed that enables a so-called continuous striking effect to be executed not only by operating a physical button but also by operating in another form, which leads to a state advantageous for the player.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and it is possible to execute a so-called continuous hitting effect not only by operating a physical button but also by operating in another form, which is advantageous for the player. The purpose is to provide a game machine with a new playability of connecting.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention
A game machine capable of executing a game when a predetermined number of game values are bet.
A privilege granting determination means for determining whether to grant a privilege (for example, a main control circuit 91 capable of granting an ART),
An effect means capable of performing an effect (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11),
An effect control means for controlling the effect of the effect means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101),
A storage means capable of storing the game value in response to detecting the game value storage signal (for example, a credit number counter), and the like.
With
When the effect control means detects the stored signal while executing a predetermined effect, the effect control means controls the effect of notifying the effect regarding the granting of the privilege in the effect means according to the detected stored signal.
It is characterized by that.

According to such a game machine, when the storage means detects the storage signal of the game value during the execution of the predetermined effect, the effect control means notifies the effect regarding the granting of the privilege in the effect means according to the detected storage signal. Control the production. Therefore, not only the physical button operation but also the storage of the game value in the storage means, which is an operation in another form, enables the so-called continuous hitting effect to be executed, which leads to an advantageous state for the player. It is possible to provide a game machine having a new game property that has never been seen before.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The effect control means controls the effect of notification regarding the granting of the privilege in the effect means according to the number of times the stored signal is detected during the execution of the predetermined effect.
It is characterized by that.

According to such a game machine, so-called continuous hitting effect can be executed not only by physical button operation but also by continuous operation in another form such as continuous storage of game value in a storage means. It is possible to provide a game machine having a newer playability in that it leads to an advantageous state for the player.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The predetermined effect is a continuous striking effect that encourages continuous operation of a predetermined operation (for example, operation of a physical button) within a predetermined time.
The effect control means controls the effect of notification regarding the granting of the privilege in the effect means according to the number of times the stored signal is detected during the execution of the continuous hit effect.
It is characterized by that.

According to such a game machine, the player himself / herself performs a continuous operation in another form, that is, not only the physical button operation but also the continuous storage of the game value in the storage means. It is possible to provide a game machine having a newer game property in that it leads to an advantageous state for the player.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having a new game property, which is connected to a state advantageous for a player through not only physical button operation but also operation in other forms.

[Appendix 14]
The pachislot machine 1 of Appendix 14 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") by a player and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

By the way, if the advantageous state for the player is not performed for a long period of time, the disadvantage to the player becomes significantly large. Therefore, there is known a gaming machine having a relief function for forcibly shifting to an advantageous state when the advantageous state is not performed for a long period of time.

Some ingenuity has been made so far regarding the relief function. For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-13195, when the transition lottery performed when the state of playing the game is in the ART non-winning is won, the above-mentioned game machine shifts the state from the ART non-winning to the ART winning. When determining the winning probability, which indicates the winning probability in the transition lottery, the value indicated by the RT game number counter, which counts the number of unit games from the non-winning of ART to the transition of the state to the winning ART, is subtracted from the predetermined number of times. It has been proposed to determine the reciprocal of the remaining number of times as the winning probability.

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, the conventional device for the relief function is relief by shifting the state of the game from the normal state to the advantageous state when the normal state, which is not the advantageous state, continues for a long time. Therefore, it is required to provide a new remedy and to have a variation in the treatment for preventing the player from suffering a great disadvantage.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and provides a new remedy means, and provides a game machine having a variation in a remedy function for preventing a player from suffering a great disadvantage. The purpose is.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention
The states in which the game is performed include a first gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state (non-ART)), a second gaming state (for example, a first normal ART), and a third gaming state (for example, a second normal ART). It is a game machine that has
A plurality of symbol display units capable of variable display and stop display of a plurality of symbols (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R, reel display window 4),
An internal winning combination determining means capable of determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations (for example, main control circuit 91),
A symbol changing means for displaying the symbol in a variable manner (for example, a main control circuit 91, a stepping motor),
A plurality of stop operation means corresponding to the plurality of symbol display units and receiving a stop operation for stopping the variable display of the symbol (for example, stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R).
A stop control means for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol to be variablely displayed on the symbol display unit according to the operation of the internal winning combination and the stop operation means determined by the internal winning combination determining means (for example, the main control circuit 91). , Stepping motor),
A privilege giving means for giving a privilege according to a display mode of a symbol to be stopped and displayed by the stop control means (for example, a main control circuit 91).
In the first gaming state, refer to the first transition determining means for determining whether to shift from the first gaming state to the second gaming state (for example, the ART lottery number determination table and the ART lottery table according to the modification). The main control circuit 91), which draws the winning or non-winning of ART.
In the second gaming state, a second transition determining means for determining whether to transition from the second gaming state to the third gaming state (for example, from the first normal ART to the second normal ART by winning a cherry). Main control circuit to shift 91),
With
In the second gaming state, the predetermined unit game (for example, the notification pattern A) is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 1000 times), and subsequently, the privilege is granted as compared with the predetermined unit game. It is a state in which a notification game (for example, notification pattern B) having a high probability of notifying the operation order or operation timing of a plurality of stop operation means is performed.
The third gaming state is a state in which the predetermined unit game is performed a specific number of times (for example, 32 times) less than the predetermined number of times, and then the notification game is performed.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to such a gaming machine, in the first gaming state, the first transition determining means determines whether to transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state.

Then, in the second gaming state, the second transition determining means determines whether to transition from the second gaming state to the third gaming state. Then, when the transition from the second gaming state to the third gaming state is performed, the number of predetermined unit games is reduced from the predetermined number of times to a smaller specific number of times, and if the predetermined unit game is performed a specific number of times, the predetermined unit game is performed. Compared to the above, it becomes possible to execute a notification game having a high probability of notifying the operation order of a plurality of stop operation means for receiving the privilege. As a result, when it is determined to shift to the third gaming state in the second gaming state, it is possible to reduce the number of games of the predetermined unit game and execute the unit game having a larger privilege.

On the other hand, it may not be determined to shift from the second gaming state to the third gaming state until the number of predetermined unit games reaches the predetermined number of times. Even in such a case, if the number of predetermined unit games reaches a predetermined number, the above-mentioned notification game is subsequently executed. As a result, when the notification game is not executed for a long period of time, the player can be given a feeling as if it is a relief function for forcibly executing the notification game.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
The first transition determining means determines whether to transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state for each unit game in the first gaming state, regardless of the type of the internal winning combination.
The second transition determining means determines whether to shift from the second gaming state to the third gaming state when the internal winning combination is a predetermined internal winning combination.
It is characterized by that.

According to such a gaming machine, in the first gaming state, the first transition determining means is from the first gaming state to the second gaming state for each unit game in the first gaming state, regardless of the type of internal winning combination. Decide whether to move to. As a result, the transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state can be executed with a relatively small number of unit games.

Then, in the second gaming state, the second transition determining means determines whether to shift from the second gaming state to the third gaming state when the internal winning combination is a predetermined internal winning combination. Since the second transition determining means draws a lot when the internal winning combination is a predetermined internal winning combination, it is relatively rare that the second transition determining means determines to shift to the third gaming state. Then, when the transition from the second gaming state to the third gaming state is performed, the number of predetermined unit games is reduced from the predetermined number of times to a smaller specific number of times, and if the predetermined unit game is performed a specific number of times, the predetermined unit game is performed. Compared to the above, it becomes possible to execute a notification game having a high probability of notifying the operation order of a plurality of stop operation means for receiving the privilege. As a result, when it is determined to shift to the third gaming state in the second gaming state, it is possible to reduce the number of games of the predetermined unit game and execute the unit game having a larger privilege.

On the other hand, since it is relatively rare that the second transition decision is determined to shift from the second gaming state to the third gaming state, the second gaming state is until the number of predetermined unit games reaches the predetermined number of times. It may not be decided to shift to the third gaming state. Even in such a case, if the number of predetermined unit games reaches a predetermined number, the above-mentioned notification game is subsequently executed. As a result, when the notification game is not executed for a long period of time, the player can be given a feeling as if it is a relief function for forcibly executing the notification game.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a new remedy means and provide a game machine having a variation in a remedy function for preventing a player from suffering a great disadvantage.

[Appendix 15]
The pachislot machine 1 of Appendix 15 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") by a player and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-153759, in recent years, in order to prevent the game operation from inserting the medal to operating the stop button as a series of assembly line work and becoming clerical, the game is performed. When a medal is inserted into the machine, the rotation of the production symbol of the sub reel is started, the start lever is operated, and when the start operation of the unit game is detected, based on the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means. A game machine that stops the rotation of the production symbol has been proposed. In the sub-reel, the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means is notified at the timing when the game operation is performed in a clerical manner without any production being performed in the past.

According to this configuration, in the sub-reel, the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means is notified at the timing when the game operation is performed in a clerical manner without any conventional production. As a result, it becomes possible to notify the winning role that has an impact, and the player can enjoy the production on the sub reel with an unprecedented interest.

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
In the configuration described in JP-A-2009-153759, after the rotation of the effect symbol on the sub reel is started, the rotating effect symbol is stopped at once by the operation of the start lever. However, no production is performed from the insertion of the medal to the operation of the start lever, and even during such a period, some production related to the game is performed to provide unprecedented playability. It is required to provide a game machine with a game.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and even between the time when the medal is inserted and the time when the start lever is operated, some effect related to the game is executed, and the game performance is unprecedented. The purpose is to provide a game machine that you have.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention
A game machine capable of executing a game when a predetermined number of game values are bet.
A betting means capable of betting the game value in response to detecting the betting signal of the game value (for example, BET switch 77).
A start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by a player (for example, a start switch 79),
An effect means capable of performing an effect (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11),
An effect control means for controlling the effect of the effect means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101),
A game value image determining means for determining a game value image to be displayed on the effect means from a plurality of types of game value images representing the game value (for example, a sub-control circuit 101).
A storage means capable of storing the game value in response to detecting the game value storage signal (for example, a credit number counter), and the like.
With
The effect control means
When the stored signal is detected, the effect means is controlled so as to display a game value image according to the result of determination by the game value image determining means.
Depending on the result of the determination by the game value image determining means, the effect by the effect means following the effect of displaying the game value image is controlled.
It is characterized by that.

According to such a game machine, the game value image determining means determines a game value image to be displayed on the effect means from a plurality of types of game value images representing the game value. Then, when the effect control means detects the stored signal, the effect control means controls the effect means to display the game value image according to the result of the determination by the game value image determination unit, and the result of the determination by the game value image determination means is obtained. Correspondingly, the effect of the effect means following the effect of displaying the game value image is controlled.

Until now, even if the game value was stored, a sound indicating that the game value was stored was emitted, and the quantity of the stored game value was only displayed as a number. According to the game machine according to the present invention, in response to the detection of the stored signal of the game value, the effect of displaying the game value image representing the game value on the effect means is executed regardless of the detection of the start operation. Will be done. Then, following the effect of displaying the image of the game value, the effect is executed according to the result of the determination by the game value image determining means.

For the player, even between the time when the game value is stored and the time when the start operation is detected by the start operation detection means, the game value is stored in the storage means with the storage of the game value as an opportunity. Not only that, it is possible to give the impression that the game value is accumulated in the directing means. Then, at the stage of storing the game value, since the lottery such as the determination of the so-called internal winning combination is not performed, the lottery result cannot be notified, but the game is followed by the effect of displaying the image of the game value. By executing the effect according to the result of the decision by the value image determining means, a chance element that a specific effect can be executed, which cannot be easily obtained depending on the result of the decision by the game value image determining means, is given. Will be done.

As a result, according to the present invention, even between the time when the game value is stored and the time when the start operation is detected by the start operation detecting means, some effect related to the game is executed, and the game is unprecedented. It is possible to provide a game machine having sex.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, even between the time when the game value is bet on the betting means and the time when the start operation is detected by the start operation detection means, the effect related to the game is executed, and the game performance is unprecedented. It is possible to provide a game machine with a.

[Appendix 16]
The pachislot machine 1 of Appendix 16 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") by a player and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, a random number value is extracted based on a predetermined opportunity and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and a plurality of stepping motors are driven and controlled. It controls to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, it drives and controls the stepping motor to stop the rotation of a plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

Until now, the lottery of the winning combination has been mainly performed by detecting the start operation by the start switch. In addition, as in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-236501, a means for selecting one lottery timing from a plurality of preset lottery timings and a means for determining an internal state by lottery performed at the selected lottery timings. It is also proposed to provide. Specifically, the control means of the game machine is effective for random number extraction, (a) when the wait timer reaches 4.1 seconds, (b) when a medal is inserted, and (c) the start lever. And, it is performed three times when the start lever is operated. Then, the control means selects at which timing the extracted random numbers are used, and determines the internal winning combination using the selected random numbers.

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
In the configuration described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-236501, it is unclear which of the plurality of lottery timings the lottery (acquisition of the random number value) is performed to determine the internal state. It becomes difficult for the player to aim and acquire. However, in the configuration described in Patent Document 1, it cannot be said that by devising the lottery timing of the winning combination, the variety of the production related to the game such as the notification of the internal winning combination is increased, and the lottery timing of the winning combination , There is room to provide a game machine with unprecedented playability by associating it with the production related to the game.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and by associating the timing for deciding whether to grant the privilege with the effect related to the game, the result of determining the privilege grant including the notification of the internal winning combination. The purpose is to provide a game machine with a wider variety of productions related to.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention
A plurality of symbol display units capable of variable display and stop display of a plurality of symbols (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R, reel display window 4),
A start operation detection means for detecting a start operation by a player (for example, a main control circuit 91, a start switch 79),
When the elapsed time elapsed since the start of the variable display of the plurality of symbols in the unit game before the one unit game has not reached the predetermined time, the waiting means waits until the elapsed time reaches the predetermined time. (For example, a main control circuit 91 capable of executing a wait process and a lock process at the start of a game),
A symbol changing means for displaying the symbol in a variable manner when the elapsed time reaches the predetermined time (for example, a main control circuit 91, a stepping motor).
A privilege granting determination means for determining whether to grant a privilege (for example, a main control circuit 91),
An effect means capable of performing an effect (for example, information display 14),
An effect control means for controlling the effect on the effect means (for example, a main control circuit 91 for controlling the effect on the information display 14).
With
The privilege grant determination means can determine whether to grant the privilege when the variation display of the symbol by the symbol variation means starts.
The effect control means can execute notification of the result determined by the privilege granting determination means when the elapsed time reaches a predetermined time and the variation display of the symbol starts.
It is characterized by that.

According to such a game machine, unlike the case where the start operation is detected by the start operation detection means, the privilege granting determination means displays a variation of a plurality of symbols in the unit game before one unit game. When the waiting by the waiting means until the elapsed time elapsed from the start reaches a predetermined time is completed and the variable display of the symbol by the symbol changing means is started, the decision regarding the privilege grant can be made.

Then, when the elapsed time does not reach the predetermined time when the start operation is detected, the effect control means determines the result of the decision by the privilege granting determination means because the result of the determination by the privilege granting determination means has not yet come out. It cannot be notified. On the other hand, when the elapsed time reaches the predetermined time when the start operation is detected, when the elapsed time reaches the predetermined time, the symbol variation is displayed by the symbol variation means, and the determination is made by the privilege grant determination means. Since the result of the above is obtained, it is possible to notify the result of the decision by the privilege granting decision means.

In this way, when the waiting by the waiting means is executed prior to the determination of whether or not the privilege is given by the privilege granting determining means, the waiting by the waiting means is performed, and the change display of the symbol by the symbol changing means is started, the privilege is given. By deciding whether or not to grant the privilege by the grant determination means, the privilege is granted at approximately the same time as the timing of performing the start operation by waiting without performing the start operation until the predetermined time elapses. A pattern in which the result of the decision is immediately notified by the determination means, and a start operation is performed before the predetermined time elapses, and after the start operation is performed, the privilege grant determination means is waited until the predetermined time elapses. It is possible to provide two patterns of playability with a pattern that receives notification of the result of determination by.

According to such a game machine, it is possible for the player to decide whether to wait without performing the start operation or not until the predetermined time elapses, thereby, as a means for determining the privilege grant. It is possible to change to a pattern in which the result of the decision is immediately notified by the above, and a pattern in which the result of the decision by the privilege granting decision means is notified after the start operation is performed and the predetermined time elapses. .. Therefore, by associating the timing of the decision to grant the privilege with the timing of the execution of the effect related to the game, the game is made more diverse in the effect related to the game, including the notification of the result of the decision by the privilege granting determination means. Machines can be provided.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
Further provided with a predetermined time determining means for determining the predetermined time,
The waiting time waits until the elapsed time reaches a predetermined time determined by the predetermined time determining means.
It is characterized by that.

According to such a game machine, the waiting time can be set to be different, and although it was thought that the waiting time had elapsed, it was not actually waiting, and it was abbreviated as the timing to perform the start operation. I couldn't immediately receive the notification of the internal winning role decided at the same time, or I couldn't wait for the specified time to elapse, so I thought that the specified time had not actually passed, but in reality Is waiting until a predetermined time elapses, and it is possible that the notification of the internal winning combination determined at about the same time as the start operation can be immediately received. Therefore, it is possible to add more diversity to the game.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, by associating the timing of determining to grant the privilege with the timing of executing the effect related to the game, the effect related to the game including the notification of the internal winning combination is further diversified. A game machine can be provided.

[Appendix 17]
The pachislot machine 1 of Appendix 17 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") by a player and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

By the way, a game machine having a function of navigating the establishment of a specific small winning combination with a lamp or the like, that is, a function of assist time (hereinafter referred to as "AT") has been developed. Further, in addition to the conventional AT function, a function that activates a gaming state in which the winning probability of replay is higher than normal when a specific symbol combination is displayed, that is, a function of replay time (hereinafter referred to as "RT") is provided. A game machine to be equipped is also being developed.

In addition, there is also a gaming machine having a function (hereinafter, referred to as "ART") in which both AT and RT are operated at the same time. In such a game machine, it is proposed to provide a specific game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state, determine the number of additional games for extending the number of remaining games in the specific game state, and notify the number of additional games on the liquid crystal display device. Has been done.

Various measures have been taken to notify the number of additional games. For example, in the notified game state, it is possible to execute an additional game in which the number of additional unit games of the notified game can be determined over a period of a predetermined number of unit games, and in the additional game, the number of additional unit games of the additional game can be determined. A game machine provided with a certain additional game execution means has been proposed. In this game machine, the additional game executing means is a plurality of types of addition modes in which the number of unit games of the notified game and the number of unit games of the additional game are different from each other in the additional game performed at the start of the game period in the notified game state. It has an addition mode determining means for determining a predetermined addition mode from among the above, and when a predetermined internal winning combination corresponding to the addition mode is determined in the additional game, the number of addition unit games of the notification game can be increased. Therefore, the addition of the additional game is confirmed (see JP-A-2017-063989).

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
The size of the number of additional games is directly related to the success or failure of the game, and is of great concern to the player. Therefore, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, it is possible to determine a predetermined addition mode from a plurality of types of addition modes in which the number of unit games of the notification game and the number of unit games of the additional game are different from each other. This leads to the diversification of the notification mode of the unit game number of the game, and can enhance the player's interest in the mode of determining the period of the game state which is advantageous for the player such as ART and AT.

However, even with the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, it is difficult to frequently notify the number of unit games that is significantly different from the number actually determined as the number of additional games as the number of additional games for notification. .. Therefore, there is still room for improvement in the mode of notifying the number of unit games of the additional game.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and it is possible to notify the number of unit games larger than the actual number of additional games as the number of additional games for notification, and the actual number of additional games is added as the game progresses. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of keeping the difference between the number of games and the number of additional games for notification low.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention
It is a game machine that decides whether to give a privilege and gives a privilege when it is decided.
A plurality of symbol display units capable of variable display and stop display of a plurality of symbols (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R, reel display window 4),
An internal winning combination determining means capable of determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations (for example, main control circuit 91),
A symbol changing means for displaying the symbol in a variable manner (for example, a main control circuit 91, a stepping motor),
A stop operation means that is provided corresponding to the plurality of symbol display units and accepts a stop operation for stopping the variation display of the symbol (for example, a main control circuit 91, a stop switch board 80).
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation means, the symbol display unit corresponding to the stop operation means that has been stopped is displayed in a variable manner. A stop control means for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol (for example, a main control circuit 91, a stepping motor),
A privilege granting determination means for determining whether to grant a privilege (for example, a main control circuit 91),
An additional determination means for determining an additional period indicating the degree of extension of the period for which the privilege is granted according to a predetermined opportunity (for example, the main control circuit 91).
A notification means for notifying information about a game (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11),
An initial value determining means for determining an initial value of an additional period for notification notified by the notification means based on an additional period determined by the additional determining means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101).
With
The plurality of combinations are capable of controlling the stop control means so that a combination of predetermined symbols stops on the effective line when the operation order of the stop operation means is a predetermined operation order. Including types of push order
When the addition period is determined by the addition determination means,
The notification means is provided with a plurality of display areas (for example, left area 11L, middle area 11C, right area 11R) capable of displaying numbers corresponding to the plurality of symbol display units.
The initial value determined by the initial value determining means is displayed in the display area, and the initial value is displayed.
When any of the push order combinations is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means following the determination of the addition period by the addition determining means, in the first stop operation among the plurality of display areas. The number displayed in the display area corresponding to the symbol display unit provided corresponding to the stop operation means for stopping the combination of the predetermined symbols on the effective line is replaced with another number.
It is characterized by that.

According to such a game machine, the privilege granting determination means determines whether or not to grant the privilege. Then, the addition determination means determines the addition period indicating the degree of extension of the period in which the privilege is granted, based on a predetermined opportunity. Then, the initial value determining means determines the initial value of the additional period for notification to be notified by the notification means based on the additional period determined by the additional determination means.

When the addition period is determined, the initial value determined by the initial value determining means is displayed in the plurality of display areas in the notification means capable of displaying numbers corresponding to the plurality of symbol display units.

Then, when any push order combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means following the determination of the addition period by the addition determining means, the effective line is on the effective line in the first stop operation among the plurality of display areas. The number displayed in the display area corresponding to the symbol display unit provided corresponding to the stop operation means for stopping the combination of predetermined symbols is replaced with another number.

For example, the display area corresponding to the symbol display unit provided corresponding to the stop operation means for stopping the combination of predetermined symbols on the effective line in the first stop operation is the digit of the initial value of the additional period for notification. In the case of a display area that displays a number corresponding to a digit larger than the number, the number corresponding to the digit larger than the initial value of the notification addition period is replaced with the number larger than the originally displayed number. obtain. Therefore, the player can have the expectation that the additional period may be significantly extended when the push order combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and in fact, the notification mode by the notification means can be changed. By changing, you can get the impression that the addition period has been greatly extended, and the fun of the game will increase.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The initial value determining means determines a period equal to or less than the addition period determined by the addition determining means as an initial value of the notification addition period notified by the notification means.
It is characterized by that.

According to such a game machine, it is possible to prevent the number of additional games for notification from becoming significantly larger than the actual number of additional games.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
When the addition period is determined by the addition determination means,
The notification means is further provided with another display area (for example, another area 11D) capable of displaying numbers in addition to the display area.
In the separate display area, among the plurality of display areas, a number corresponding to a digit larger than the number of digits of the initial value of the notification addition period is larger than the number displayed in the display area for displaying the notification. A number smaller than the number displayed in the display area that displays the number corresponding to the same number of digits as the initial value of the addition period is displayed.
It is characterized by that.

According to such a game machine, a display area corresponding to a symbol display unit provided corresponding to a stop operation means for stopping a predetermined combination of symbols on an effective line in the first stop operation is used for notification. In the case of a display area for displaying a number corresponding to a digit larger than the initial value of the addition period, a number corresponding to a digit larger than the initial value of the notification addition period was originally displayed. Replaces with a number larger than the number. Therefore, the player can have the expectation that the additional period may be significantly extended when the push order combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and in fact, the notification mode by the notification means can be changed. By changing, you can get the impression that the addition period has been greatly extended, and the fun of the game will increase.

On the other hand, the display area corresponding to the symbol display unit provided corresponding to the stop operation means for stopping the combination of predetermined symbols on the effective line in the first stop operation is the initial value of the additional period for notification. In the case of a display area for displaying a number corresponding to the same number of digits, the number corresponding to the same number of digits as the initial value of the additional period for notification is replaced with a number smaller than the originally displayed number. Therefore, as the game progresses, the discrepancy between the actual number of additional games and the number of additional games for notification can be suppressed to a low level.

In addition, the effect of extending the addition period in the notification means is performed by changing a number corresponding to a digit larger than the initial value of the notification addition period, so that the player can greatly extend the addition period. You can get the impression that it was. On the other hand, in the notification means, the effect of shortening the addition period is performed by changing the number corresponding to the same number of digits as the initial value of the notification addition period, so that the player can extend the addition period. Compared to, the impression is that it is small compared to the degree of decrease in the additional period.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, the number of unit games larger than the actual number of additional games can be notified as the number of additional games for notification, and as the game progresses, the actual number of additional games and the number of additional games for notification can be combined. It is possible to provide a game machine capable of suppressing the difference between the two.

[Appendix 18]
The pachislot machine 1 of Appendix 18 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") by a player and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

By the way, when the game store is closed, if the game status stored inside is not updated and is left unchanged, the game status at that stage will be carried over to the next business day. For example, the game situation stored inside is advantageous for the player, such as between so-called bonus flags, during the omen, during the chance zone entry, and with a high probability that it is easy to win a specific internal winning role. , It will give a favorable situation to the player who plays immediately after the opening of the store on the next business day. For amusement stores, we would like to avoid the appearance of many players who enjoy the above-mentioned advantageous situations in terms of store management.

For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-049285, in order to prevent a deferred state of game information (number of digestion games, etc.) from occurring when a game store is opened, the pachislot machine 1 is disconnected for a predetermined time or longer. It is disclosed that when the player returns from the above (for example, when the power is turned on when the game store is opened), the same initialization process as that performed when the setting change command is received is automatically performed.

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
According to the gaming machine described in JP-A-2016-049285, the burden on the staff for the initialization process can be reduced, and even if the staff forgets the initialization process before opening the store, the game is unfair. It can be prevented from occurring.

However, considering the operation of the store, it is desired to give the player the merit of playing the game immediately after the store opens and to operate the store with a high occupancy rate immediately after the store opens. In that sense, it is preferable to leave a manual element that allows the game store to select a game machine to be initialized and a game machine not to be initialized, instead of initializing all the game machines uniformly.

That said, the initialization process is a heavy burden for the staff of the amusement store, and it is desirable to reduce the burden on the initialization process as much as possible.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and while retaining the merit of playing a game immediately after the store opens, by playing the game immediately after the store opens, the risk of a large number of players enjoying an advantageous situation appears. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of reducing the load on the staff of the game store involved in the process of initializing the game information.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention
A gaming machine including a variable display means capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays and a game control means for controlling the progress of a game using the variable display means.
The first game information (for example, the background image on the liquid crystal display device 11 and the like, which becomes the initial value by initializing the game information and turning on / off the power) and the second game information (for example, the game state). A game that can store multiple game information including information about the type, information about the front mode, information about the back mode, etc., which will be the initial value if the game information is initialized, but will not be the initial value when the power is turned on / off. Information storage means (for example, main RAM 95, sub RAM 103),
When a predetermined operation (for example, a setting value changing operation) is performed, an initialization means that can initialize the game information stored in the game information storage means and set it as an initial value (for example, at the time of setting change). Main control circuit 91), which can execute the initialization process of
With
The initialization means
When the initialization operation is performed, both the first game information and the second game information stored in the game information storage means can be set as initial values.
When the power is turned on or off, the first game information stored in the game information storage means can be set to an initial value, while the second game information is a current value. Can be maintained as it is,
When a specific operation (for example, an operation of twisting the door key while pressing the MAX bet button 21) that cannot be performed by the player is performed, the notification means capable of notifying the game information stored in the game information storage means (for example, For example, liquid crystal display device 11, speakers 65L, 65R),
Is further provided.

According to such a game machine, the notification means can notify the game information stored in the game information storage means when a specific operation that cannot be performed by the player is performed.

The player cannot perform the above-mentioned specific operation and receive the notification by the notification means. This can prevent a particular player from gaining an advantage.

In addition, the clerk of the game store basically performs the above-mentioned specific operation, performs a predetermined operation on the game machine notified by the notification means, and initializes the game information stored in the game information storage means. Since it is not necessary to initialize the game information for all the game machines, the burden of the initialization can be reduced.

In addition, instead of uniformly initializing the game information for all the game machines notified by the notification means, it is a manual that allows the game store to select a game machine to be initialized and a game machine not to be initialized. The element is left. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the merit of playing the game immediately after the store opens, and it is possible to increase the occupancy rate of the store immediately after the store opens.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific operation includes an operation of a door key provided on a door that can be opened and closed.

According to such a game machine, since the specific operation is an operation that cannot be surely performed by the player, it is possible to surely prevent the specific player from gaining an advantage.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, while retaining the merit of playing a game immediately after the store opens, by playing the game immediately after the store opens, the risk of a large number of players enjoying an advantageous situation appears, and the game involved in the process of initializing the game information. It is possible to provide a game machine capable of reducing the load on the staff of the store.

[Appendix 19]
The pachislot machine 1 of Appendix 19 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") by a player and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

By the way, a game machine having a function of navigating the establishment of a specific small winning combination with a lamp or the like, that is, a function of assist time (hereinafter referred to as "AT") has been developed. Further, in addition to the conventional AT function, a function that activates a gaming state in which the winning probability of replay is higher than normal when a specific symbol combination is displayed, that is, a function of replay time (hereinafter referred to as "RT") is provided. A game machine to be equipped is also being developed.

In addition, there is also a gaming machine having a function (hereinafter, referred to as "ART") in which both AT and RT are operated at the same time. In such a game machine, it is proposed to provide a specific game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state, determine the number of additional games for extending the number of remaining games in the specific game state, and notify the number of additional games on the liquid crystal display device. Has been done.

Various measures have been taken to notify the number of additional games. For example, in the ART mode, there is a production method in which the number of additional games is notified for each additional opportunity of the number of games, and the number of additional games is not notified for each additional opportunity of the number of games, but collectively at the end of the ART mode. It has been proposed to provide an effect method for notifying and allow the player to arbitrarily select these effect methods.

Further, for example, in a unit game in a special game state, whether or not to execute a privilege granting effect that grants a privilege when the timing of the stop operation for the variable display of the symbol in the display column is within the corresponding predetermined time range. When the number of bonus-giving effect determining means that can determine the predetermined number of additional unit games of the notification game as a privilege and the predetermined number of additional unit games determined by the privilege-giving effect determining means are less than or equal to the specified number of additional unit games. In some cases, the specific information suggesting the predetermined number of additional unit games is not notified, and when the predetermined number of additional unit games is larger than the specified number of additional unit games, the predetermined number of additional unit games is suggested. A game machine including a means for executing an addition number suggestion effect for notifying specific information has been proposed (see JP-A-2017-063987).

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
The size of the number of additional games is directly related to the success or failure of the game, and is of great concern to the player. Therefore, in the game machine described in Patent Document 1, the predetermined number of additional unit games becomes larger than the specified number of additional unit games, and the notification is performed by the addition number suggestion effect executing means, so that the player can enjoy the game. Can be enhanced.

However, if the "specified number of additional unit games", which is the standard for notification by the addition number suggestion effect execution means, is large, the notification by the addition number suggestion effect execution means is rarely performed, so that the interest of the game is not necessarily enhanced. I can't say. On the other hand, in order to increase the frequency of notification by the addition number suggestion effect execution means, if the "specified number of additional unit games" that is the standard of notification by the addition number suggestion effect execution means is reduced, the notification by the addition number suggestion effect execution means is made. The value of the game is reduced, and this also cannot be said to enhance the interest of the game. Therefore, after increasing the "specified number of additional unit games" that is the standard for notification by the addition number suggestion effect execution means, it is still possible to perform notification by the addition number suggestion effect execution means at a high frequency. Is required to be provided.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and in a game machine that notifies when the number of additional games is a predetermined number or more, the predetermined number is increased and the notification is still performed at a high frequency. By doing so, the purpose is to provide a game machine capable of enhancing the interest of the game.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention
It is possible to decide whether to grant the privilege, and if it is decided, it is possible to shift to the privilege state (for example, ART) in which the privilege can be granted, and the privilege state includes an additional period indicating the degree of extension of the period of the privilege state. A gaming machine provided with an additional period determination section (for example, an additional zone) that extends the period of the privilege state when the determination is made.
In the addition period determination section, the addition determination means for determining the addition period indicating the degree of extension of the privilege state period and the main control circuit 91 capable of executing the addition zone 3 processing (FIG. 164) in the modification 10 are executed. ),
A period storage means for storing the period of the privilege state (for example, an ART game number counter),
A notification means for notifying information regarding the privilege state (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11),
In a predetermined case, an unannounced period storage means that does not notify the additional period determined by the additional determination means by the notification means and stores an additional period that is not notified as an unannounced additional period (for example, the number of ART games is not yet available). Notification counter),
With
Regarding the first additional period determination section after it is decided to grant the privilege and the transition to the privilege state is made.
While the additional period determined by the additional determination means is added as the period of the privilege state and stored in the period storage means, while
The notification means notifies the addition period as a period shorter than the addition period determined by the addition determination means.
In the non-notification period storage means, the difference obtained by subtracting the period notified as the addition period by the notification means from the addition period actually determined by the addition period determination means is stored as the unnotification addition period.
Regarding the additional period determination section after the second time after it is decided to grant the privilege and the transition to the privilege state,
While the additional period determined by the additional determination means is added as the period of the privilege state and stored in the period storage means, while
In the predetermined case, the addition period determined by the addition determination means is not notified by the notification means, but is stored in the non-notification period storage means as the unnotification addition period.
When the unreported addition period stored in the unreported period storage means reaches a predetermined period, the notification means notifies that the predetermined period has been added to the privilege state period.
It is characterized by that.

According to such a game machine, it is possible to decide whether or not to give a privilege, and if the decision is made, it is possible to shift to a privilege state in which the privilege can be given. Then, in the privilege state, an additional period indicating the degree of extension of the privilege state is determined, and when determined, an additional period determination section for extending the privilege state period is provided.

Here, for the first addition period determination section, the addition period determined by the addition determination means is added as the privilege state period and stored in the period storage means, while the notification means is the addition determination means as the addition period. A period shorter than the additional period determined by the notification means is notified, and the non-notification period storage means does not have a difference obtained by subtracting the period notified as the additional period by the notification means from the additional period actually determined by the additional period determining means. It is stored as a notification addition period.

Further, for the second and subsequent addition period determination sections, the addition period determined by the addition determination means is added as the period of the privilege state and stored in the period storage means, while the addition determination means is used in a predetermined case. The additional period determined by the above is not notified by the notification means, but is stored in the non-notification period storage means as the unnotification additional period.

Then, when the unreported addition period stored in the unreported period storage means reaches a predetermined period, the notification means notifies that a predetermined period has been added to the privilege state period.

According to such a game machine, at least at the first time when the addition period determination section is set, the unnotification period storage means can surely store the unnotification addition period. Therefore, even if a predetermined period as a reference for notification in the notification means is set to a relatively long period, the non-notification period storage means reliably stores the unnotification addition period at the first time when the addition period is determined. Compared with the conventional game machine which cannot be said to be, the frequency that the unannounced addition period becomes the above-mentioned predetermined period increases. Even if the predetermined period, which is the standard for notification in the notification means, is set to a relatively long period, it is possible to frequently notify that the period of the privilege state has been added, which enhances the interest of the game. Is possible.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
Regarding the first addition period determination section,
The notification means notifies at least the minimum period determined by the addition period determining means as the addition period.
In the unannounced period storage means, the difference obtained by subtracting the minimum period from the additional period actually determined by the additional period determining means is stored as the unannounced additional period.
It is characterized by that.

According to such a game machine, at the first time of the addition period determination section, the addition period is determined by the addition period determination means from the addition period actually determined by the addition period determination means as the unnotification addition period. At least the difference minus the minimum determined period is stored. Therefore, the unreported additional period stored in the unreported period storage means can be further increased at the first time when the additional period is determined, and as a result, the frequency of the unreported additional period becoming the above-mentioned predetermined period is further increased. Increase.

On the other hand, since the notification means notifies at least the minimum period determined by the addition period determining means as the addition period, the player proceeds with the game with a sense of security that the addition of the minimum period is surely performed. be able to.

According to such a game machine, even if a predetermined period as a reference for notification in the notification means is set to a relatively long period, notification that the privilege state period has been added is frequently performed. It is possible to further enhance the interest of the game.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, in a game machine that notifies when the number of additional games is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the game is enhanced by increasing the predetermined number and still performing the notification at a high frequency. It is possible to provide a game machine capable of the above.

[Appendix 20]
The pachislot machine 1 of Appendix 20 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") by a player and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

In such a game machine, a period called an assist time (hereinafter, this is referred to as "AT") that can prevent or increase the number of medals possessed by the player is generated. Those with functions are provided. Then, in the game machine having the AT function, when the setting is changed and when the AT game by the limiter is completed, the mode selection lottery means uses the mode selection lottery table composed of the same type of data, and the AT of the notification lottery means is used. It has been proposed to select a mode of transition lottery (see Patent Document 1).

According to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-086761, the mode of the AT transition lottery is selected by the same process as when the setting is changed after a state advantageous to the player such as the end of the AT game by the limiter occurs. Therefore, for example, an AT transition lottery mode that is more advantageous than when the setting is changed is selected at the end of the AT game, and after the AT game ends, the right of the AT game is re-granted by the notification lottery means in a short period of time. It is possible to prevent the player from having a feeling of expectation.

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-086761, there is a possibility that the interest of the game after the end of the AT game is diminished.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and while preventing the player from being overly expected that the privilege will be re-granted in a short period of time, after the end of the game in which the privilege is granted. Also, the purpose is to provide a game machine capable of maintaining the interest of the game.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention
A gaming machine having a first state (for example, a normal gaming state) and a second state (for example, an ART gaming state) as a state for playing a game.
A game information storage means capable of storing game information (for example, main RAM 95),
When the privilege granted in the second state reaches a predetermined amount (for example, 3000 medals are paid out), or the upper limit of the section in which the section in the second state can be continuously executed (for example, ART game) When the number of states reaches 1500 games), an initialization means that initializes predetermined game information stored in the game information storage means (for example, a main control circuit 91 that can be initialized when the limiter is activated).
With
A plurality of modes (for example, "low accuracy" mode, "high accuracy short" mode, "high accuracy long" mode) having different expectations for transition from the first state to the second state are provided.
The predetermined game information includes mode information indicating which mode is the current mode among a plurality of modes having different expectations for transition from the first state to the second state.
A mode update lottery table storage means for storing a mode update lottery table having a different update expectation degree for updating the mode information to another mode for each of the plurality of modes (for example, a table mode transition lottery number determination table and a table). Main ROM 94), where the mode transition lottery table is stored
A mode update determining means for determining whether to update the mode information to another mode according to the mode update lottery table corresponding to the mode set in the mode setting means (for example, a table mode transition process (FIG. 173)). 91),
A mode update means for updating the mode information when the mode update determination means determines to update the mode (for example, the main control circuit 91)
With more
The initialization means is said to be in the mode when the privilege granted in the second state reaches a predetermined amount, or when the section in the second state becomes the upper limit of a section that can be continuously executed. The information is updated to the lowest mode with the lowest expectation of transition to the second state.
The mode update lottery table corresponding to the minimum mode is updated to an expected mode in which the expected degree of transition from the first state to the second state is larger than the predetermined expected degree as compared with other mode update lottery tables. Expectations are set high,
It is characterized by that.

According to such a game machine, a plurality of modes having different expectations for transition to the second state are provided, and the initialization means is when the privilege given in the second state reaches a predetermined amount, or When the section in the second state reaches the upper limit of the section that can be continuously executed, the mode information is updated to the lowest mode having the lowest expectation of transition to the second state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being overly expected to shift to the second state again in a short period of time in a game such as after the privilege given in the second state reaches a predetermined amount.

Subsequently, the mode update determining means determines whether to update from the current mode to another mode according to the mode update lottery table corresponding to the mode set in the mode setting means. At that time, in the mode update lottery table corresponding to the lowest mode, the update to the expected mode in which the transition expectation from the first state to the second state is larger than the predetermined expectation as compared with the other mode update lottery tables. Expectations are high. Therefore, the mode update determining means frequently determines to update from a mode having a low update expectation degree to a mode having a high update expectation degree (expected mode). If the mode is updated to the expected mode, the transition expectation that the state of the game shifts to the second state increases, and as a result, the interest of the game can be maintained even after the end of the game in which the privilege is given. It will be possible.

Therefore, according to such a game machine, while preventing the player from being overly expected that the privilege will be re-granted in a short period of time, the game can be played even after the end of the game in which the privilege is granted. It is possible to provide a game machine capable of maintaining the interest.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention,
The initialization means updates the mode information to the minimum mode even when a predetermined operation (for example, a setting value changing operation) including the operation of the door key provided on the door that can be opened and closed is performed.
The mode update lottery table for the minimum mode corresponding to the minimum mode is
The mode is updated to the minimum mode when the privilege granted in the second state reaches a predetermined amount, or when the section in the second state reaches the upper limit of the continuously executable section. The mode update lottery table for the first minimum mode that is referred to when it becomes
A second mode update lottery table for the lowest mode, which is referred to when the mode is updated to the lowest mode when the predetermined operation is performed, and
Have,
The first minimum mode mode update lottery table is set to have a higher update expectation degree for updating from the minimum mode to the expected mode than the second minimum mode mode update lottery table.
It is characterized by that.

In the initialization of the game information including the mode update means updating the mode to the lowest mode, in addition to the case where the privilege given in the second state reaches a predetermined amount, a predetermined operation including the operation of the door key is performed. Also executed in case.

In this case, when the privilege given in the second state reaches a predetermined amount, the mode update lottery table corresponding to the lowest mode is set to have a relatively high update expectation degree for updating from the lowest mode to the expected mode.

On the other hand, when the game information is initialized by performing a predetermined operation including the operation of the door key when the game store is closed, the privilege given in the second state becomes a predetermined amount. The mode is not updated to the expected mode as frequently as the case.

According to such a game machine, the privilege is excessively re-granted in a short period of time to the player who tries to proceed with the game after the privilege granted in the second state reaches a predetermined amount. It is possible to maintain the interest of the game even after the end of the game in which the privilege is given, while preventing the player from feeling the expectation. On the other hand, it is possible to prevent a situation in which an excessively large privilege is given to a player who plays a game immediately after the store opens on the next business day.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine having a first state (for example, a normal gaming state) and a second state (for example, an ART gaming state) as a state for playing a game.
A game information storage means capable of storing game information (for example, main RAM 95),
When the privilege granted in the second state reaches a predetermined amount (for example, 3000 medals are paid out), and a predetermined operation (for example, a set value) including the operation of the door key provided on the openable / closable door. When at least one of the cases where the change operation is performed) is performed, or when the section in the second state reaches the upper limit of the sections that can be continuously executed (for example, the number of ART game states is 1500 games). , And when at least one of the predetermined operations is performed, with the initialization means for initializing the predetermined game information stored in the game information storage means (for example, when the limiter is activated). Initializable main control circuit 91),
With
A plurality of modes (for example, "low accuracy" mode, "high accuracy short" mode, "high accuracy long" mode) having different expectations for transition from the first state to the second state are provided.
The predetermined game information includes mode information indicating which mode is the current mode among a plurality of modes having different expectations for transition from the first state to the second state.
A mode update lottery table storage means for storing a mode update lottery table having a different update expectation degree for updating the mode information to another mode for each of the plurality of modes (for example, a table mode transition lottery number determination table and a table). Main ROM 94), where the mode transition lottery table is stored
A mode update determining means for determining whether to update the mode information to another mode according to the mode update lottery table corresponding to the mode set in the mode setting means (for example, a table mode transition process (FIG. 174)). 91),
A mode update means for updating the mode information when the mode update determination means determines to update the mode (for example, the main control circuit 91)
With more
The initialization means is used when at least one of the privilege granted in the second state reaches a predetermined amount and when the predetermined operation is performed, or a section in the second state. Is expected to shift the mode information to the second state in either the case where the upper limit of the continuously feasible section is reached or the case where at least one of the predetermined operations is performed is performed. Update to the lowest mode and
The mode update lottery table for the minimum mode corresponding to the minimum mode is
The mode is updated to the minimum mode when the privilege granted in the second state reaches a predetermined amount, or when the section in the second state reaches the upper limit of the continuously executable section. The mode update lottery table for the first minimum mode that is referred to when it becomes
A second mode update lottery table for the lowest mode, which is referred to when the mode is updated to the lowest mode when the predetermined operation is performed, and
Have,
The update expectation degree for updating from the lowest mode to the expected mode differs between the first mode update lottery table for the lowest mode and the mode update lottery table for the second lowest mode.
It is characterized by that.

According to such a game machine, a plurality of modes having different expectations for transition to the second state are provided, and the initialization means can be used when the privilege given in the second state reaches a predetermined amount. When at least one of the predetermined operations including the operation of the door key provided on the door that can be opened and closed is performed, or when the section in the second state becomes the upper limit of the section that can be continuously executed. , And when at least one of the predetermined operations is performed, the mode information is updated to the lowest mode having the lowest expectation of transition to the second state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being overly expected to shift to the second state again in a short period of time in a game such as after the privilege given in the second state reaches a predetermined amount.

Subsequently, the mode update determining means determines whether to update from the current mode to another mode according to the mode update lottery table corresponding to the mode set in the mode setting means. At that time, the game information is initialized by performing a predetermined operation including the operation of the door key when the privilege given in the second state reaches a predetermined amount or when the game store is closed. The update expectation that the mode is updated to the expected mode is different from the case where it is performed.

According to such a game machine, the privilege is excessively re-granted in a short period of time to the player who tries to proceed with the game after the privilege granted in the second state reaches a predetermined amount. It is possible to maintain the interest of the game even after the end of the game in which the privilege is given, while preventing the player from feeling the expectation. On the other hand, it is possible to prevent a situation in which an excessively large privilege is given to a player who plays a game immediately after the store opens on the next business day.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, in the game after the end of the privilege grant, while preventing the player from being overly expected that the privilege will be re-granted in a short period of time, after the end of the game in which the privilege is granted. However, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of maintaining the interest of the game.

1 ... Pachislot machine, 3L, 3C, 3R ... Reel, 4 ... Reel display window, 19L, 19C, 19R ... Stop button, 91 ... Main control circuit, 101 ... Sub control circuit

Claims (2)

A gaming machine having a first gaming state, a second gaming state, and a third gaming state as a state in which a game is performed.
A plurality of symbol display units capable of variable display and stop display of a plurality of symbols, and
An internal winning combination determining means that can determine an internal winning combination from multiple roles,
A symbol changing means for displaying the symbol in a variable manner and
A plurality of stop operation means provided corresponding to the plurality of symbol display units and accepting a stop operation for stopping the variable display of the symbol, and a stop operation means.
A stop control means for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol to be variablely displayed on the symbol display unit according to the operation of the internal winning combination and the stop operation means determined by the internal winning combination determining means.
A privilege giving means for giving a privilege according to a display mode of a symbol to be stopped and displayed by the stop control means, and a privilege giving means.
In the first gaming state, a first transition determining means for determining whether to transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, and
In the second gaming state, a second transition determining means for determining whether to transition from the second gaming state to the third gaming state, and
With
In the second game state, a predetermined unit game is performed a predetermined number of times, and then, as compared with the predetermined unit game, the operation order or operation timing of the plurality of stop operation means for receiving the privilege is notified. It is a state in which a notification game with a high probability of playing is performed.
The third game state, said predetermined unit game performs specific number less than the predetermined number of times, followed by Ri state der to perform the notification game,
In the second gaming state, the second transition determining means can determine whether to shift from the second gaming state to the third gaming state when the remaining number of times of the predetermined unit game is larger than the specific number of times. Is,
A game machine characterized by that. A gaming machine having a first gaming state, a second gaming state, and a third gaming state as a state in which a game is performed.
A plurality of symbol display units capable of variable display and stop display of a plurality of symbols, and
An internal winning combination determining means that can determine an internal winning combination from multiple roles,
A symbol changing means for displaying the symbol in a variable manner and
A plurality of stop operation means provided corresponding to the plurality of symbol display units and accepting a stop operation for stopping the variable display of the symbol, and a stop operation means.
A stop control means for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol to be variablely displayed on the symbol display unit according to the operation of the internal winning combination and the stop operation means determined by the internal winning combination determining means.
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege according to a display mode of a symbol to be stopped and displayed by the stop control means,
In the first gaming state, a first transition determining means for determining whether to transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, and
In the second gaming state, a second transition determining means for determining whether to transition from the second gaming state to the third gaming state, and
With
In the second game state, a predetermined unit game is performed a predetermined number of times, and then, as compared with the predetermined unit game, the operation order or operation timing of the plurality of stop operation means for receiving the privilege is notified. It is a state in which a notification game with a high probability of playing is performed.
The third gaming state is a state in which the predetermined unit game is performed a specific number of times less than the predetermined number of times, and then the notification game is performed.
The first transition determining means determines whether to transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state for each unit game in the first gaming state, regardless of the type of the internal winning combination.
The second transition determining means determines whether to shift from the second gaming state to the third gaming state when the internal winning combination is a predetermined internal winning combination.
Yu Technical machine characterized in that.

Images